WO2007145094A1 - Thermally developable photosensitive material - Google Patents

Thermally developable photosensitive material Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007145094A1
WO2007145094A1 PCT/JP2007/061274 JP2007061274W WO2007145094A1 WO 2007145094 A1 WO2007145094 A1 WO 2007145094A1 JP 2007061274 W JP2007061274 W JP 2007061274W WO 2007145094 A1 WO2007145094 A1 WO 2007145094A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
silver
groups
photosensitive
image forming
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2007/061274
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Hideki Komatsu
Original Assignee
Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. filed Critical Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc.
Priority to JP2008521154A priority Critical patent/JPWO2007145094A1/en
Publication of WO2007145094A1 publication Critical patent/WO2007145094A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/494Silver salt compositions other than silver halide emulsions; Photothermographic systems ; Thermographic systems using noble metal compounds
    • G03C1/498Photothermographic systems, e.g. dry silver
    • G03C1/49836Additives
    • G03C1/49863Inert additives, e.g. surfactants, binders
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/005Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein
    • G03C1/04Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein with macromolecular additives; with layer-forming substances
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/494Silver salt compositions other than silver halide emulsions; Photothermographic systems ; Thermographic systems using noble metal compounds
    • G03C1/498Photothermographic systems, e.g. dry silver
    • G03C1/49809Organic silver compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/494Silver salt compositions other than silver halide emulsions; Photothermographic systems ; Thermographic systems using noble metal compounds
    • G03C1/498Photothermographic systems, e.g. dry silver
    • G03C1/49818Silver halides
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/494Silver salt compositions other than silver halide emulsions; Photothermographic systems ; Thermographic systems using noble metal compounds
    • G03C1/498Photothermographic systems, e.g. dry silver
    • G03C1/49827Reducing agents
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C7/00Multicolour photographic processes or agents therefor; Regeneration of such processing agents; Photosensitive materials for multicolour processes
    • G03C7/30Colour processes using colour-coupling substances; Materials therefor; Preparing or processing such materials
    • G03C7/3022Materials with specific emulsion characteristics, e.g. thickness of the layers, silver content, shape of AgX grains
    • G03C2007/3025Silver content

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a photothermographic material containing a non-photosensitive organic silver salt, photosensitive halogenated silver particles, a binder and a silver ion reducing agent on a support (also simply referred to as a heat-developable material or a photosensitive material). About.
  • the photothermographic material itself has been proposed for a long time (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).
  • This photothermographic material is characterized in that all the materials necessary for the reaction are contained in the film and remain in the film after processing.
  • Many studies have been conducted and reported to achieve both storability and developability.
  • there are techniques for bleaching capri nuclei generated during the storage period with polyhalogen compounds for example, see Patent Document 3
  • methods for controlling the Tg and degree of polymerization of the binder It is effective (for example, refer to Patent Documents 4 to 6).
  • each method has a sufficient level of damage to developability and meets the market demands.
  • Patent Document 1 U.S. Pat.No. 3,152,904
  • Patent Document 2 U.S. Pat.No. 3,457,075
  • Patent Document 3 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 07-002781
  • Patent Document 4 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-341483
  • Patent Document 5 Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2002-156727
  • Patent Document 6 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-279500 Disclosure of the invention
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above-described background circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a photothermographic material having both storability before development and developability.
  • a photothermographic material having an image forming layer containing a non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particle, a photosensitive silver halide particle, a silver ion reducing agent and a polymer binder on the support.
  • the binder amount of the forming layer is 25 to 35% by mass with respect to the total solid content contained in the image forming layer, and the binder contains a polymer having a polymerization degree of 1000 or more and 3000 or less.
  • An isocyanate compound is added to the image forming layer in a range of more than 0% by mass and 3.5% by mass or less with respect to the noinder amount of the image forming layer 1
  • the non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particle force comprising a silver salt of a fatty acid having a behenic acid content of 70 to 99.99mo 1%, according to any one of 1 to 4, Photothermographic material.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R and R each independently represents the number of carbon atoms.
  • a and A are each independently a hydroxyl group or a reduction or deprotection
  • n and m represent an integer of 3 to 5.
  • the total silver amount of the non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles and the photosensitive halogenated silver halide particles is 0.8 to 1.5 gZm 2 , The thermal image light-sensitive material described.
  • a photothermographic material having both preservative preservability and developability can be provided.
  • the binder made of the polymer contained in the image forming layer according to the present invention can carry silver salt, silver halide grains, a reducing agent, and other components.
  • the binder preferably used is transparent or translucent, Generally, it is colorless and includes natural polymers, synthetic polymers and copolymers, and other media for forming a film, for example, those described in paragraph “0069” of JP-A-2001-330918.
  • particularly preferred examples include high molecular compounds having an acetal group, alkyl methacrylates, aromatic methacrylates, and styrenes.
  • polymers polymer compounds
  • a polymer compound having an acetal group is a polyvinyl compound having an acetacetal structure.
  • the power of being setanore is more preferable than S, and in the f row, polybules shown in U.S. Pat.Nos. 2,358,836, 3,003,879, 2,828,204, British Patent 771,155, etc. Acetal can be mentioned.
  • Preferred for the present invention! /! Binders are polyvinyl acetals, particularly preferably polyvinyl butyral, which is preferably used as the main binder of the photosensitive layer.
  • the main binder as used herein refers to “a state in which the polymer occupies 50% by mass or more of the total binder in the image forming layer”. Therefore, other polymers may be blended and used within the range of less than 50% by weight of the total binder!
  • the polybutacetal rosin is preferably one that has been synthesized with the power butyl aldehyde and Z or acetoaldehyde, which is synthesized by the aceter Louis reaction of polybulal alcohol and various aldehydes.
  • the specific force of the acetalized portion of the polybutacetal resin is preferably in the range of 60 to 100% with respect to the total acetalized portion, more preferably 85% or more.
  • the portion acetalized by aldehyde is 60% or more, the water that causes capri when the obtained polyvinyl acetal resin is hard to absorb moisture becomes the heat-sensitive material of the present invention. It is preferable in order to prevent it from being brought in.
  • any aldehyde that can be acetalized such as formaldehyde, acetaldehyde, butyraldehyde, propyl aldehyde, and the like may be used.
  • each butyraldehyde is used alone. It is preferable to use a combination of butyraldehyde and acetoaldehyde.
  • the photothermographic material of the present invention is characterized in that the amount of binder in the image forming layer is 25 to 35% by mass with respect to the total solid content contained in the image forming layer.
  • the total solid content contained in the image forming layer includes all binders, non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles, photosensitive silver halide particles, silver ion reducing agents, etc. contained in the image forming layer. Refers to the solid mass of the material.
  • the material contained in the image forming layer is not particularly limited, and the image forming layer may contain a wide variety of materials as described in the following specification. When two or more types of solder are included, the binder amount in the present invention refers to the sum of the masses of all binders. [0021] (Binder polymerization degree of image forming layer)
  • the binder contained in the image forming layer according to the photothermographic material of the invention preferably contains at least one polymer having a polymerization degree of 1000 or more and 3000 or less. Furthermore, those having a degree of polymerization in the range of 1250 to 2750 are preferred. Further, when a plurality of binders are used, it is preferable that the polymer having a polymerization degree of 1000 or more and 3000 or less is 20% by mass to 95% by mass (20 to 95% by mass) with respect to the total binder amount. Is preferably 30% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less.
  • the photothermographic material of the present invention preferably has a glass transition temperature (Tg) of 70 to 105 ° C. or higher for the noinder used for the image forming layer. Furthermore, the temperature is preferably 70 to 95 ° C.
  • Tg of the binder is a value that is a measure of the thermal phase transition temperature inside each layer. If the Tg is too low, it promotes changes in photographic performance due to diffusion of the material during storage and changes in density after heat development. Therefore, it is not preferable. On the other hand, if Tg is too high, it is impossible to optimize the fluidity of the resin at a high temperature such as the drying temperature or the heat development temperature.
  • Tg the drying speed of the coating solution solvent
  • Tg the drying speed of the coating solution solvent
  • the diffusion speed of the material necessary for image formation is decreased.
  • cellulose esters which are polymers having a higher softening temperature, especially triacetyl cellulose. Polymers such as cellulose acetate butyrate are preferred. If necessary, two or more binder resins can be used in combination.
  • binders are used in an effective range to function as a binder for fixing elements of each layer.
  • the effective range can be easily determined by one skilled in the art.
  • the photothermographic material of the present invention can link binders together by bridging.
  • An isocyanate compound can be contained as a cross-linking agent.
  • the addition amount is preferably in the range of more than 0 and not more than 3.5% by mass with respect to the noinder.
  • the isocyanate compound used in the present invention is an isocyanate having at least two isocyanate groups and an adduct thereof (specifically, an aliphatic diisocyanate, cyclic).
  • Aliphatic diisocyanates having a group benzene diisocyanates, naphthalene diisocyanates, biphenyl diisocyanates, diphenylmethane diisocyanates, triphenylmethane diisocyanates, Examples include triisocyanates, tetraisocyanates, adducts of these isocyanates, and adducts of these isocyanates with divalent or trivalent polyalcohols.
  • an isocyanate compound described on pages 10 to 12 of JP-A-5 6-5535 can be used.
  • the adduct of isocyanate and polyalcohol has particularly high ability to improve interlayer adhesion, and prevent layer peeling, image shift and bubble generation.
  • the strong isocyanate may be contained in any part of the photothermographic material.
  • the support especially when the support is paper, it can be included in the size composition
  • image forming layer photosensitive layer
  • surface protective layer intermediate layer, antihalation layer, subbing layer, etc.
  • many 3.5 mass 0/0 is preferably added in the range, than 0 for.
  • the non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt that can be used in the present invention is relatively stable to light, but is 80 ° C or higher in the presence of exposed photosensitive silver halide and a reducing agent.
  • the non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt can be any aliphatic carboxylate salt that can supply silver ion that can be reduced by a reducing agent!
  • the silver salt of an aliphatic carboxylic acid is particularly a silver salt of a long chain aliphatic carboxylic acid (having 10 to 30, preferably 15 to 28 carbon atoms). preferable.
  • the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt examples include silver lignocerate, silver behenate, silver arachidate, silver stearate, silver oleate, silver laurate, silver cabrate, silver myristate, silver palmitate, Including strong acid silver and mixtures thereof.
  • the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt preferably contains 70 to 99 mol% of silver behenate. Further, it is preferable to contain 80 mol% or more and less than 90 mol% of silver behenate. Further, it is preferable to use an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt having a silver uric acid silver content of 2 mol% or less, more preferably 1 mol% or less, and still more preferably 0.1 mol% or less.
  • the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt of the present invention can be used in a desired amount, but the total silver amount including halogenated silver is preferably 0.8 to 1.5 gZm 2 and more preferably 1.0 to 1. A range of 3 gZm 2 is preferred.
  • the non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles of the present invention preferably have a spherical equivalent diameter of 0.05 ⁇ m or more and 0.5 m or less. More preferably, it is 0.10 111 or more and 0.5 m or less.
  • the particle size distribution is preferably monodisperse.
  • the monodispersity can be expressed by the standard deviation of the average diameter, and the standard deviation of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles of the present invention is preferably 0.3 m or less. Furthermore, it is preferably 0.2 m or less.
  • the particle size and size distribution are calculated from a laser diffraction method, a centrifugal sedimentation light transmission method, an X-ray transmission method, an electrical detection band method, a light shielding method, ultrasonic attenuation spectroscopy, and an image.
  • the particle size distribution can be determined by a generally known particle size distribution measurement method. Among these, for fine particles, a laser diffraction method or a method of calculating from an image is preferable. Further, the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles dispersed in a liquid preferred by the laser diffraction method can be carried out by a commercially available laser diffraction particle size distribution measuring apparatus.
  • the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles in the present invention may be prepared by reacting a solution containing silver ions with an aliphatic alkanoic acid alkali metal salt solution or suspension. And are preferred.
  • the solution containing silver ions is preferably an aqueous silver nitrate solution
  • the aliphatic carboxylic acid metal salt solution or suspension is preferably an aqueous solution or aqueous dispersion.
  • the addition and mixing are preferably performed at the same time.
  • the method of adding to the liquid surface of the reaction bath or the method of adding to the liquid may be used, but the method of adding and mixing in the transfer means is preferred.
  • Mixing in the transfer means means line mixing, and mixing of a solution containing silver ions with an alkali metal salt of an aliphatic carboxylic acid salt or suspension before entering a batch storing a mixture containing reactants. It is preferred to be done ⁇ . Any means such as a mechanical mixer such as a homomixer, a static mixer, or a turbulent effect may be used as the stirring means in the mixing section, but it is preferable not to use mechanical stirring.
  • the mixing in the transfer means includes a third solution such as water or a circulating solution of the mixed solution stored in the batch after mixing. Liquids or suspensions may be mixed.
  • the concentration of the aqueous silver nitrate solution is preferably 1 to 15% by mass, and the concentration of the aliphatic carboxylic acid metal salt aqueous solution or the aqueous dispersion is preferably 1 to 5% by mass. Outside the above concentration range, productivity is significantly degraded in the low concentration region, and it is difficult to adjust the particle size and size distribution within the range of the present invention in the high concentration region which is not practical.
  • the mixed molar ratio of silver nitrate to the aliphatic carboxylic acid alkali metal salt is preferably in the range of 0.9 to 1.1, the particle size and size distribution should be adjusted within the range of the present invention.
  • the yield of aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt is reduced, and the formation of acid silver that causes capri is likely to occur.
  • the prepared aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt is preferably washed with water and then dried from the viewpoint of storage stability. Washing with water is performed mainly to remove unreacted ions, but may be performed with an organic solvent in consideration of the subsequent drying step.
  • the washing with water is preferably performed at 50 ° C or lower. Furthermore, it is preferable to carry out at 30 ° C or less. If it is carried out at 50 ° C. or higher, it is difficult to adjust the particle size and size distribution within the scope of the present invention.
  • the drying is preferably performed at a temperature lower than the phase transition temperature of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt. Furthermore, it is preferable to carry out at 50 ° C or less, and it is preferred to carry out at a low temperature as much as possible! For drying above the phase transition temperature, the particle size and size distribution are It becomes difficult to adjust to the range.
  • the preparation of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt is preferably carried out in the absence of photosensitive halogenated silver particles.
  • the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt of the present invention can be used in a desired amount, but the total silver amount including the halogenated silver is 0.8 to 1.5 g / m 2 as the coating amount of the photothermographic material. Further preferably, it is preferably in the range of 1.0 to 1.3 g / m 2 .
  • alkali metal salts examples include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, and lithium hydroxide. Of these, it is preferable to use one kind of alkali metal salt such as potassium hydroxide, but it is also preferable to use sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide in combination. As a combination ratio, it is preferable that the molar ratio of the above-mentioned hydroxide salt is in the range of 10:90 to 75:25. When used in the above range when reacted with an aliphatic carboxylic acid to form an alkali metal salt of an aliphatic carboxylic acid, the viscosity of the reaction solution can be controlled in a good state.
  • the emulsion containing the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt grains according to the present invention is a mixture of free aliphatic carboxylic acid and aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt that forms a silver salt, but the former ratio is the latter. Is low from the viewpoint of image storage stability and the like. That is, the emulsion according to the present invention preferably contains an aliphatic carboxylic acid in an amount of 3 to 1 Omol% with respect to the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt grains. The content is particularly preferably 4 to 8 mol%.
  • the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt and the free aliphatic carboxylic acid amount and the respective ratios or The ratio of free fatty acids to total aliphatic carboxylic acids will be calculated.
  • the shape of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt that can be used in the present invention is not particularly limited and may be any shape such as a needle shape, a rod shape, a flat plate shape, and a flake shape.
  • flake-shaped aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salts and short needle-shaped or rectangular parallelepiped-shaped carboxylic acid silver salts having a major axis / minor axis length ratio of 5 or less are preferably used.
  • the flaky aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt is defined as follows. Observe the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt with an electron microscope, approximate the shape of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particle to a rectangular parallelepiped, and define the sides of the rectangular parallelepiped as a, b, c (c is b ) When calculating with the shorter numbers a and b, calculate X as follows.
  • X is obtained from about 200 particles, and when the average value X (average) is obtained, particles satisfying the relationship of x (average) ⁇ 1.5 are defined as flakes. Preferably 30 ⁇ x (average) ⁇ 1.5, more preferably 20 ⁇ x (average) ⁇ 2.0. Incidentally, an acicular shape is l ⁇ x (average) less than 1.5.
  • a can be regarded as the thickness of a tabular particle having a main plane with b and c as sides.
  • the average of a is 0.01 ⁇ m or more, 0.23 ⁇ 111 or more, more preferably 0.1 m or more and 0.20 m or less.
  • the average of cZb is preferably 1 or more and 6 or less, more preferably 1.05 or more and 4 or less, further preferably 1.1 or more and 3 or less, and particularly preferably 1.1 or more and 2 or less.
  • the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt according to the present invention may be a crystal particle having a core Z shell structure as disclosed in European Patent 1168069A1 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-23303.
  • the core Z shell structure all or part of either the core part or the shell part is made of an organic silver salt other than silver aliphatic carboxylate, for example, an organic compound such as phthalic acid or benzimidazole.
  • Silver salt may be used as a constituent of the crystal grains.
  • the tabular aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles may be preliminarily dispersed together with a binder, a surfactant or the like, if necessary, and then dispersed and pulverized with a media disperser or a high-pressure homogenizer.
  • a general stirrer such as an anchor type or a propeller type, a high-speed rotating centrifugal radiation type stirrer (dissolver), or a high-speed rotating shear type stirrer (homomixer) can be used.
  • a rolling mill such as a ball mill, a planetary ball mill, and a vibration ball mill
  • a bead mill that is a medium agitation mill, an attritor, and other basket mills
  • high-pressure homogenizers can be used, such as a type that collides with walls, plugs, etc., a type that divides the liquid into multiple parts that collide with each other at high speed, and a type that passes a thin orifice.
  • Ceramics used for the ceramic beads used when dispersing the media include yttrium-stabilized zircoure and zircoua reinforced alumina (these are because of the low generation of impurities due to friction with the beads and the disperser during dispersion).
  • a ceramic containing zircoure is hereinafter preferably abbreviated as zircoyu).
  • the apparatus used for dispersing the tabular aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles according to the present invention for example, zirconium, alumina, nitriding Ceramics such as silicon and boron nitride or diamond Among them, it is preferable to use zircoyu.
  • zirconium, alumina, nitriding Ceramics such as silicon and boron nitride or diamond Among them, it is preferable to use zircoyu.
  • a binder concentration of 0.1 to 10% of the weight of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver. It is preferable that the liquid temperature does not exceed 45 ° C throughout the dispersion.
  • the number of operations is preferably 2 times or more.
  • the peripheral speed is preferably 6 to 13 mZ seconds.
  • the non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles are formed in the presence of a compound that functions as a crystal growth inhibitor or a dispersant.
  • the compound that functions as a crystal growth inhibitor or dispersant is preferably an organic compound having a hydroxyl group or a carboxyl group.
  • the compound functioning as a dispersant and not a crystal growth inhibitor for aliphatic silver carboxylate particles coexists with the compound in the production process of aliphatic silver carboxylate particles.
  • a compound having a function and an effect of monodispersing with a smaller particle size than that produced under the conditions is described.
  • Specific examples include monohydric alcohols having 10 or less carbon atoms, preferably secondary alcohols, tertiary alcohols, glycols such as ethylene glycol and propylene glycol, polyethers such as polyethylene glycol, and glycerin.
  • the preferred amount of added calories is 10 to 200% by mass with respect to the silver aliphatic carboxylate.
  • branched fat containing isomers such as isoheptanoic acid, isodecanoic acid, isotridecanoic acid, isomyristic acid, isopalmitic acid, isostearic acid, isoarachidic acid, isobehenic acid, isohexaconic acid, etc.
  • Group carboxylic acids are also preferred.
  • preferred side chains include an alkyl group or a alkenyl group having 4 or less carbon atoms.
  • aliphatic unsaturated carboxylic acids such as palmitoleic acid, oleic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, moloctic acid, eicosenoic acid, arachidonic acid, eicosapentaenoic acid, enolekaic acid, docosapentaenoic acid-docosahexaenoic acid, and ceracolonic acid
  • acids include acids.
  • a preferable addition amount is 0.5 to: LOmol% of silver aliphatic carbonate.
  • Glycosides such as dalcoside, galactoside, fructoside, trehalose, sucrose, etc.
  • Trehalose-type disaccharides polysaccharides such as glycogen, dextrin, dextran, alginic acid, cellosolves such as methyl ceguchi sorb, ethyl ceguchi sorb, water-soluble organic solvents such as sorbitan, sorbit, ethyl acetate, methyl acetate, dimethylformamide, polyvinyl alcohol
  • water-soluble polymers such as polyacrylic acid, acrylic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, carboxymethylenosenorose, hydroxypropenoresenorerose, hydroxypropinoremethenoresenorelose, polybylpyrrolidone, and gelatin.
  • a preferable addition amount is 0.1 to 20% by mass with respect to the silver aliphatic carboxylate.
  • Alcohols having 10 or less carbon atoms preferably secondary alcohols such as isopropyl alcohol, and tertiary alcohols such as t-butyl alcohol increase the solubility of the aliphatic carboxylic acid alkali metal salt in the particle production process. By reducing the viscosity, the dispersion is monodispersed and has a small particle size by increasing the stirring efficiency.
  • Branched aliphatic carboxylic acids and aliphatic unsaturated carboxylic acids have higher steric hindrance than the straight chain aliphatic carboxylic acid silver, which is the main component, when the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver is crystallized, and the disorder of the crystal lattice is larger. As a result, large crystals are not formed, resulting in a small particle size.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) it is preferable to use the compound represented by the general formula (1) alone or in combination with another reducing agent having a different chemical structure as a silver ion reducing agent.
  • the reducing agent used here is preferably a bisphenol type reducing agent.
  • Examples of reducing agents that can be used in combination with the compound represented by the general formula (1) include paragraph numbers “0043” to “0045” of JP-A-11-65021, page 7 line 34 to page 18 of European Patent Publication (EP0803764A1).
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably contained in an image forming layer containing an organic acid silver salt, but may be contained in an adjacent non-image forming layer!
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a alkenyl group is preferable, and a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group is more preferable.
  • These substituents may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, an alkyl group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • R2 and R3 each represent a branched alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • branched alkyl groups include t-butyl, t-amyl, i-propyl, i-butyl, i-propyl, 1,1-dimethylbutyl, 1-methylcyclopentyl, 1-methylcyclobutyl, Examples include 1-methylcyclopropyl group, 1methylbutyl group, 1,3 dimethylbutyl group, 1-methylpropyl group, 1,1,2-trimethylpropyl group, 1-ethyl-1-methylpropyl group, and the like.
  • a t-butyl group, a 1,1-dimethylbutyl group or a tamyl group is preferable, and a tamyl group is more preferable.
  • These branched alkyl groups may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, a mercapto group, a halogen atom, an amino group, an imide group, a silyl group, and a hydrazino group.
  • a and A are each a hydroxyl group or deprotected to form a hydroxyl group.
  • Examples of the group that can be deprotected to form a hydroxyl group include groups that can be deprotected by the action of acid and Z or heat to form a hydroxyl group.
  • ether groups (methoxy, t-butoxy, aryloxy, benzyl Oxy, triphenyl methoxy, trimethylsilyloxy, etc.), hemiacetal group (tetrahydroloxy, etc.), ester group (acetyloxy, benzoyloxy, p-trobenzoyloxy, formyloxy, trifluoroacetyloxy, bivaluloyloxy, etc.), carbonate Groups (such as ethoxycarbonyloxy, phenoxycarbonyloxy, t-butyloxycarboxyloxy, etc.), sulfonate groups (such as p-toluenesulfo-loxy, benzensulfo-loxy, etc.), strong rubamoyloxy groups (such as phenylcarbamoyloxy) Thiocarboxoxy group (benzylthiocarboxoxy etc.), nitrate ester group, sulphateate group (2,4
  • the melting point is preferably 80 to 250 ° C and the thermal decomposition temperature is preferably 200 ° C or higher.
  • Thermal development in which a reducing agent remains in the photosensitive material after development processing
  • the reducing agent with higher crystallinity suppresses material diffusion during storage, so the concentration of the capri portion due to the reduction reaction during image storage Since the fluctuation is small, the crystallinity of the reducing agent is high, which is better.
  • the reducing agent may be contained in the coating solution by any method such as a solution form, an emulsified dispersion form, or a solid fine particle dispersion form, and may be contained in the photothermographic material.
  • 3,801,321 such as 4-benzenesulfonamidophenol, 2-benzenesulfonamidophenol, 2,6-dichloro-4benzenesulfonamidophenol, 4-benzensulfonamidonaphthol, etc.
  • Such sulfonamide phenols or sulfonamide naphthols can also be used as a silver ion reducing agent.
  • the amount of reducing agent used varies depending on the type of aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt, reducing agent, and other additives. L0 mol, preferably 0.1 to 3 mol is suitable.
  • a reducing agent is added to and mixed with a photosensitive emulsion solution composed of light-sensitive silver halide and aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt grains and a solvent immediately before coating. Small and preferred.
  • Photosensitive silver halide also referred to as “halogen-silver” is intrinsically light-absorbing as a characteristic of halogen-silver crystals, or artificially physicochemically radiates visible to infrared light. When absorbing light in any region within the light wavelength range from the ultraviolet light region to the infrared light region, it can absorb, and there is a physical / physical change in the silver halide crystal and in the Z or crystal surface. It refers to halogen-molybdenum crystal grains that have been processed and produced as possible.
  • the halogenated silver of the present invention can be prepared as a halogenated silver grain emulsion (also called a halogenated silver emulsion) using a known method. That is, any of acid method, neutral method, ammonia method, etc. can be used. As a method of reacting a soluble silver salt and a soluble halogen salt, any one of a one-side mixing method, a simultaneous mixing method, a combination thereof and the like can be used. Of these methods, the so-called controlled double jet method is preferred, in which halogen silver halide grains are prepared while controlling the formation conditions.
  • a silver halide silver seed grain is divided into two stages: grain nucleation and grain growth, and these can be performed continuously at once. Nuclei (seed grain) formation and grain growth are also possible. Alternatively, the method may be performed separately.
  • the controlled double jet method which controls the particle formation conditions such as pAg and pH, is preferable because the particle shape and size can be controlled. For example, when performing a method in which nucleation and grain growth are performed separately, first, a silver salt Aqueous solution and halide solution are uniformly and rapidly mixed in gelatin solution, and after nucleation (nucleation process), particles are grown while supplying silver salt solution and halide solution under controlled pAg, pH, etc.
  • Halogenated silver particles are prepared by a grain growth process. After the formation of grains, the desired salt halide emulsion can be obtained by removing unnecessary salts, etc. by a known desalting method such as noodle method, fluorination method, ultrafiltration method, electrodialysis method, etc. Obtainable.
  • the particle size distribution of the halogen silver halide grains according to the present invention is preferably monodisperse.
  • the monodispersion here means that the coefficient of variation of the particle diameter obtained by the following formula is 30% or less. Preferably it is 20% or less, More preferably, it is 15% or less.
  • silver halide grains examples include cubes, octahedrons, tetrahedral grains, tabular grains, spherical grains, rod-shaped grains, and potato grains. Among these, cubic, octahedral grains, etc. A tetradecahedral, tabular halogen silver halide grain is preferred.
  • the average aspect ratio is preferably 1.5 to 100, more preferably 2 to 50. These are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,264,337, 5,314,798, and 5,320,958 to easily obtain the desired tabular grains. Can do. Further, grains having rounded corners of silver halide grains can be preferably used.
  • the crystal habit of the outer surface of the silver halide grain is selected according to the adsorption reaction of the sensitizing dye on the surface of the halogenated silver grain.
  • a sensitizing dye having a property it is preferable to use silver halide grains having a relatively high ratio of crystal habits adapted to the selectivity.
  • the ratio of the [100] face is high on the outer surface of the silver halide grain. It is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 70% or more, and particularly preferably 80% or more.
  • the ratio of the Miller index [100] plane is based on the adsorption dependency of the [111] plane and the [100] plane in the adsorption of the sensitizing dye. T. Tani, J. ImagingSci., 29, 165 (1985).
  • the silver halide grains used in the present invention are preferably prepared using a low molecular weight gelatin having an average molecular weight of 50,000 or less at the time of forming the grains, but particularly used at the time of nucleation of the silver halide silver grains. Is preferred.
  • the low molecular weight gelatin preferably has an average molecular weight of 50,000 or less, more preferably 2,000 to 40,000, and particularly preferably 5,000 to 25,000.
  • the average molecular weight of gelatin can be measured by gel filtration chromatography.
  • Low molecular weight gelatin can be hydrolyzed by adding gelatin-degrading enzyme to a commonly used gelatin aqueous solution with an average molecular weight of about 100,000, heating by adding acid or alkali, and heating at atmospheric pressure or under pressure.
  • the concentration of the dispersion medium at the time of nucleation of the silver halide grains is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 0.05 to 3.0% by mass.
  • the halogen silver halide grains used in the present invention preferably use a compound represented by the following general formula at the time of grain formation.
  • represents a hydrogen atom, SO M, or CO—B—COOM
  • M represents a hydrogen atom
  • m and n each represents 0 to 50, and p represents 1 to 100.
  • the polyethylene oxide compound represented by the above general formula is a process for producing a gelatin aqueous solution in the production of a normal silver halide photographic light-sensitive material, a water-soluble halide and a water-soluble compound in the gelatin solution. It has been used preferably as an antifoaming agent for significant foaming when the emulsion raw materials are stirred or moved, such as the step of adding a functional silver salt and the step of coating an emulsion on a support. A technique used as a foaming agent is described in, for example, JP-A-44 9497.
  • the polyethylene oxide compound also functions as an antifoaming agent during nucleation.
  • the compound represented by the above general formula is preferably used in an amount of 1% by mass or less based on silver, more preferably 0.01 to 0.1% by mass.
  • the polyethylene oxide compound is preferably added in advance to the dispersion medium before nucleation as long as it exists at the time of nucleation, but it may be added during nucleation.
  • the silver salt aqueous solution to be used may be added to the ride aqueous solution. Preferably, it is used by adding 0.01 to 2.0% by mass to the aqueous solution of Rhino, Ride or both.
  • the compound is preferably present for a time of at least 50% of the nucleation step, more preferably 70% or more.
  • the polyethylene oxide compound may be added as a powder, or may be added in a solvent such as methanol.
  • the temperature at the time of nucleation is usually 5 to 60 ° C, preferably 15 to 50 ° C. Even if the temperature is constant, the temperature rise pattern (the temperature at the start of nucleation is Even when the temperature is increased gradually during nucleation at 25 ° C and the temperature at the end of nucleation is 40 ° C) or vice versa, it is preferable to control within the above temperature range. .
  • the concentration of the silver salt aqueous solution and halide aqueous solution used for nucleation is preferably 3.5 mol ZL or less, and more preferably 0.01 to 2.5 mol ZL.
  • the pH at the time of nucleation is usually a force that can be set in the range of 1.7 to 10.
  • the pH on the alkali side broadens the particle size distribution of the nuclei to be formed, and is preferably pH 2 to 6.
  • pBr at the time of nucleation is usually 0.05 to 3.0, preferably 1.0 to 2.5, more preferably 1.5 to 2.0.
  • the average grain size of the silver halide grains is usually 10 to 50 nm, preferably 10 to 40 nm, and more preferably 10 to 35 nm. If the average grain size of the silver halide grains is smaller than lOnm, the image density will decrease, or the light-irradiated image will be stored (the image obtained by thermal development will be used for diagnosis in a bright room, or stored in a bright room) The storage stability) may deteriorate. If it exceeds 50 nm, the image density may be lowered.
  • the average particle size referred to here means that the halogen-silver particles contained in the halogen-silver particle emulsion are cubic or octahedral so-called normal crystals. Say the length of the ridge.
  • the silver halide grains are tabular grains, it means the diameter when converted into a circular image having the same area as the projected area of the main surface.
  • the diameter when considering a sphere equivalent to the volume of the halogenated silver particle is calculated as the particle size. Measurement is performed using an electron micrograph, The average particle size was determined by averaging the measured values of the particle size of 300 particles.
  • the gradation of image density can be adjusted by using silver halide grains having an average particle diameter of 55 to 100 nm and halogenated silver grains having an average particle diameter of 10 to 50 nm in combination.
  • the image density can be improved, and the decrease in image density over time can be improved (smaller).
  • the ratio (mass ratio) of the silver halide grains having an average particle diameter of 10 to 50 nm and the silver halide grains having an average particle diameter of 55 to 100 nm is preferably 95: 5 to 50:50, more preferably 90: 10-60: 40.
  • the two types of silver halide emulsions may be mixed and contained in the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer is composed of two or more layers for gradation adjustment and the like, and each layer contains the silver halide emulsions having the two average grain sizes separately. .
  • silver halide grains containing silver iodide can be preferably used.
  • the silver iodide content is preferably 5 to: LOO mol%. More preferably 40 to: LOO mol 0/0, more preferably 70: A LOO mol 0/0, preferably especially 90: a LOO mol%. If the silver iodide content is in this range, the intra-grain halogen composition distribution may be uniform, may be changed stepwise, or may be changed continuously. Further, halogen silver halide grains having a core Z shell structure having a high silver iodide content in the interior and Z or on the surface can also be preferably used. The preferred structure is a double to five-fold structure, more preferably a two to four-fold core Z seal particle.
  • a method for introducing silver iodide into silver halide grains a method of adding an aqueous alkali iodide solution during grain formation, fine grain silver iodide, fine grain silver iodobromide, fine grain silver iodochloride, fine grain iodine, A method of adding at least one fine particle among silver chlorobromide and a method using an iodide ion releasing agent described in JP-A-5-323487 and JP-A-6-11780 are preferred.
  • the silver halide grains according to the present invention preferably exhibit direct transition absorption derived from a silver iodide crystal structure at a wavelength of 350 to 440 nm. Whether these silver halides have light absorption of direct transition can be easily distinguished by the fact that exciton absorption due to direct transition is observed in the vicinity of 400 to 430 nm. [0101] (Heat conversion internal latent image type silver halide grains)
  • the photosensitive silver halide silver particle according to the present invention is a heat conversion internal latent image type (internal latent image type after heat development) halogen silver halide particle disclosed in JP-A-2003-270755 and JP-A-2005-106927, that is,
  • the silver halide grains are preferably silver halide grains whose surface sensitivity is lowered by conversion from the surface latent image type to the internal latent image type by heat development.
  • a latent image that can function as a catalyst for a development reaction (reduction reaction of silver ions by a silver ion reducing agent) is formed on the surface of the halogen silver halide grains, and after the thermal development process has elapsed.
  • a larger number of latent images are formed in the interior of the silver halide grains than the surface of the silver halide grains. It is preferable in terms of storage stability.
  • the heat-converted internal latent image type silver halide grains are 0.00 per mol of an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt that can function as a silver ion source. It is preferably used in the range of 1 to 0.7 mol, preferably 0.03 to 0.5 mol.
  • the aggregation of silver halide grains is prevented, the silver halide grains are dispersed relatively uniformly, and finally the developed silver is dispersed. It is preferable that the desired shape can be controlled.
  • the hydrophilic groups such as amino and carboxyl groups of gelatin are chemically modified according to the conditions of use, etc., to improve the properties of gelatin. Those modified are preferred.
  • the hydrophobization modification of the amino group in the gelatin molecule includes forces such as phenylcarbamoylation, phthalation, hatching, acetylation, benzoylation, ditrophylation, etc. is not.
  • the substitution rate is preferably 95% or more, more preferably 99% or more.
  • methyl esterification or amidation which may be combined with a hydrophobic modification of a carboxyl group, may be mentioned, but it is not particularly limited thereto.
  • the substitution rate of the carboxyl group is preferably 50 to 90%, more preferably 70 to 90%.
  • the hydrophobic group in the above-mentioned hydrophobization modification refers to a group whose hydrophobicity is increased by substituting the amino group and / or carboxyl group of gelatin.
  • the halogen silver halide emulsion is prepared by using a polymer that dissolves in both water and an organic solvent as described below, instead of gelatin or in combination with gelatin.
  • the silver halide silver halide emulsion is uniformly dispersed in an organic solvent system.
  • organic solvent include alcohol-based, ester-based, and ketone-based compounds.
  • ketone organic solvents such as methanol, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, and jetyl ketone are preferable.
  • the polymer that is soluble in both water and the organic solvent may be any of natural polymers, synthetic polymers, and copolymers.
  • synthetic polymers for example, gelatins, rubbers and the like modified so as to belong to the category of the present invention can be used.
  • polymers belonging to the following classifications can be used by introducing functional groups suitable for the purpose of preventing aggregation and uniform dispersion.
  • polystyrene-butadiene copolymers examples include polybulu alcohols, hydroxyethyl celluloses, cellulose acetates, cellulose acetate butyrates, polybutylpyrrolidones, casein, starch, polyacrylic acid and acrylic esters, polymethyl Methacrylic acid and methacrylic acid esters, polyvinyl chlorides, polymethacrylic acids, styrene-maleic anhydride copolymers, styrene-acrylonitrile copolymers, styrene-butadiene copolymers, polybulucetals ( Polybulformal and Polybutyral), polyesters, polyurethanes, phenoxy resins, polysalts and vinylidenes, polyepoxides, polycarbonates, polyvinyl acetates, polyolefins, cellulose esters, polyamides And the like.
  • these polymers may be copolymers, but particularly preferred are polymers obtained by
  • the polymer may be a polymer that dissolves in both water and an organic solvent in the same state, but may be dissolved in water or an organic solvent by pH control or temperature control, or may be insoluble. included.
  • a polymer having an acidic group such as a carboxyl group becomes hydrophilic in a dissociated state depending on the type, but becomes lipophilic when it is lowered to a non-dissociated state and can be made soluble in a solvent.
  • polymers having amino groups become lipophilic when the pH is raised, and become ionic and water-soluble when the pH is lowered.
  • the cloud point phenomenon is well known for non-active agents.
  • the polymer that dissolves in both the water and the organic solvent may be adjusted by dissolving the pH and the like as described above, or may be unadjusted, but at least 1% by mass or more (25 ° C with respect to water).
  • C) and an organic solvent having a solubility of 5% by mass or more (25 ° C.) in methyl ethyl ketone is preferred.
  • so-called block polymers, graft polymers, comb polymers, and the like are more suitable as polymers that are soluble in both water and organic solvents used in the present invention.
  • Comb polymers are particularly preferred.
  • the isoelectric point of the polymer is preferably pH 6 or less.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated monomer containing a polyoxyalkylene group such as ethylene oxide or propylene oxide.
  • a polyoxyalkylene group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer those having a polyoxyalkylene group represented by the following general formula are particularly preferable.
  • E represents an ethylene group
  • P represents a propylene group
  • T represents a butylene group
  • R represents a substituent.
  • the butylene group include tetramethylene and i-butylene groups.
  • k represents an integer of 1 to 300
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 60
  • Preferably, ⁇ MA ki ma 1 ⁇ 200, mi ma 0 ⁇ 30, ⁇ ma 0 ⁇ 20.
  • k + m + n ⁇ 2 is preferable in order to be a comb polymer.
  • the polyoxyalkylene group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the substituent represented by R represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, and the like, and examples of the alkyl group include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, hexyl, octyl, dodecyl and the like.
  • alkyl group examples include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, hexyl, octyl, dodecyl and the like.
  • aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl groups
  • heterocyclic groups include enyl and pyridyl groups.
  • These groups further include halogen atoms, alkoxy groups (methoxy, ethoxy, butoxy, etc.), alkylthio groups (methylthio, butylthio, etc.), acyl groups (acetyl, benzoyl, etc.), alkanamide groups (acetoamide, propionamide, etc.) ), An arylamide group (such as benzoylamide) or the like. Further, these substituent groups may be further substituted by these groups.
  • the polyoxyalkylene group represented by the general formula can be introduced into the polymer by using an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having the polyoxyalkylene group.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having these groups include polyoxyalkylene acrylate (and meta acrylate), which are commercially available hydroxypoly (oxyalkylene) materials such as trade name " Pull mouth-g '[Pluronic (Asahi Denki Kogyo Co., Ltd.)], Ade force polyether (Asahi Denka Kogyo Co., Ltd.), Carbowax [Carbowax (Glico-Products Co., Ltd.)], Triton [Roriton And PE G (Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd.) and the like can be produced by reacting them with acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylic chloride, methacrylic chloride or acrylic acid anhydride by a known method.
  • acrylic acid meth
  • commercially available monomers include, as a hydroxyl group-terminated polyalkylene glycol mono (meth) ate acrylate manufactured by NOF Corporation, Blemmer PE-90, Blemmer PE-200, Blemmer PE-350, Blemmer AE-90.
  • Blemmer AE 200, Blemmer AE 400, Blemmer PP—1000, Blemmer PP—500, Blemmer PP—800, Blemmer AP—150, Blemmer AP—400, Blemmer AP—550, Blemmer AP—800, Blemmer 50PEP— 300, Blemmer 70PEP-350B, Blemmer AEP series, Blemmer 55PET-400, Blemmer 30PET-800, Blemmer 55PET-80, Blemmer AET series, Blemmer 30PPT-800, Blemmer 50 ⁇ -800, Blemmer 70 ⁇ -800, Blemmer APT series , Blemmer 10PPB-500B, Blemmer 10APB-500B and the like.
  • LIGHT ESTER MC LIGHT ESTER 130MA, LIGHT ESTER 041MA, LIGHT ATALYLATE BO-A, LIGHT ATTALRATE EC— A, light attalate MTG A, Light Atari les over preparative 130A, light Atari rate dpm A, Light Atari rate P- 200A, light Atari rate NP- 4EA, Light Atari rate NP- 8EA and the like.
  • a graft polymer using a so-called macromer can also be used.
  • the useful molecular weight is in the range of 10,000 to 100,000, the preferred range is 10,000 to 50,000, and the particularly preferred range is in the range of 10,000 to 20,000. If the molecular weight is less than 10,000, the effect cannot be exerted, and if it exceeds 100,000, the polymerizability with the copolymerization monomer forming the main chain deteriorates. Specifically, Toagosei Co., Ltd. AA-6, AS-6S, AN-6S, etc. can be used.
  • polyoxyalkylene group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Other monomers specifically reacted with the above monomers include (meth) acrylic acid esters, (meth) acrylamides, aryl esters, aryloxyethanols, buresters, bur esters. , Dialkyl itaconate, mono (or di) alkyl esters of fumaric acid, etc., crotonic acid, itaconic acid, (meth) acrylonitrile, maleylnitrile, styrene, etc. [0119] Specific examples include the following compounds.
  • Acrylic acid esters methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate, chloro ethino rare acrylate, 2-hydroxy ethino rare acrylate, trimethylol propane mono acrylate, benzyl acrylate, methoxy benzyl Atalylate, furfuryl acrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl acrylate, etc.
  • methacrylic acid esters methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, propyl methacrylate, chlorethyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate Trimethylolpropane monometatalylate, benzenoremetatalylate, methoxybenzyl methacrylate, furfuryl methacrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl methacrylate, acrylamides: acrylamide, N-alkyl Acrylamide (Alkyl group
  • alkyloxyacrylamide, methoxymethylacrylamide, butoxymethylacrylamide, etc. methacrylamides: methacrylamide, N-alkylmethacrylamide, N-hydroxyethyl-N-methylmethacrylamide, N2-acetamidoethyl N-acetyl Merylamide, methoxymethyl methacrylamide, butoxymethyl methacrylamide, etc.
  • allylic compounds allylic esters (alaryl acetate, allylic acid proallyl, allylic caprylate, allylic laurate, allylic palmitate, allylic stearate, benzoic acid) Acid aryl, acetoacetyl acetate, lactyl lactate, etc.), aryloxetano mononole, etc., butyl ethers: alkyl butyl ether (hexyl vinyl ether, octino levinino leetenore, decino levinino) Leetenore, ethinorehexinorevininoreethenore, methoxetinorevininoreetenore, ethoxyethinorevininoatenore, chronoretinolinobine ether, 1 methyl 2, 2-dimethylpropyl vinyl ether, 2 ethino lebutinore vininore Tenole, hydroxyeth
  • Dialkyl esters or monoalkyl esters of fumaric acid dibutyl fumarate, etc., crotonic acid, itaconic acid, acrylonitrile, metatalonitrile, maleylnitrile, styrene, etc.
  • amphiphilic polymer for preparing halogenated silver used in the present invention.
  • the present invention is not limited to these.
  • an azo polymer polymerization initiator an azo polymer polymerization initiator or an organic peroxide can be used.
  • the azo polymer polymerization initiator ABN-R (2, 2'-azobisisobuty-tolyl), ABN-V (2, 2'-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) manufactured by Nippon Hydrazine Kogyo Co., Ltd. )), ABN- ⁇ (2, 2 '-azobis (2-methyl petit-tolyl))).
  • Organic Peroxides include benzoyl peroxide, dimethyl ethyl ketone peroxide, lauryl peroxide, Pertetra A, Perhexa HC, Perhexa TMH, Parhexa C, and Monohex, manufactured by NOF Corporation.
  • Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone and ⁇ -methoxyphenol, which are quinone-based inhibitors. Seiko Chemical's phenothiazine, methoquinone, non-flex arno, ⁇ (methylhydroquinone), TBH (t-butylhydroquinone), PBQ (p-benzoquinone), tolquinone, TBQ (t-butyl-p-benzoquinone), 2,5-diphenyl p-benzoquinone Etc.
  • the isoelectric point of the polymer is preferably pH 6 or less. If a polymer with a high isoelectric point is used, as will be described later, when desalting of silver halide silver particles by the coagulation precipitation method, decomposition of the silver halide grains is promoted, and photographic performance is adversely affected. It is. In addition, when dispersing the silver or silver oxide fine particles in the solvent, it is necessary to disperse unless the pH is raised.
  • the isoelectric point of the polymer is measured by, for example, isoelectric focusing or measuring the pH after passing a 1% aqueous solution through a mixed bed column of cation and cation exchange resin.
  • Various acidic groups can be introduced to lower the isoelectric point of the polymer.
  • examples include a carboxyl group and a sulfo group.
  • a polymer containing methyl methacrylate or the like can be obtained by partially hydrolyzing.
  • carboxyl group styrene sulfo
  • 2-acrylamide-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid it can also be introduced after polymer preparation by various sulfuric acid methods.
  • carboxylic acid is particularly preferable because the property can be changed to water-soluble by neutralization or semi-neutralization in which the solubility in a solvent is relatively high in an unneutralized state.
  • Neutralization can be carried out with sodium or potassium salts, and organic salts such as ammonia, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine and the like may be used. Imidazoles, triazoles and amidoamines can be used.
  • Polymerization is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of workability that can be carried out in the presence or absence of a solvent.
  • a solvent from the viewpoint of workability that can be carried out in the presence or absence of a solvent.
  • Preferred solvents include alcohols such as ethanol, i-propyl alcohol, butanol, i-butanol, and t-butanol, ketones such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl-i-butyl ketone, and methyl amyl ketone, and acetic acid.
  • Esters such as methyl, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, and butyl lactate, methyl 2-oxypropionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate, 2-oxypropion Acid butyl, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2-methoxypropionate
  • Monocarboxylic acid esters such as butyl onate, polar solvents such as dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, ethers such as methyl solvosolve, cellosolve, butylcerosolve, butyl carbitol, ethylcetosolve sorb acetate, propylene Propylene glycols such as lenglycol, propylene glycolenomonomethylenole ether, propylene glycolenomonoethylenoate acetate, propylene glycolenomonoethylenoate acetate, propylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, and esters thereof, 1, 1, 1 Halogen solvents such as trichloroethane and chloroform, ethers such as tetrahydrfuran and dioxane, aromatics such as benzene, toluene and xylene, and perfluoro Tan, fluorine I
  • a dropping polymerization method in which a monomer and an initiator are added dropwise to a reaction vessel is also effective for obtaining a polymer having a uniform composition.
  • Column filtration, re- Unreacted monomer can be removed by removal by precipitation purification, solvent extraction or the like.
  • low-boiling unreacted monomers can be removed by stripping.
  • the photosensitive silver halide grains can be chemically sensitized.
  • a compound that releases chalcogens such as sulfur, selenium, and tellurium
  • a noble metal compound that releases noble metal ions such as gold ions.
  • a chemical sensitization center (chemical sensitization nucleus) capable of capturing electrons or holes generated by photoexcitation of photosensitive silver halide grains or spectral sensitizing dyes on the grains. it can.
  • it is preferably chemically sensitized by an organic sensitizer containing a chalcogen atom.
  • the organic sensitizer containing a chalcogen atom is preferably a compound having a group capable of adsorbing to halogenated silver and an unstable chalcogen atom site.
  • These organic sensitizers are disclosed in JP-A-60-150046, JP-A-4-109240, JP-A-11-218874, JP-A-11-218875, JP-A-11-218876, JP-A-11-194447, etc.
  • Organic sensitizers having various structures can be used, and among them, at least one compound having a structure in which a chalcogen atom is bonded to a carbon atom or a phosphorus atom by a double bond It is preferable.
  • a thiourea derivative having a heterocyclic group and a triphenylphosphine sulfide derivative are preferred.
  • techniques according to various chemical sensitization techniques conventionally used in the production of silver halide light-sensitive materials for conventional wet processing can be used (TH James edition “The Theory of”). the Photograph ic Process "4th edition, Macmillan Publishing Co., Ltd. 1977, edited by the Japan Society of Photography,” Basics of Photographic Engineering (Silver Salt Photography), Corona, 1979).
  • chemical sensitization can be performed by a conventional method.
  • the amount of chalcogen compound used as an organic sensitizer varies depending on the chalcogen compound used, silver halide grains, the reaction environment during chemical sensitization, etc. 10- 8 ⁇ : L0- 2 more preferably moles preferably fixture 10- 7 ⁇ : L0- 3 molar is used.
  • the optical sensitization using these organic sensitizers is preferably performed in the presence of a heteroatom-containing compound having adsorptivity to the spectral sensitizing dye or the halogen silver halide particles.
  • a heteroatom-containing compound having adsorptivity to the spectral sensitizing dye or the halogen silver halide particles By performing chemical sensitization in the presence of a compound having adsorptivity to the silver halide silver particles, dispersion of the chemically sensitized central core can be prevented, and high sensitivity and low capri can be achieved.
  • Spectral sensitizing dyes will be described later, but nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds described in JP-A No. 3-24537 are preferred as heteroatom-containing compounds having adsorptivity to halogenated silver. As an example.
  • examples of the heterocyclic ring include pyrazole, pyrimidine, 1,2,4-triazole, 1,2,3-triazole, 1,3,4-thiadiazole, 1,2,3-thiadiazole, 1, 2, 4-thiadiazole, 1, 2, 5-thiadiazole, 1, 2, 3, 4-tetrazole, pyridazine, 1, 2, 3-thiadiazine ring, these ring forces ⁇ 3 bonded
  • examples of the ring include triazolotriazole, diazaindene, triazaindene, and pentazaindene rings.
  • a heterocyclic ring condensed with a monocyclic heterocyclic ring and an aromatic ring for example, phthalazine, benzimidazole, indazole, benzthiazole ring and the like can also be applied.
  • azaindene ring is preferable, and an azaindene compound having a hydroxyl group as a substituent, for example, hydroxytriazaindene, tetrahydroxyazaindene, hydroxypentazaindene compound and the like are more preferable.
  • U an azaindene compound having a hydroxyl group as a substituent, for example, hydroxytriazaindene, tetrahydroxyazaindene, hydroxypentazaindene compound and the like are more preferable.
  • the heterocyclic ring may have a substituent other than a hydroxyl group.
  • substituents include an alkyl group, a substituted alkyl group, an alkylthio group, an amino group, a hydroxyamino group, an alkylamino group, a dialkylamino group, an arylamino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxy group, a carbonyl group, a halogen atom, and a cyano group. And so on.
  • the amount of the heterocyclic compound added depends on the size, composition, and other conditions of the halogenated silver particles.
  • the amount of force approximate to Wataru connection vary over a wide range depending on the matter or the like is in the range of 1 0 one 6 -1 mole per Harogeni ⁇ 1 mol, preferably 10 4 to 1 0 - is 1 mols .
  • the photosensitive silver halide can be subjected to noble metal sensitization by using a compound that releases noble metal ions such as gold ions.
  • a compound that releases noble metal ions such as gold ions.
  • chloroaurate and organic gold compounds can be used as gold sensitizers.
  • the gold sensitization technique disclosed in JP-A-11-194447 is a reference.
  • reduction sensitization methods and the like can also be used.
  • a shell-like compound for reduction sensitization ascorbic acid, diacid thiourea, stannous chloride, A hydrazine derivative, a borane compound, a silane compound, a polyamine compound, or the like can be used.
  • reduction sensitization can be performed by ripening the emulsion while maintaining the pH at 7 or more or pAg at 8.3 or less.
  • the silver halide grains subjected to chemical sensitization were formed in the presence of an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt, but the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt was not present. It may be formed under conditions, or a mixture of both.
  • the chemical sensitization effect substantially disappears after the thermal development process.
  • the effect of chemical sensitization substantially disappears when the sensitivity of the imaging material obtained by the chemical sensitization technique is chemically sensitized after the thermal development process! / Sensitive, say that the sensitivity decreases to 1.1 times or less.
  • an oxidant that can destroy the chemical sensitization center (chemical sensitization nucleus) by an acid-oxidation reaction at the time of heat development for example, release of the above-mentioned halogen radicals.
  • the content of the oxidant is preferably adjusted in consideration of the oxidizing power of the oxidant, the decrease in the chemical sensitization effect, and the like.
  • the photosensitive silver halide is preferably subjected to spectral sensitization by adsorbing a spectral sensitizing dye.
  • a spectral sensitizing dye cyanine dyes, merocyanine dyes, complex cyanine dyes, complex merocyanine dyes, holopolar cyanine dyes, styryl dyes, hemiyanine dyes, oxonol dyes, hemioxonol dyes, and the like can be used.
  • JP-A-63-159841, 60-140335, 63-231437, 63-259 651, 63-304242, 63-15245, U.S. Patents 4, 639, 414, 4, 7 40, 455, 4, 741, 966, 4, 751, 175, Sensitizing dyes described in US Pat. No. 4,835,096 can be used.
  • Useful sensitizing dyes used in the present invention include, for example, Research Disclosure (hereinafter abbreviated as RD) 17643IV—A (December 23, 1978), RD18431X (August 1978 4 page 37) ) Is described in the literature described or cited.
  • RD Research Disclosure
  • the power of using sensitizing dyes with spectral sensitivity suitable for the spectral characteristics of various laser imagers and scanner light sources is preferred.
  • the compounds described in JP-A Nos. 934078, 954409, and 980679 are preferably used.
  • Useful cyanine dyes are cyanine dyes having basic nuclei such as thiazoline nucleus, oxazoline nucleus, pyrroline nucleus, pyridine nucleus, oxazole nucleus, thiazole nucleus, selenazole nucleus and imidazole nucleus.
  • basic nuclei such as thiazoline nucleus, oxazoline nucleus, pyrroline nucleus, pyridine nucleus, oxazole nucleus, thiazole nucleus, selenazole nucleus and imidazole nucleus.
  • preferred merocyanine dyes are preferably thiohydantoin, rhodanine, oxazolidinedione, thiazolinedione, barbituric acid, thiazolinone, malono-tolyl and pyrazo. Includes acidic nuclei such as Ron nuclei.
  • a sensitizing dye having spectral sensitivity particularly in the infrared can also be used.
  • infrared spectral sensitizing dyes examples include infrared spectral sensitizing dyes disclosed in US Pat. Nos. 4,536,473, 4,515,888, and 4,959,294. It is
  • the sensitizing dye represented by the following general formula (SD1) and the following general formula (SD2) as described in JP-A-2004-309758 It is preferable that at least one sensitizing dye is selected and contained.
  • L to L each represent a methine group.
  • R 1 and R 2 each represent an aliphatic group.
  • R 4 each represents a lower alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
  • W, W, W, and W are each a hydrogen atom, a substituent, or
  • nl and n2 each represents 0, 1 or 2; However, nl and n2 are not 0 at the same time.
  • the above infrared sensitizing dyes are, for example, the authors of F'Nom's: The Chemistry of Heterociciic and ompounds, ⁇ 3 ⁇ 418 ⁇ , The Cyanme Dyes and Related and o mpounds (A. Weissberger ed. Interscience Company dried (J, New York, 1964) [It can be easily synthesized by this method.
  • These infrared sensitizing dyes may be added at any time after the preparation of halogen silver, for example, added to a solvent or dispersed in the form of fine particles in a so-called solid dispersion state. It can be added to a light-sensitive emulsion containing grains or halogenated silver grains Z aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt grains. Similarly to the compound containing a helium atom having an adsorptivity to the above-described halogen silver particles, it is added to the halogen silver particles prior to chemical sensitization and adsorbed. Then, chemical sensitization can be performed, which can prevent dispersion of the chemical sensitization central core and achieve high sensitivity and low capri.
  • the above-mentioned spectral sensitizing dye may be used alone, but as described above, it is preferable to use a combination of plural kinds of spectral sensitizing dyes. This combination is often used for the purpose of supersensitization and enlargement or adjustment of the photosensitive wavelength region.
  • a substance that does not absorb and exhibits a supersensitizing effect may be included in the emulsion, so that the silver halide grains may be supersensitized!
  • M is a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal atom
  • Ar is an aromatic ring or condensed aromatic ring having one or more nitrogen, sulfur, oxygen, selenium, or tellurium atoms.
  • the heteroaromatic ring is preferably benzimidazole, naphthimidazole, benzothiazole, naphthothiazole, benzoxazole, naphthoxazole, benzoselenazole, benzotelrazole, imidazole, oxazole, pyrazole, triazole, triazine. , Pyrimidine, pyridazine, pyrazine, pyridine, purine, quinoline, or quinazoline. However, other heteroaromatic rings are also included.
  • Mercapto derivative compounds that substantially produce the above mercapto compounds when contained in a dispersion of an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt or a silver halide grain emulsion are also included.
  • preferred examples include mercapto derivative compounds represented by the following.
  • Ar has the same meaning as in the case of the mercaptoic compound represented above.
  • the above heteroaromatic ring includes, for example, a halogen atom (chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, Amino group, carboxyl group, alkyl group (having 1 or more carbon atoms, preferably having 1 to 4 carbon atoms) and alkoxy group (1 or more carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms) It may have a substituent selected from the group consisting of those having atoms.
  • a halogen atom chlorine, bromine, iodine
  • a hydroxyl group Amino group
  • carboxyl group alkyl group (having 1 or more carbon atoms, preferably having 1 to 4 carbon atoms)
  • alkoxy group (1 or more carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • a macrocyclic compound having a heteroatom disclosed in JP-A-2001-330918 can also be used as the supersensitizer.
  • the supersensitizer is preferably used in a photosensitive layer containing an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt and a silver halide silver particle in an amount of 0.001 to 1.0 mol per mol of silver. Particularly preferred is 0.01 to 0.5 mole per silver mole.
  • spectral sensitization is performed by adsorbing a spectral sensitizing dye to the surface of photosensitive halogen silver halide grains, and the spectral sensitization effect is substantially reduced after the thermal development process. It is preferable to disappear.
  • the spectral sensitization effect substantially disappears when the sensitivity of the imaging material obtained with a sensitizing dye, supersensitizer, etc. is spectrally sensitized after the thermal development, 1. It means to decrease to less than 1 times.
  • a spectral sensitizing dye that is easily detached from the halogenated silver particles by heat is used during thermal development, or Z and the spectral sensitizing dye are acidified. It is necessary to contain an appropriate amount of an oxidizing agent that can be destroyed by the reaction, such as the halogen radical-releasing compound, in the emulsion layer or Z and the non-photosensitive layer of the imaging material.
  • the content of the oxidizing agent is preferably adjusted in consideration of the oxidizing power of the oxidizing agent, the reduction range of the spectral sensitization effect, and the like.
  • the cool image tone means a pure black tone or a bluish black tone of a black image.
  • a warm image tone is said to be a dark black tone with a black image, but in order to allow a more precise quantitative discussion, the International Lighting Commission (CIE) ), Based on the recommended expression.
  • CIE International Lighting Commission
  • the hue of the photothermographic material of the present invention after development is in the range of hue angle hab of 180 degrees, hab, 270 degrees, and more preferably 200. It was found to be hab 270 degrees, most preferably 220 hab 260 degrees. This is disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-6463.
  • u, V * or a *, b * in the CIE 1976 (L * u * v *) color space or (LW) color space near an optical density of 1.0 is a specific numerical value. It is known that a diagnostic image with a favorable visual color tone can be obtained by adjustment, and is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-29164.
  • the horizontal axis is u * or a * in the CIE 1976 (L uV *) color space or (L * aV) color space.
  • the linear regression line is set to a specific range. By adjusting to, it was found that it has a diagnostic ability equal to or better than that of conventional wet silver salt light-sensitive materials. The preferred range of conditions is described below.
  • the present invention it is directly and indirectly involved in the development reaction process of a reducing agent (developer), silver halide grains, aliphatic carboxylic acid silver and the following toning agent.
  • a reducing agent developer
  • silver halide grains e.g., silver halide grains
  • aliphatic carboxylic acid silver e.g., silver halide grains
  • aliphatic carboxylic acid silver e.g., silver halide grains, aliphatic carboxylic acid silver and the following toning agent.
  • the developed silver shape can be optimized to obtain a preferable color tone. For example, if the developed silver shape is dendritic, it becomes a bluish direction, and if it is a filament shape, it becomes a yellowish direction. That is, the adjustment is made in consideration of the tendency of the developed silver shape.
  • phthalazinone or phthalazine, phthalic acids, and phthalic anhydrides are generally used as toning agents.
  • suitable toning agents are disclosed in RD17029, US Pat. Nos. 4,123,282, 3,994,732, 3,846,136, 4,021,249 and the like.
  • the color tone is adjusted using couplers disclosed in JP-A-11 288057, European Patent 1,134,611A2, etc., and leuco dyes described in detail below. It can also be adjusted. In particular, it is preferable to use a coupler or a leuco dye for fine adjustment of the color tone.
  • the photothermographic material can also be adjusted in color tone using a leuco dye as described above.
  • the leuco dye is preferably heated at a temperature of about 80 to 200 ° C. for about 0.5 to 30 seconds.
  • any leuco dye that forms a pigment by being oxidized by an oxidized form of the above reducing agent or the like which is any colorless or slightly colored compound that is oxidized to a colored form, can be used.
  • Compounds that are pH sensitive and can be oxidized to a colored state are useful.
  • Representative leuco dyes suitable for use in the present invention are not particularly limited.
  • biphenol leuco dyes phenol leuco dyes, indoor-phosphorus leuco dyes, acrylic vinyl leuco dyes, phenoxazine leuco dyes, Nojiazine leuco dye and phenothiazine leuco dye.
  • leuco dyes of various colors singly or in combination of a plurality of types.
  • the use of a highly active reducing agent changes the color tone (especially yellowishness) depending on the amount and ratio of use, or the use of fine-grain silver halide makes the concentration particularly 2.
  • a leuco dye that develops yellow and cyan in combination and adjust the amount of use.
  • the color density is preferably adjusted appropriately in relation to the color tone of the developed silver itself.
  • the color is adjusted so as to have a reflection optical density of 0.01 to 0.05 or a transmission optical density of 0.005 to 0.50, and the color tone is adjusted so that an image in the color tone range is preferable. It is preferable. It is preferable that the sum of the maximum densities at the maximum absorption wavelength of the dye image formed by the leuco dye is 0.01 to 0.50, more preferably 0.02 to 0.30, and particularly preferably 0. It is preferable to develop the color so as to have 03 to 0.10.
  • the photothermographic material can also be adjusted in color tone using a leuco dye as described above.
  • a color image forming agent that increases the absorbance at 360 to 450 nm when oxidized is preferably used as the yellow color-forming leuco dye.
  • These color image forming agents are particularly preferably color image forming agents represented by the following general formula (YA). [0182] [Chemical Formula 17] General formula (YA>
  • R represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and R represents a hydrogen atom, substituted or unsubstituted.
  • R 1 and R 2 representing substituted alkyl or acylamino groups are 2-hydroxyphenyl groups.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.
  • R 1 represents a substituent that can be substituted on the benzene ring.
  • R represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and R represents a substituent other than a hydrogen atom.
  • R represents an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group is an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • methyl, ethyl, butyl, octyl, i-propyl, t-butynole, t-octyl, t-pentyl, sec-butyl, cyclohexenole, 1-methyl-cyclohexyl and the like are sterically larger than i-propyl.
  • tertiary alkyl groups such as t-butyl, t-octyl, and t-pentyl.
  • substituent that R 1 may have include a halogen atom, an aryl group,
  • Examples thereof include an alkoxy group, an amino group, an acyl group, an acylamino group, an alkylthio group, an arylothio group, a sulfonamide group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, a strong rubamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a sulfonyl group, and a phosphoryl group.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or an acyl amino group.
  • the kill group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • the acylamino group is preferably an acyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the explanation of the alkyl group is the same as R. Asyl
  • the amino group may be unsubstituted or substituted, and specific examples include an acetylylamino group, an alkoxyacetylylamino group, an aryloxycetylamino group, and the like.
  • R 12 or a hydrogen atom or an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms.
  • R and R are 2-hydroxyphenol
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.
  • alkyl group a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.
  • alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms is the same as that for R.
  • R is preferably a hydrogen atom or an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms.
  • R and R examples include methyl, i-propyl, t-butyl and the like.
  • R and R is water
  • R represents a substitutable group on the benzene ring, for example, the substitution in the general formula (RD1)
  • R is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbon.
  • alkyl groups are a C1-C30 alkyl group and a C2-C30 oxycarbonyl group, and a C1-C24 alkyl group is more preferable.
  • substituent of the alkyl group include aryl, amino, alkoxy, oxycarbol, acylamino, acyloxy, imide, ureido, aryl, amino, oxycarbonyl and alkoxy. The group is more preferred. These alkyl group substituents may be further substituted with these substituents.
  • Z is —S— or — C (R) (R
  • R 21 21 ′ each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R 1 and R ′ include R 1 in the general formula (RDl).
  • 21 21 ′ is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • R 1, R 2, R 'and R' each represent a substituent.
  • the substituent is represented by the general formula (RDl)
  • R 1, R 2, R 'and R' are preferably an alkyl group, a alkenyl group or an alkyl group.
  • 22 23 22 23 ′ is more preferably a tertiary alkyl group such as t-butyl, t-pentyl, t-octyl, 1-methyl-cyclohexyl and the like.
  • R 1 and R 'each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and examples of the substituent include those represented by the general formula (R
  • Examples thereof include the same groups as the substituents exemplified in the description of R 4 in D1).
  • Examples of the compounds represented by the general formulas (YA) and (YB) include compounds II 1 to -40 described in paragraphs "0032" to “0038” of JP-A-2002-169249, Mention may be made of the compounds ITS-1 to ITS-12 described in paragraph "0026" of European Patent 1,211,093.
  • the addition amount of the compound of general formula (YA) (including the compound of hindered dorfolhi compound and the compound of general formula (YB)) is usually 0.0001 to 0.01 mol per mol of silver, preferably Is from 0.0005 to 0.01 mol, more preferably ⁇ 0.001 to 0.008 mol.
  • the molar ratio of the addition ratio of the yellow color-forming leuco dye to the total of the reducing agents is preferably 0.001 to 0.2. More preferred.
  • the photothermographic material of the present invention can also be adjusted in color tone using a cyan color-forming leuco dye in addition to the yellow color-forming leuco dye.
  • the cyan chromophoric leuco dye is preferably any colorless or slightly colored compound that oxidizes into a colored form when heated at a temperature of about 80-200 ° C for about 0.5-30 seconds. Any leuco dye that forms a pigment by oxidation with an oxidant of a reducing agent can be used. Compounds that are pH sensitive and can be oxidized to a colored state are useful.
  • a color image forming agent that increases the absorbance at 600 to 700 nm when oxidized is preferably used as the cyan color-forming leuco dye.
  • these compounds for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 59-206831 (particularly compounds having ⁇ max in the range of 600 to 700 nm), Compounds of general formulas (I) to (IV) of JP-A-5-204087 (specifically, compounds of (1) to (18) described in paragraphs “0032” to “0037”) and JP-A-11-231460 And compounds of the general formulas 4 to 7 (specifically, compounds No. 1 to No. 79 described in the paragraph “0105”)
  • the cyan color-forming leuco dye preferably used in the present invention is a compound represented by the following general formula (CLA) or general formula (CLB-I).
  • CLA general formula
  • CLB-I general formula
  • the color image forming agent represented by the general formula (CLB-I) is particularly preferable in that it can adjust the color tone even when added in a small amount due to its high coloring efficiency and is excellent in image storage stability.
  • R 1 and R 2 are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, an alkyl,
  • Kenyl group, alkoxy group, NHCOR group (R is an alkyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group
  • R 1 and R 2 are connected to each other to form an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring or aromatic carbon
  • A is a group that forms a hydrogen ring or a heterocyclic ring.
  • A is — NHCO group, —CONH group or
  • R is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group or
  • -A R may be a hydrogen atom.
  • the —A R moiety represents a hydrogen atom
  • A represents one NHCO group, CONH group or one NHCONH group, and R
  • 3 33 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group or heterocyclic group.
  • W is a hydrogen atom or —CONHR group, —COOR group or —COOR group (R is substituted or
  • 35 35 represents an unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group or heterocyclic group.
  • Halogen atom substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkoxy group, force Rubamoyl group or -tolyl group is represented.
  • R is CONHR, —COR or CO
  • OR group (R represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group or heterocyclic group.)
  • X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group or heterocyclic group.
  • examples of the halogen atom represented by R 1 and R 2 include fluorine atom
  • the alkyl group includes alkyl groups having up to 20 carbon atoms (methyl group, ethyl, butyl, dodecyl, etc.), and the alkyl group includes carbon atoms. Up to 20 alkenyl groups (bule, allyl, butyl, hexyl, hexagenole, etheninore 2 propenole, 3 butenore, 1-methylolene 3 propenyl, 3 pentale, 1-methyl-3 butyr, etc.) Examples of the alkoxy group include alkoxy groups having up to 20 carbon atoms (methoxy, ethoxy, etc.).
  • the alkyl group represented by R in the NHC OR group is an alkyl group having up to 20 carbon atoms.
  • aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl.
  • Groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms such as ruthenium, and examples of the heterocyclic group include chenyl, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl and the like.
  • the aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, such as phenol.
  • heterocyclic groups include, for example, chael, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl and the like.
  • the alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having up to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include methyl, ethyl, butyl, dodecyl and the like, and the aryl group preferably has from 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aryl group include phenyl and naphthyl, and examples of the heterocyclic group include chenyl, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl and pyrrolyl.
  • halogen atom represented by R examples include fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine and the like.
  • alkyl group examples include chain or cyclic alkyl groups such as methyl, butyl, dodecyl, cyclohexyl and the like
  • alkenyl group examples include alkenyl groups having up to 20 carbon atoms (bulu, allyl, butyr, Hexane, Hexagel, Etul 2 Lopeninole, 3-butenyl, 1-methyl-3-propenyl, 3-pentenyl, 1-methyl-3-butenyl, etc.)
  • alkoxy groups examples include methoxy, butoxy, tetradecyloxy, Examples thereof include jetyl carbamoyl, phenol carbamoyl and the like.
  • a nitrile group is also preferred. Among these, a hydrogen atom and an alkyl group are more preferable.
  • R 1 and R 2 may be linked to each other to form a ring structure.
  • the above groups are further single
  • Typical substituents include halogen atoms (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, etc.), alkyl groups (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, dodecyl, etc.), hydroxyl groups, cyano groups, nitro groups, alkoxy groups (methoxy, ethoxy).
  • alkylsulfonamide groups (methylsulfonamide, octylsulfonamide, etc.), arylsulfonamides (phenylsulfonamide, naphthylsulfonamide groups, etc.), alkylsulfamoyl groups (ptylsulfamoyl etc.), arylsulfa Moyl (phenylsulfamoyl, etc.), alkyloxycarbonyl group (methoxymethoxy, etc.), aryloxycarboro group (phenoloxycarbol, etc.), aminosulfonamide group, acylamino group, carbon Vamoyl, sulfol, sulfiel, sulfoxy, sulfo, Ruoki sheet group, alkoxy group, alkyl carboxymethyl - group, Arirukarubo - group, Aminokarubo - group, and the like.
  • R or R is preferably a phenol group, more preferably a halogen atom or cyan.
  • a full group having a plurality of groups as substituents having a plurality of groups as substituents.
  • the alkyl group having 36 to 37 37 37 is preferably an alkyl group having up to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include methyl, ethyl, butyl, dodecyl and the like.
  • the aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include phenol, naphthyl and the like, and examples of the heterocyclic group include chenyl, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl and the like.
  • Examples of the substituent that the group represented by R can have include R 1 to R 5 in the general formula (CLA).
  • the aryl group represented by X has 6 to 20 carbon atoms such as phenol and naphthyl.
  • heterocyclic groups include, for example, chenyl, furyl, imidazolyl, and pyridine. Examples include lazolyl and pyrrolyl. As a substituent that the group represented by X can have
  • These groups may include photographically useful groups.
  • CLA cyan color-forming leuco dye
  • the compound represented by the general formula (CLB-I) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (CLB-II) or (CLB-III), and most preferably a compound represented by (CLB-III). Masle.
  • R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 are each a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, an alkoxy group
  • R is a hydrogen atom, aliphatic group, aromatic group, acyl group, alkoxycarbon
  • R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 include an alkyl group, an alkyl group,
  • hydrocarbon groups such as a nyl group and an alkynyl group. These hydrocarbon groups preferably have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms include methyl, ethyl, propyl, i-propyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, cyclohexyl, etc.
  • examples of the cycloalkyl group include cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl group, etc.
  • aromatic group represented by R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 include an aryl group (phenol).
  • heterocyclic groups pyridyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazyl, selenazolyl, sriphoral, piperidinyl, pyrazolyl, tetrazolyl, etc.).
  • alkoxy group examples include methoxy, ethoxy, i-propoxy group, t-butoxy group.
  • Specific examples of the isotropic aryloxy group include phenoxy and naphthyloxy isosyl.
  • acyl amino group acetylamino-containing benzoylamino and the like, and specific examples of the sulfonamide group include methanesulfonamide, butanesulfonamide, octanesulfonamide, Benzenesulfonamide, etc.
  • the halogen atom is chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • R 1 and R 2 are preferably aliphatic groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, and more preferably.
  • an alkyl group or an alkoxy group more preferably a secondary or tertiary alkyl group or an alkoxy group.
  • R 1 and R 2 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • Examples of the aliphatic group, aromatic group, alkoxy group, and aryloxy group represented by R include
  • acyl group represented by R include acetyl, propionyl, butanol, and
  • alkoxycarbonyl group represented by R include a methoxycarbonyl group
  • Examples thereof include a toxicarbol group and a t-butoxycarbonyl group.
  • arylcarbonyl group represented by R include phenoxycarboro.
  • Examples of the powerful rubamoyl group include amino carbonate, methylaminocarbonyl, dimethylaminocarbonyl, propylaminocarbonyl, pentylaminocarbonyl, cyclohexylaminocarbonyl, phenylaminocarbonyl, and the like. , 2-pyridylamino force, and the like.
  • Examples of the sulfamoyl group include methylsulfamoyl, dimethylsulfamoyl, and phenylsulfamoyl.
  • Examples of the sulfol group include methylsulfonyl, butylsulfol, and octylsulfo- And the like.
  • R is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an acyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or carbon.
  • substitutable group on the benzene ring represented by X and X include 1 carbon atom. ⁇ 25 alkyl groups (methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexylcyclohexyl, etc.), cycloalkyl groups (cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, etc.), alkenyl groups (bulu, allyl, butenyl, hexyl) Kiseru, Hexager, Etul
  • alkyl groups such as etul, propargyl
  • glycidyl groups such as etul, propargyl
  • glycidyl groups such as etul, propargyl
  • metatalylate groups such as etul, propargyl
  • Aryl groups such as phenol and naphthyl
  • heterocyclic groups such as pyridyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, pyrajur, pyrimidinyl, pyridazyl, selenazolyl, sriphoral, piperidyl, pyrazolyl, tetrazolyl Etc.
  • halogen atoms chlorine, bromine, iodine, fluorine, etc.
  • alkoxy groups methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, pentyloxy, cyclopentyloxy, hexyloxy, cycl
  • Borol pentylaminocarbol, cyclohexylaminocarbole, phenylaminocarbole, 2-pyridylaminocarbol, etc.), amide group (acetamido, propionamido, butanamido, hexaneamido, benzamido) ), Sulfo group (methylsulfol, ethinolesnorehoninore, butinolesnorehoninore, cyclohexenoresnorehoninore, pheninolesnorehoninole, 2-pyridylsulfol, etc.), sulfone Amide group (methylsulfonamide, octylsulfonamide, phenylsulfonamide, naphthylsulfonamide, etc.), amino group (amiethyl ester) Dimethylamino-containing butylamino, cyclopenty
  • X and X are preferably an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a strong rubamoyl group, an amide
  • R 1, R 2 and R 3 have the same meanings as R 1, R 2 and R in the above general formula (CLB—I), respectively.
  • 41 42 43 41 42 43 X and X are each an aliphatic group, aromatic group, amino group, alkoxy group or arylo group.
  • silyl group examples include an aliphatic group, an aromatic group represented by X and X in the general formula (CLB—I),
  • 43 is preferably an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group or an amino group, more preferably
  • R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 each represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • R 1, R 2, R and R are preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably
  • the compounds represented by the general formulas (CLB-I) to (CLB-III) can be easily synthesized by a conventionally known method such as the method described in JP-B-7-45477.
  • the power of the present invention is not limited to these examples showing specific examples of leuco dyes represented by the general formulas (CLB-I) to (CLB-III).
  • the amount of the cyan chromophoric leuco dye added is usually from 0.0001 to 0.05 mole per mole of silver, preferably 0.005 to 0.02 monolayer, more preferably 0.00. 001 ⁇ 0.01 Mono.
  • the ratio of the added amount of cyan chromogenic leuco dye to the total of the reducing agents is 0.001 to 0.2 force girls, and 0.005 to 0.1 force girls.
  • the photothermographic material of the present invention has a maximum absorption of a dye image formed with a cyan leuco dye. It is preferable to set the sum of the maximum densities at the collection wavelength to be 0.01-0.50, more preferably 0.02-0.30, particularly preferably 0.03-0.10. Rikishi.
  • a subtle color tone can be adjusted by using a magenta chromogenic leuco dye or a yellow chromogenic leuco dye in combination with the cyan chromogenic leuco dye.
  • the yellow color-forming leuco dye and the cyan color-forming leuco dye represented by the general formulas (YA) and (YB) may be added by a reducing agent addition method represented by the general formula (1). It can be added by the same method, and it can be added to the coating solution by any method such as solution form, emulsified dispersion form, solid fine particle dispersion form, etc.
  • the reducing agent of the general formula (1), the yellow coloring leuco dye and the cyan coloring leuco dye of the general formula (YA), (YB) are contained in a photosensitive layer containing an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt. Although it is preferable that one is contained in the photosensitive layer and the other may be contained in the non-photosensitive layer adjacent to the photosensitive layer, or both may be contained in the non-photosensitive layer. If the photosensitive layer is composed of a plurality of layers, each layer may be contained in a separate layer.
  • the photosensitive layer or the non-photosensitive layer according to the present invention may contain a silver saving agent.
  • a silver saving agent refers to a compound that can reduce the amount of silver necessary to obtain a certain silver image density.
  • the covering power of developed silver means the optical density per unit amount of silver.
  • This silver saving agent can be present in the photosensitive layer, the non-photosensitive layer, or any of them.
  • Preferred examples of the silver saving agent include hydrazine derivative compounds, vinyl compounds, phenol derivatives, naphthol derivatives, quaternary onium compounds, and silane compounds. Specific examples include silver saving agents disclosed in paragraphs “0195” to “0235” of JP-A-2003-270755.
  • silver saving agent As the silver saving agent according to the present invention, particularly preferred silver saving agents are compounds represented by the following general formulas (SE1) and (SE2). [0259] General formula (SE1)
  • Q is an aromatic group bonded to NHNH Q at the carbon atom site, or a heterocycle
  • Q represents a strong rubamoyl group, an acyl group, an alkoxy carbo group, an aryl group.
  • a bonyl group, a sulfonyl group, or a sulfamoyl group is represented.
  • R represents an alkyl group, an acyl group, an acylamine group, a sulfonamide group, an alkoxy group, a carbonyl group, or a group of rubamoyl groups.
  • R 12 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylothio group, an acyloxy group, or a carbonate group.
  • R 13 and R 14 each represent a group that can be substituted on the benzene ring.
  • R 13 and R 14 may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring.
  • the condensed ring when R 13 and R "are connected to each other to form a condensed ring, the condensed ring is particularly preferably a naphthalene ring.
  • the general formula (SE2) is a naphthol-based compound.
  • R 11 is preferably a strong rubamoyl group, particularly preferably a benzoyl group
  • R 12 is particularly preferably an alkoxy group, preferably an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group. Better!/,.
  • the photothermographic material of the present invention preferably contains a thermal solvent.
  • the thermal solvent is defined as a material capable of lowering the heat development temperature by 1 ° C. or more compared to a heat-developable photosensitive material containing no heat solvent. More preferred are materials that can lower the heat development temperature by 2 ° C or more, and particularly preferred are materials that can lower the temperature by 3 ° C or more.
  • a photothermographic material A containing a thermal solvent is different from a photothermographic material A containing a thermal solvent.
  • the photothermographic material containing B is a photothermographic material
  • the photothermographic material is exposed to the photothermographic material B and processed at a heat developing temperature of 120 ° C and a heat developing time of 20 seconds.
  • a heat solvent is used when the heat development temperature for A with the same exposure and heat development time is 119 ° C or less.
  • the thermal solvent has a polar group as a substituent and is preferably represented by the general formula (TS), but is not limited thereto.
  • Y represents an alkyl group, an alkyl group, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
  • Z is a hydroxyl group, carboxy group, amino group, amide group, sulfonamide group, phosphoric acid amide group, cyano group, imide, ureido, sulfoxide, sulfone, phosphine, phosphinoxide or nitrogen-containing heterocyclic group.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 3, which is 1 when Z is a monovalent group, and is the same as the valence of Z when Z is a divalent or higher group. When n is 2 or more, multiple Ys may be the same or different.
  • Y may further have a substituent, and may have a group represented by Z as a substituent. Y will be described in more detail.
  • Y is a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 25 carbon atoms such as methyl, ethyl, n -Propyl, iso-propyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, t-octyl, n-amyl, t-amyl, n-dodecyl, n-tridecyl, octadecyl, icosyl, docosyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, etc.
  • An alkenyl group (preferably having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 25 carbon atoms such as vinyl, aryl, 2-butyl, and 3-pentale).
  • Aryl groups preferably having 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms such as phenol, p-methylphenol, and naphthyl).
  • Heterocyclic group Preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 16 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms such as pyridyl, virazil, imidazolyl and pyrrolidyl).
  • substituents may be further substituted with other substituents. These substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • substituent which Y may further have a substituent include the substituent described in "0015" of JP-A-2004-21068.
  • the reason why development activity is achieved by using a hot solvent is that the hot solvent melts near the development temperature, so that it is compatible with the substances involved in the development, and the temperature is lower than when no thermal solvent is added. This is thought to be possible in order to make the reaction possible.
  • Thermal development is a reduction reaction involving a highly polar carboxylic acid or silver ion transporter, so it has a polar group! / Is preferred to form ⁇ .
  • the thermal solvent preferably used in the present invention has a melting point of 50 ° C or higher and 200 ° C or lower, more preferably 60 ° C or higher and 150 ° C or lower.
  • a thermal solvent having a melting point of 100 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower is preferable.
  • thermal solvent examples include compounds described in "0017” of JP-A-2004-21068, compounds described in "0027” of US Published Patent No. US2002Z0025498, MF-1 to MF-3 MF6, MF-7, MF-9 to MF-12, MF-15 to MF-22.
  • thermo solvent in the present invention is 0. 01 ⁇ 5.
  • Og / m 2 is preferred instrument than good Mashiku be the 0.1 05-2 at. 5g / m 2, more preferably Is between 0.1 and 1.5 g / m 2 .
  • the thermal solvent is preferably contained in the photosensitive layer.
  • the said thermal solvent may be used independently, you may use it in combination of 2 or more type.
  • the thermal solvent may be contained in the coating solution by any method such as a solution form, an emulsion dispersion form, or a solid fine particle dispersion form, and may be contained in the photosensitive material.
  • an oil such as dibutyl phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, glyceryl triacetate or jetyl phthalate, or a co-solvent such as ethyl acetate or cyclohexanone is used. And a method of mechanically preparing an emulsified dispersion.
  • a powder of a hot solvent is dispersed in an appropriate solvent such as water by a ball mill, a colloid mill, a vibrating ball mill, a sand mill, a jet mill, a roller mill or ultrasonic waves, and solid dispersion is performed.
  • an appropriate solvent such as water by a ball mill, a colloid mill, a vibrating ball mill, a sand mill, a jet mill, a roller mill or ultrasonic waves, and solid dispersion is performed.
  • protection Colloids for example, polyvinyl alcohol
  • surfactants for example, surfactants such as sodium triisopropylnaphthalene sulfonate (a mixture of three isopropyl groups having different substitution positions)
  • surfactants for example, surfactants such as sodium triisopropylnaphthalene sulfonate (a mixture of three isopropyl groups having different substitution positions
  • beads such as zirconium are usually used as a dispersion medium, and Zr and the like eluted from these beads may be mixed in the dispersion. Although it depends on the dispersion conditions, it is usually in the range of lppm to 1000ppm. If the Zr content in the photosensitive material (photothermographic material) is 0.5 mg or less per lg of silver, there is no practical problem.
  • the aqueous dispersion preferably contains a preservative (eg, benzoisothiazolinone sodium salt).
  • an anti-capri agent for preventing the occurrence of force preserving during storage before heat development, and an image stabilization for preventing image deterioration after heat development. It is preferable to contain an agent.
  • an anti-capri and image stabilizer that can be used in the present invention will be described.
  • reducing agents having protons such as bisphenols and sulfonamidophenols are mainly used as reducing agents, these hydrogens are stabilized and the reducing agents are deactivated.
  • a compound capable of preventing and preventing the reaction of reducing silver ions is contained.
  • a compound capable of acid bleaching tanned metallic silver (silver cluster) is contained.
  • compounds having these functions for example, biimidazolyl compounds, ododonium compounds and halogen atoms described in paragraphs “0096” to “0128” of JP-A-2003-270755 are released as active species. List possible compounds.
  • Preferable specific examples include sulfone and Z or j8-halosulfone, and various capri prevention and image stabilizers such as vinyl type inhibitors having an electron withdrawing group described in JP-A-2005-107496.
  • the reducing agent used in the present invention has an aromatic hydroxyl group (-OH), particularly in the case of bisphenols, it has a group capable of forming a hydrogen bond with these groups. It is preferable to use a non-reducing compound in combination.
  • particularly preferred hydrogen bonding compounds in the present invention include, for example, paragraphs “0061” to “0” of JP-A-2002-90937.
  • the amount of these compounds added is preferably within a range in which the increase in printout silver due to the formation of halogenated silver due to the reaction of halogen released from the compound with silver ions does not become a problem.
  • Specific examples of compounds that generate these active halogen atoms include compounds (III-1) to (III) described in paragraphs “0086” to “0087” of JP-A-2002-169249 in addition to the above-mentioned patents.
  • Examples of the capri inhibitor preferably used in the present invention include compound examples a to j described in paragraph "0012" of JP-A-8-314059, and paragraph "0028" of JP-A-7-209797.
  • compounds of vinyl sulfones and Z or ⁇ -halosulfones compounds described in paragraph “0013” of JP-A-6-208192, VS—1 to VS-7, compound HS—1 to HS-5, sulfo-benzotriazole Compound KS-1 to KS-8 as described in JP-A-2000-330235,
  • the photothermographic material may contain various compounds conventionally known as anti-capriformants, but has the same reaction activity as the above compounds. Even if it is a compound which can produce
  • antifoggants include compounds disclosed in US Pat. No. 5,028,523 and European Patents 600,587, 605,981, and 631,176.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant represented by the following general formula (SF) is used in order to improve film transportability and environmental suitability (accumulation in a living body) in a laser imager (heat development processing apparatus). Is preferably used.
  • Rf represents a substituent containing a fluorine atom
  • Lf represents a divalent linking group having no fluorine atom
  • Yf represents a (pi + ql) -valent linking group having no fluorine atom
  • Af represents a cation group or a salt thereof
  • nl and ml each represents an integer of 0 or 1
  • pi represents an integer of 1 to 3
  • ql represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • ql is 1, nl and ml are not 0 at the same time.
  • examples of the substituent containing a fluorine atom represented by Rf include a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms (trifluoromethyl, trifluoroethyl, perfluoroethyl, fluorobutinole, perfluorooctinole. Perfluorododecinole and perfluorooctadecyl) or a fluorinated group (perfluoroprobe, perfluorobutur, perfluoronone and perfluorododecyl, etc.).
  • Rf preferably has 2 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Rf is 2-12 fluorine atoms
  • the number of fluorine atoms is 3-12.
  • Divalent linking groups having no fluorine atom represented by Lf include, for example, alkylene groups (methylene, ethylene, butylene, etc.), alkyleneoxy groups (methyleneoxy, ethyleneoxy, butyleneoxy, etc.), oxyalkylenes, etc. Group (oxymethylene, oxyethylene, oxybutylene, etc.), oxyalkyleneoxy group (oxymethyleneoxy, oxyethyleneoxy, oxyethyleneoxyethyleneoxy, etc.), phenylene group, oxyphenylene group , A phenyl group, an oxyphenyl group, or a group obtained by combining these groups.
  • Af represents the power of a cation group or a salt thereof, for example, a carboxyl group or a salt thereof (a sodium salt, a potassium salt and a lithium salt), a sulfo group or a salt thereof (a sodium salt, a potassium salt and a lithium salt), sulfuric acid And a non-festel group or a salt thereof (sodium salt, potassium salt and lithium salt), a phosphoric acid group or a salt thereof such as thorium salt and potassium salt thereof, and the like.
  • Examples of the (pi + ql) -valent linking group having no fluorine atom represented by Y include, for example, a trivalent or tetravalent linking group having no fluorine atom and a nitrogen or carbon atom as the center.
  • a group of atoms. nl represents an integer of 0 or 1, and is preferably 1.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant represented by the general formula (SF) is an alkyl compound having 1 to 25 carbon atoms into which a fluorine atom is introduced (trifluoromethyl, pentafluoroethyl, perfluorobutyl, perfluorooctyl and perfluorooctyl).
  • the compound obtained by addition reaction or condensation reaction with 3 to 4 aromatic compounds or hetero compounds (partially Rf-modified alkanol compounds) is further added to, for example, sulfate ester compounds. It can be obtained by introducing a cation group (Af) by means such as ⁇ .
  • Examples of the tri- to hexavalent alkanol compound include glycerin, pentaerythritol, 2-methyl-2-hydroxymethyl 1,3-propanediol, 2,4-dihydroxy-3-hydroxymethylpentene, 1, 2, 6-hexanetriol, 1, 1, 1-tris (hydroxymethyl) propane, 2,2-bis (butanol) -3, aliphatic triol, tetramethylolmethane, D-sorbitol, xylitol, D-man -Tall and so on.
  • aromatic compounds and hetero compounds having 3 to 4 sil groups include 1,3 5-trihydroxybenzene (fluorodalcine) and 2 4 6-trihydroxypyridine.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant represented by the general formula (SF) can be added according to a known addition method. That is, it can be dissolved in an alcohol such as methanol or ethanol, a ketone such as methyl ethyl ketone or acetone, or a polar solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide or dimethylformamide.
  • fine particles of 1 m or less can be added by dispersing in water or an organic solvent by sand mill dispersion, jet mill dispersion, ultrasonic dispersion or homogenizer dispersion. Regarding the fine particle dispersion technique, many techniques have been disclosed.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant represented by the general formula (SF) is preferably added to the outermost protective layer.
  • the addition amount of the fluorine-based surfactant represented by the general formula (SF) is lm 2 per 1 X 10- 8 ⁇ 1 X 1 0 1 mole preferably tool 1 X 10- 5 1 X 10- mol are particularly preferred. If the range is less than the former range, the charging characteristics may not be obtained. If the range exceeds the former range, humidity dependence is high, and the storage stability under high humidity may deteriorate.
  • the photothermographic material is used in the manufacturing process such as coating, drying, processing, etc., when the photosensitive material is scraped, turned over, brought into contact with various devices during transportation, or between the photosensitive surface and the backing surface.
  • the contact between photosensitive materials is often undesirably affected.
  • the surface of the photosensitive material may be scratched or slipped, or the photosensitive material may be transported in a developing device or the like.
  • the photothermographic material in order to prevent scratches on the surface and deterioration in transportability, any one of the constituent layers of the material, particularly on the support. It is preferable that the outermost layer contains a lubricant, a matting agent or the like to adjust the surface physical properties of the photosensitive material.
  • the outermost layer on the support contains organic solid lubricant particles having an average diameter of l30 / zm, and these organic solid lubricant particles are dispersed by a polymer dispersant. This is what it is.
  • the melting point of the lubricant particles is preferably higher than the heat development processing temperature, preferably 80 ° C or higher, more preferably 110 ° C or higher.
  • organic solid lubricant particles used in the present invention compounds that lower the surface energy are preferred.
  • polyethylene, polypropylene, polytetrafluoroethylene, and copolymers thereof are pulverized. Examples thereof include formed particles.
  • organic solid lubricant particles having polyethylene and polypropylene power include polytetrafluoroethylene, polypropylene / polyethylene copolymer, polyethylene (low density), polyethylene (high density), and polypropylene.
  • the organic solid lubricant particles are preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (SC1) or general formula (SC2).
  • each R R represents a C 6 60 substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group
  • X and X each contain a nitrogen atom
  • L is a substituted or unsubstituted p2 + q2 valent alkyl group, alkyl-
  • R group aralkyl group or aryl group.
  • M represents a Z-valent metal ion.
  • the total number of carbon atoms is not particularly limited, but generally 20 or more is preferable, and 30 or more is more preferable. Definition of R and R
  • Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group, alkenyl group, aralkyl group or aryl group in SCI SC2 may have include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a cyan group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, Aryloyl group, alkoxycarbol group, aryloxycarbol group, amino group, acylamino group, sulfo-lumino group, ureido group, force rubermoyl group, sulfamoyl group, isacyl group, sulfol group, sulfiel group, aryl group And an alkyl group.
  • These groups may further have a substituent, and preferred substituents include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an alkoxycarbo group, an acylamine group, a sulfo-amino group, an acyl group, and the like. And an alkyl group.
  • a halogen atom a fluorine atom and a chlorine atom are preferable.
  • the alkyl component in the alkoxy group, the alkylthio group, and the alkoxycarbonyl group is the same as the alkyl group of R 1 described later.
  • the amino group of the acylamino group and sulfo-lumino group is the same as the alkyl group of R 1 described later.
  • the group may be an N-substituted amino group, and the substituent is preferably an alkyl group.
  • the groups bonded to the acyl group, the carbo group of the acyl group, and the sulfo group of the sulfoamino group are an alkyl group and an aryl group, and the above alkyl groups are preferable.
  • R 1 and R 2 have 6 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 10 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl groups alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, or aralkyl groups
  • these alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, and aralkyl groups may be linear, branched, or containing a cyclic structure. A mixture of these may be used.
  • RSCl SC2 includes octyl, t-octyl, dodecyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, 2-hexyldecyl, octadecyl, C H (n is 20 to 60), eicosyl, docosal, melicyl.
  • Divalent linking groups X and X containing a nitrogen atom are preferably CON (R) —, —N (R
  • R to R are each a hydrogen atom or a substitution
  • L represents a substituted or unsubstituted p + q-valent alkyl group, alkenyl group, aralkyl group,
  • carbon number of these hydrocarbon groups is not specifically limited, Preferably it is 1-60, More preferably, it is 1-40, More preferably, it is 10-40.
  • p2 + q2 valent hydrocarbon in p2 + q2 valent hydrocarbon group means that p2 + q2 hydrogen atoms in the hydrocarbon are removed and p 2 X — groups and q2 X groups are bonded Indicates to do.
  • p2 and q2 are integers from 0 to 6
  • the compound represented by the general formula (SC1) may be a synthetic product or a natural product. Even if it is a natural product or a synthetic product, synthetic compounds made from higher fatty acids and alcohols of natural products, including those with different carbon numbers, straight-chain and branched compounds, and the ability to form a mixture of these compounds It's okay to use a mixture! / ⁇ . From the viewpoint of the quality stability of the composition, a synthetic product is preferred.
  • the organic solid lubricant is preferably used in a state of being dispersed in advance in the coating solution.
  • organic solid lubricants are slippery on the surface, so the affinity of water and organic solvents is often not sufficiently high. Aggregation or sedimentation may occur. Aggregation or sedimentation in the coating solution is undesirable because it causes coating failure when processed into a film.
  • Methods for improving the stability of the dispersion include a method of modifying the surface and using an electrostatic effect, and a method of using the effect of steric hindrance using a surface adsorbing layer by a polymer dispersant.
  • the former is a general dispersion stabilization method.
  • the use of the photothermographic material is likely to affect the other performance of the surface modifier itself, and it is effective for both aqueous and non-aqueous methods. The latter method, which is easy to express, is preferred.
  • a binder used in the photosensitive material can be used. Specifically, polybutyl butyral, polyvinyl acetal, poly vinyleno cornole, senorelose acetate butyrate, senorelose acetate propionate and the like can be used.
  • the amount of the polymer dispersant is preferably used in the range of 1 to 200% by mass with respect to the organic solid lubricant particles to be dispersed.
  • the dispersion method is not particularly limited, but a resolver set, an ultrasonic method, a pressure method, or the like can be used, and it is preferable to perform the dispersion treatment with a dispersion device with a cooling device so as not to generate heat.
  • the average particle size of the organic solid lubricant particles refers to the average particle size after dispersion by the following method.
  • a dispersion liquid containing lubricant particles is diluted, dropped onto a grid with a strong support film, and dried, and then a transmission electron microscope (manufactured by Nippon Denshi Co., Ltd.) is used. : 2000FX type, etc.), directly after taking a photo at 5000x magnification, the scanner captures the negative as a digital image, and using an appropriate image processing software, each particle size (equivalent circle diameter) is 300 The average particle size can be obtained from the arithmetic average measured as described above.
  • At least one layer on the support contains the compound represented by the general formula (SC), and a nonionic fluorine-containing surfactant and an anionic fluorine-containing interface.
  • U which preferably contains an activator.
  • the nonionic fluorine-containing surfactant that can be used is not particularly limited, but a compound represented by the following formula (AIF) is preferred.
  • AO represents a divalent group having at least one alkyleneoxy group
  • n3 represents an integer of 1 to 30
  • the fluorine-containing aliphatic group represented by Rf and Rf includes linear, branched and cyclic groups, or
  • fluorine-containing aliphatic groups include fluoroalkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (—C F, 1 C F, etc.), sulfofluoroalkyl groups (C F SO—, C F SO—, etc.), C
  • R is a hydrogen atom, alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms,
  • Coxyl group, alkyl carboxyl group or aryl group, and R each have 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • AO is a group having an alkyleneoxy group such as ethyleneoxy, propyleneoxy, i-propyleneoxy and the like, and may have a substituent such as an amino group at the terminal.
  • n is preferably an integer of 5 to 15.
  • nonionic fluorine-containing surfactants represented by the general formula (AIF) are CF (CH CH O) CF, CF (CH CH O) CF, CF CH CH (OH) CH (CH CH O) CH CH (OH) CH CF, CF (CH CH O) CF, CF (CH C
  • the present invention is not limited to these.
  • ionic fluorine-containing surfactant FA
  • specific compounds are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • S0 3 Na is 4th or 5th or a mixture of them
  • the amount of each fluorine-containing surfactant used is generally from 0.01 to lm 2 of photosensitive material: Lg is preferred, and 10 to 500 mg is preferred! / ⁇ . More preferably, it is 50 to 300 mg.
  • fluorine-containing surfactants include ionic fluorine-based surfactants described in JP-A-60-244945, JP-A-63-306437, and JP-A-1-24245; Fluorosurfactants used in combination with cation cation as described in 197, 068, 5-204115, etc. can be used.
  • a filter layer is formed on the same side as or opposite to the photosensitive layer in order to control the amount of light transmitted through the photosensitive layer or the wavelength distribution. It is preferable to contain a dye or a pigment. As the dye used, known compounds that absorb light in various wavelength regions can be used depending on the color sensitivity of the photosensitive material.
  • a squarylium dye having a thiopyrylium nucleus as disclosed in JP-A-2001-83655 (this specification)
  • a thiopyrylium squarium dye a squarylium dye having a pyrylium nucleus
  • Support materials used for photothermographic materials include various polymer materials, glass, wool cloth, cotton cloth, paper, metal (aluminum, etc.), etc. What can be processed into a certain sheet or roll is suitable. Accordingly, the support in the photothermographic material of the present invention includes cellulose acetate film, polyester film, polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film, polyethylene naphthalate (PEN) film, polyamide film, polyimide film, cellulose triacetate film (TAC). ) Or a plastic film such as a polycarbonate (PC) film is preferred, and a biaxially stretched PET film is particularly preferred.
  • the thickness of the support is about 50 to 300 ⁇ m, preferably 70 to 180 ⁇ m.
  • a metal oxide and a conductive compound such as z or a conductive polymer can be included in the constituent layers. These may be contained in any layer, but are preferably contained in the backing layer or the surface protective layer on the photosensitive layer side, the undercoat layer, and the like.
  • the conductive compounds described in columns 14 to 20 of US Pat. No. 5,244,773 are preferably used.
  • the surface protective layer on the backing layer side contains a conductive metal oxide.
  • the conductive metal oxide is a crystalline metal oxide particle that contains oxygen defects and a small amount of foreign atoms that form donors with respect to the metal oxide used.
  • metal oxides include ZnO, TiO, SnO, AlO, InO, SiO, MgO, BaO, MoO, VO, etc.
  • ZnO, TiO and SnO are preferred.
  • heteroatoms include heteroatoms
  • the metal oxide fine particles used in the present invention have electrical conductivity, and the volume resistivity thereof is 10 7 ⁇ 'cm or less, particularly 10 5 ⁇ 'cm or less. These acid compounds are described in JP-A Nos. 56-143431, 56-120519, 58-62647 and the like. Furthermore, using a conductive material in which the above metal oxide is attached to other crystalline metal oxide particles or fibrous materials (such as titanium oxide) as described in JP-B-59-6235. Also good.
  • the particle size that can be used is preferably 1 ⁇ m or less, but if it is 0.5 m or less, the stability after dispersion is good and it is easy to use. In order to make the light scattering property as small as possible, it is very preferable to use conductive particles of less than 0. This makes it possible to form a transparent photosensitive material.
  • the conductive metal oxide is needle-like or fibrous
  • the length is preferably 30 / zm or less and the diameter is preferably 1 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably the length is 10 ⁇ m or less and the diameter is 0 ⁇ m. It is 3 ⁇ m or less, and the length Z diameter ratio is 3 or more.
  • SnO is commercially available from Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd.
  • the photothermographic material of the present invention has a photosensitive layer which is at least one image forming layer on a support. Although only the photosensitive layer may be formed on the support, it is preferable to form at least one non-image forming layer on the photosensitive layer. For example, it is preferable that a protective layer is provided on the photosensitive layer for the purpose of protecting the photosensitive layer. On the opposite side of the support, a “clump” is formed between the photosensitive materials or in the photosensitive material roll. In order to prevent “sticking”, a knock coat layer is provided.
  • two or more photosensitive layers may be provided on one side of the support or one or more layers on both sides of the support for gradation adjustment and the like.
  • the photothermographic material is preferably formed by preparing a coating solution in which the above-described constituent materials are dissolved or dispersed in a solvent, applying a plurality of coating solutions simultaneously, and then performing a heat treatment.
  • “multiple simultaneous multi-layer coating” means that the coating solution for each component layer (photosensitive layer, protective layer, etc.) is prepared, and when this is applied to the support, the coating and drying are repeated for each layer individually. This means that the constituent layers are formed in such a state that the multilayer coating is simultaneously performed and the drying process can be performed simultaneously. That is, the upper layer is provided before the remaining amount of all the solvents in the lower layer reaches 70% by mass or less (more preferably 90% by mass or less).
  • the silver coating amount is preferably selected in accordance with the purpose of the light-sensitive material, but is preferably 0.8 to 1.5 g / m 2 for the purpose of medical images. G 1.0 to 1.3 g / m 2 is more preferred.
  • the coated silver amounts those derived from halogenated silver preferably occupy 2-18% of the total silver amount, and more preferably 5-15%.
  • the coating density of halogen silver particles of 0.01 m or more (equivalent particle diameter equivalent to a sphere) is preferably 1 ⁇ 10 14 to 1 ⁇ 10 18 particles / m 2 . Furthermore, 1 ⁇ 10 15 to 1 ⁇ 10 17 / m 2 is preferable.
  • the photothermographic material of the present invention contains a solvent in the range of 5 to 1, OOOmgZm 2 during development! /, I prefer to be. It is more preferable to be adjusted so that 10 ⁇ 150mg / m 2! /. As a result, the photothermographic material has high sensitivity, low capri and high maximum density.
  • the solvent include those described in JP-A-2001-264930, paragraph “0030”, but are not limited thereto. These solvents can be used alone or in combination of several kinds.
  • the content of the solvent in the photosensitive material can be adjusted by changing conditions such as temperature conditions in the drying process after the coating process. The content of the solvent can be measured by gas chromatography under conditions suitable for detecting the contained solvent.
  • the heating means may be any means such as contact heating with a heating drum or a heating plate, non-contact heating such as radiation, but contact heating with a heating plate is preferred.
  • the contact heating surface may be either the image forming layer (photosensitive layer) side or the non-image forming layer (non-photosensitive layer) side.
  • the non-image forming layer (photosensitive layer) side is the contact heating surface for stability to the processing environment. I prefer to be there.
  • the developing unit is configured by combining a plurality of zones and a plurality of means that are independently temperature controlled, and further includes at least one heat retention zone that maintains a specific developing temperature. Preferably it is.
  • the heat development process can employ a separate structure for the temperature raising portion and the heat retaining portion, and in the temperature raising portion, heating means such as a heating member can be used.
  • heating means such as a heating member
  • the heat retaining part uses an optimum heating method that is different between the temperature rising part and the heat retaining part, which does not require such close contact, It is possible to achieve a configuration that allows rapid processing of the thermal development process, downsizing of the apparatus, and cost reduction while maintaining high image quality without density unevenness.
  • the temperature raising unit heats the sheet film while pressing the sheet film against a plate heater by a counter roller, and the heat retaining unit is interposed between guides having at least one heater.
  • the sheet film can be heated in the formed slit.
  • the sheet heater is pressed against the plate heater by the opposing roller and brought into contact with the plate heater, so that the plate heater and the sheet film can be brought into close contact with each other. Therefore, it is only necessary to transport while keeping the temperature between the slits (heat insulation), so there is no need for drive parts for the transport system, and the size of the device can be reduced and the cost can be reduced without requiring much accuracy of the slit dimensions.
  • a coating solution for the undercoat layer on the image forming surface side having the following composition is applied so as to have a dry film thickness of 0.25 m, and then the undercoat layer on the image forming surface side having the following composition.
  • the coating solution was applied to a dry film thickness of 0.06 / zm and then dried at 140 ° C. These were heat-treated at 140 ° C. for 2 minutes to obtain an undercoated support.
  • Tin oxide sol solid content 10%, synthesized by the method described in JP-A-10-059720
  • Surfactant SA-1 for subbing layer 0.5g
  • Distilled water was added to make 1,000 ml to make the coating solution.
  • True spherical silica matting agent (Seahoster KE-P50: manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.) Distilled water was added to 0.3 g or more to make 1,000 ml to obtain a coating solution.
  • 0.022 part of manganese acetate tetrahydrate was added and transesterification was carried out while distilling methanol at 170-220 ° C under a nitrogen stream.
  • 0.04 part of trimethyl phosphate, 0.04 part of antimony trioxide as a polycondensation catalyst and 6.8 parts of 1,4-cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid were added, and the reaction temperature of 220-235 ° C was almost theoretical.
  • Distilled water was added to make 1,000 ml to make the coating solution.
  • Modified water-based polyester for image forming surface * (Solid content 18%) 80.
  • Og Surfactant for subbing layer 0.4 g
  • True spherical silica matting agent (Seahoster KE-P50: mentioned above) Distilled water was added to 0.3 g or more to make 1,000 ml, and a coating solution having a solid content concentration of 0.5% was obtained.
  • Phthalated gelatin phthalated modification rate 98% 66. 2g
  • Surfactant AO-1 (10% methanol aqueous solution) 10ml Potassium bromide 32g
  • This emulsion was monodisperse cubic silver iodobromide grains having an average grain size of 0.043 ⁇ m and a (100) plane ratio of 92%.
  • MEK methyl ethyl ketone
  • a solution obtained by dissolving 40 g of N-iso-propylacrylamide in 43 g of MEK was dropped into a separable flask over 2 hours. Thereafter, the temperature was raised over 1 hour, and when it was refluxed, 0.17 g of lauryl peroxide was dissolved in 33 g of MEK. The liquid was dropped into the flask over 2 hours and reacted at the same temperature for another 3 hours. Thereafter, a solution obtained by dissolving 0.33 g of methylhydroquinone in 107 g of MEK was added, and after cooling, a 30% polymer solution for amphiphilic dispersion was obtained.
  • 1,850 g and 90% of pure water adjusted to 5% concentration are stirred at 85 ° C.
  • 1036 ml of 5 molZL potassium hydroxide aqueous solution was added over 5 minutes and then reacted for 60 minutes to obtain an aliphatic potassium carboxylate aqueous solution.
  • additional pure was added so that the concentration of the aqueous potassium aliphatic carboxylate solution was 5%.
  • 38 and 300 g of a 5% silver nitrate aqueous solution were prepared and kept at 10 ° C.
  • Aliphatic potassium carboxylate aqueous solution and silver nitrate power A pump capable of feeding at a constant flow rate was prepared, and a reaction device was prepared so that both solutions could react in a Y-shaped mixing device.
  • the stock tank was kept at 35 ° C. Thereafter, the solid content was separated by suction filtration, and the solid content was washed with water at 25 ° C. until the conductivity of the permeated water reached S / cm.
  • An aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt dispersion emulsion was prepared by supplying to DISPERMAT SL-C125 EX type (VMA-GETZMANN) and dispersing at a mill peripheral speed of 9 mZs.
  • the solid content concentration of the obtained aliphatic carboxylate silver salt dispersion emulsion was about 27%.
  • An image forming layer and a slip layer are placed on the undercoat of the undercoated support on the image forming layer side so that the silver amount is 1.26 g / 0.06 gZm 2 , and the wet weight is 23 gZm 2 .
  • a surface protective layer was applied in multiple layers.
  • the back layer was applied on the opposite side of the image forming layer side undercoat so that the wet weight was 25 gZm 2 .
  • Each drying was performed at 60 ° C for 2 minutes.
  • a photothermographic material was obtained by carrying out heat treatment at 79 ° C for 10 minutes while conveying the sample coated on both sides.
  • DesmodurN3300 (Movey Corp .: polyfunctional aliphatic isocyanate)
  • Reducing agent 1-1 160 g and dye- A: 500 mg was dissolved in MEK and finished to 800 g to obtain a developer solution.
  • Fluorine-based acrylic copolymer (Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd .: Optoflon FM450) 1.6 g Amorphous saturated copolyester (Toyobo Co., Ltd .: Byron 240P) 12 g True spherical cross-linking matting agent (Sekisui Chemical Co., Ltd .: MBX-8) 4. Og surfactant CF O (CHCHO) CF 7. lg
  • the photothermographic material sample prepared as described above was processed into half-cut size (34.5 cm x 43. Ocm), and then two samples of samples wrapped in the following packaging material in a 25 ° C 50% environment were prepared. . After storing at room temperature for 2 weeks, one bag was stored at 23 ° C ZlO days, and the other bag was stored at 55 ° CZlO days, and then the following evaluation was performed.
  • a laser imager equipped with a 786nm semiconductor laser with a maximum output of 50mW was exposed to heat and developed at 129 ° C for 8 seconds.
  • the resulting image was evaluated with a densitometer.
  • heat development at the same time as exposure means a sheet of photosensitive material made of photothermographic material that is partially exposed and developed on a part of the sheet that has already been exposed. But Means to be started.
  • the distance between the exposed area and the developed area was 12 cm, and the linear velocity at this time was 30 mmZ seconds.
  • the transport speed from the photosensitive material supply unit to the image exposure unit, the transport rate at the image exposure unit, and the transport rate at the thermal development unit were each 30 mmZ seconds.
  • the exposure was performed in a stepped manner while reducing the exposure energy amount by logEO.05 for each step from the maximum output.
  • a characteristic curve consisting of light intensity and vertical axis density was created.
  • the sensitivity is defined as the reciprocal of the exposure that gives a density 1.0 higher than the unexposed area, and the minimum density capri density (minimum density) and the maximum density were measured.
  • Sensitivity was expressed as a relative value with the value of Sample 1 stored at 23 ° C for 10 days as 100.

Abstract

A thermally developable photosensitive material that simultaneously excels in pre-processing storability and developability. There is provided a thermally developable photosensitive material having a support and, superimposed thereon, an image forming layer containing non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt grains, photosensitive silver halide grains, a silver ion reducing agent and a binder, characterized in that the amount of binder as a constituent of the image forming layer is in the range of 25 to 35 mass% based on the total solid content constituting the image forming layer, and that at least one type of binder has a polymerization degree of 1000 to 3000.

Description

明 細 書  Specification
熱現像感光材料  Photothermographic material
技術分野  Technical field
[0001] 本発明は支持体上に非感光性有機銀塩、感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子、バインダー 及び銀イオンの還元剤を含有する熱現像感光材料 (単に熱現像材料又は感光材料 ともいう。)に関する。  The present invention relates to a photothermographic material containing a non-photosensitive organic silver salt, photosensitive halogenated silver particles, a binder and a silver ion reducing agent on a support (also simply referred to as a heat-developable material or a photosensitive material). About.
背景技術  Background art
[0002] 従来、医療や印刷製版の分野では、画像形成材料の湿式処理に伴う廃液が作業 性の上で問題となっており、近年では環境保全、省スペースの観点からも処理廃液 の減量が強く望まれている。そこで、熱を加えるだけで画像形成ができる熱現像感光 材料が実用化され、上記分野で急速に普及してきて ヽる。  [0002] Conventionally, in the medical and printing plate making fields, waste liquids resulting from wet processing of image forming materials have been a problem in terms of workability. In recent years, the amount of waste processing liquids has been reduced from the viewpoint of environmental conservation and space saving. It is strongly desired. Therefore, photothermographic materials capable of forming an image by simply applying heat have been put into practical use and are rapidly spreading in the above fields.
[0003] 熱現像感光材料自体は既に古くから提案されて (例えば、特許文献 1、 2参照。)い る。  The photothermographic material itself has been proposed for a long time (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).
[0004] この熱現像感光材料は、反応に必要な素材は全てフィルム中に含有され、処理後 もフィルム中に残存するという特徴から、熱現像前の保存期間にカプリを生じたり、現 像性が低下する等の課題を抱えており、保存性と現像性を両立するために、多くの 研究が進められ報告されている。特に、保存期間中のカプリ上昇については、保存 期間中に生じたカプリ核をポリハロゲンィ匕合物で漂白する技術 (例えば、特許文献 3 参照。)や、バインダーの Tgや重合度を制御する方法が有効 (例えば、特許文献 4〜 6参照。)である。し力しながら、いずれの方法も、少な力もず現像性を損ない、市場 要求を満たす充分なレベルに達して 、な 、のが現状である。  [0004] This photothermographic material is characterized in that all the materials necessary for the reaction are contained in the film and remain in the film after processing. Many studies have been conducted and reported to achieve both storability and developability. In particular, with regard to the increase in capri during the storage period, there are techniques for bleaching capri nuclei generated during the storage period with polyhalogen compounds (for example, see Patent Document 3) and methods for controlling the Tg and degree of polymerization of the binder. It is effective (for example, refer to Patent Documents 4 to 6). However, the current situation is that each method has a sufficient level of damage to developability and meets the market demands.
特許文献 1 :米国特許第 3, 152, 904号明細書  Patent Document 1: U.S. Pat.No. 3,152,904
特許文献 2 :米国特許第 3, 457, 075号明細書  Patent Document 2: U.S. Pat.No. 3,457,075
特許文献 3:特開平 07— 002781号公報  Patent Document 3: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 07-002781
特許文献 4:特開 2002— 341483号公報号公報  Patent Document 4: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-341483
特許文献 5 :特開 2002— 156727号公報  Patent Document 5: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2002-156727
特許文献 6:特開 2004 - 279500号公報 発明の開示 Patent Document 6: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-279500 Disclosure of the invention
発明が解決しょうとする課題  Problems to be solved by the invention
[0005] 本発明は上記の背景的事情に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的は、処理前の 保存性と現像性を両立する熱現像感光材料を提供することにある。  [0005] The present invention has been made in view of the above-described background circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a photothermographic material having both storability before development and developability.
課題を解決するための手段  Means for solving the problem
[0006] 本発明の上記目的は、以下の構成により達成することができる。  [0006] The above object of the present invention can be achieved by the following configurations.
1.支持体上に非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子、感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子、銀 イオン還元剤及び重合体からなるバインダーを含有する画像形成層を有する熱現像 感光材料において、該画像形成層のバインダー量が、該画像形成層に含有された 総固形分量に対して 25〜35質量%であり、かつ該バインダーが重合度 1000以上 3 000以下の重合体を含有することを特徴とする熱現像感光材料。  1. A photothermographic material having an image forming layer containing a non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particle, a photosensitive silver halide particle, a silver ion reducing agent and a polymer binder on the support. The binder amount of the forming layer is 25 to 35% by mass with respect to the total solid content contained in the image forming layer, and the binder contains a polymer having a polymerization degree of 1000 or more and 3000 or less. A photothermographic material.
[0007] 2.画像形成層に、イソシァネートイ匕合物を該画像形成層のノインダー量に対して 、 0質量%よりも多く 3. 5質量%以下の範囲で添加されたことを特徴とする 1記載の熱 現像感光材料。  [0007] 2. An isocyanate compound is added to the image forming layer in a range of more than 0% by mass and 3.5% by mass or less with respect to the noinder amount of the image forming layer 1 The photothermographic material described.
[0008] 3.前記バインダーの Tgが 70〜105°Cであることを特徴とする 1又は 2記載の熱現 像感光材料。  [0008] 3. The photothermographic material according to 1 or 2, wherein the binder has a Tg of 70 to 105 ° C.
[0009] 4.前記画像形成層がバインダーの少なくとも 1種として、ポリビュルァセタール榭脂 を含有することを特徴とする 1〜3のいずれか 1項記載の熱現像感光材料。  [0009] 4. The photothermographic material according to any one of 1 to 3, wherein the image-forming layer contains poly (bullacetal) resin as at least one binder.
[0010] 5.前記非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子力 ベヘン酸含有率 70〜99. 99mo 1%の脂肪酸の銀塩からなることを特徴とする 1〜4のいずれか 1項記載の熱現像感 光材料。  [0010] 5. The non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particle force, comprising a silver salt of a fatty acid having a behenic acid content of 70 to 99.99mo 1%, according to any one of 1 to 4, Photothermographic material.
[0011] 6.前記銀イオン還元剤が下記一般式(1)で表されることを特徴とする 1〜5のいず れか 1項記載の熱現像感光材料。  [0011] 6. The photothermographic material according to any one of 1 to 5, wherein the silver ion reducing agent is represented by the following general formula (1):
[0012] [化 1] —般式 {1 ) [0012] [Chemical 1] —General formula (1)
Figure imgf000004_0001
Figure imgf000004_0001
[0013] (式中、 Rは水素原子、又は置換基を表す。 R及び Rは各々独立に、炭素原子数が (In the formula, R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. R and R each independently represents the number of carbon atoms.
1 2 3  one two Three
3〜8の分岐アルキル基を表す。 A及び Aは各々独立に、水酸基、又は還元、脱保  Represents 3 to 8 branched alkyl groups. A and A are each independently a hydroxyl group or a reduction or deprotection
1 2  1 2
護されることにより水酸基を形成しうる基を表し、 n及び mは 3〜5の整数を表す。 ) It represents a group capable of forming a hydroxyl group by being protected, and n and m represent an integer of 3 to 5. )
7.前記非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子と前記感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の合 計銀量が 0. 8〜1. 5gZm2であることを特徴とする 1〜6のいずれか 1項記載の熱現 像感光材料。 7. The total silver amount of the non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles and the photosensitive halogenated silver halide particles is 0.8 to 1.5 gZm 2 , The thermal image light-sensitive material described.
発明の効果  The invention's effect
[0014] 本発明により、処理前の保存性と現像性を両立する熱現像感光材料を提供するこ とができた。  [0014] According to the present invention, a photothermographic material having both preservative preservability and developability can be provided.
発明を実施するための最良の形態  BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0015] 本発明を更に詳しく説明する。 [0015] The present invention will be described in more detail.
[0016] 〔バインダー〕 [0016] [Binder]
(画像形成層のバインダー)  (Binder for image forming layer)
本発明に係る画像形成層に含まれる重合体からなるバインダーは、銀塩、ハロゲン 化銀粒子、還元剤、その他の成分を担持し得、好適に用いられるバインダーは、透 明又は半透明で、一般に無色であり、天然ポリマーや合成ポリマー及びコポリマー、 その他フィルムを形成する媒体、例えば特開 2001— 330918号の段落「0069」に 記載のものが挙げられる。これらの内、特に好ましい例としてァセタール基を持つ高 分子化合物、メタクリル酸アルキルエステル類、メタクリル酸芳香族エステル類、スチ レン類等が挙げられる。この様な重合体 (高分子化合物)の中でも、ァセタール基を 持つ高分子化合物を用いることが好まし 、。  The binder made of the polymer contained in the image forming layer according to the present invention can carry silver salt, silver halide grains, a reducing agent, and other components. The binder preferably used is transparent or translucent, Generally, it is colorless and includes natural polymers, synthetic polymers and copolymers, and other media for forming a film, for example, those described in paragraph “0069” of JP-A-2001-330918. Among these, particularly preferred examples include high molecular compounds having an acetal group, alkyl methacrylates, aromatic methacrylates, and styrenes. Among such polymers (polymer compounds), it is preferable to use a polymer compound having an acetal group.
[0017] ァセタール基を持つ高分子化合物でも、ァセトァセタール構造を持つポリビニルァ セターノレであること力 Sより好ましく、 f列えば、米国特許 2, 358, 836号、同 3, 003, 879 号、同 2, 828, 204号、英国特許 771, 155号等に示されるポリビュルァセタールを 挙げることができる。本発明に好まし!/ヽバインダーはポリビニルァセタール類であり、 特に好ましくはポリビニルブチラールであり、感光性層の主バインダーとして用いるこ とが好ましい。ここで言う主バインダーとは、「画像形成層の全バインダーの 50質量 %以上を上記ポリマーが占めている状態」を言う。従って、全バインダーの 50質量% 未満の範囲で他のポリマーをブレンドして用いてもよ!、。 [0017] Even a polymer compound having an acetal group is a polyvinyl compound having an acetacetal structure. The power of being setanore is more preferable than S, and in the f row, polybules shown in U.S. Pat.Nos. 2,358,836, 3,003,879, 2,828,204, British Patent 771,155, etc. Acetal can be mentioned. Preferred for the present invention! /! Binders are polyvinyl acetals, particularly preferably polyvinyl butyral, which is preferably used as the main binder of the photosensitive layer. The main binder as used herein refers to “a state in which the polymer occupies 50% by mass or more of the total binder in the image forming layer”. Therefore, other polymers may be blended and used within the range of less than 50% by weight of the total binder!
[0018] ポリビュルァセタール榭脂は、ポリビュルアルコールと各種アルデヒドとのァセター ルイ匕反応により合成される力 ブチルアルデヒド及び Z又はァセトアルデヒドでァセタ 一ルイ匕されたものが好ましい。特に、ポリビュルァセタール榭脂のァセタールイ匕され た部分の割合力 全ァセタールイ匕部分に対して 60〜100%の範囲にあることが好ま しぐより好ましくは 85%以上である。アルデヒドによりァセタールイ匕された部分が 60 %以上の場合は、得られるポリビニルァセタール榭脂が吸湿しにくぐ本発明の熱現 像感光材料となった際のカプリの原因となる水が分散液中に持ち込まれることを防止 するため好ましい。 [0018] The polybutacetal rosin is preferably one that has been synthesized with the power butyl aldehyde and Z or acetoaldehyde, which is synthesized by the aceter Louis reaction of polybulal alcohol and various aldehydes. In particular, the specific force of the acetalized portion of the polybutacetal resin is preferably in the range of 60 to 100% with respect to the total acetalized portion, more preferably 85% or more. When the portion acetalized by aldehyde is 60% or more, the water that causes capri when the obtained polyvinyl acetal resin is hard to absorb moisture becomes the heat-sensitive material of the present invention. It is preferable in order to prevent it from being brought in.
[0019] ここで、アルデヒドとしては、ホルムアルデヒド、ァセトアルデヒド、ブチルアルデヒド、 プロピルアルデヒドなどァセタール化できるアルデヒドであればどのようなアルデヒドを 用いてもよいが、本発明の場合、ブチルアルデヒドをそれぞれ単独で用いる力 或い はブチルアルデヒドとァセトアルデヒドを併用するのが好ましい。  Here, as the aldehyde, any aldehyde that can be acetalized, such as formaldehyde, acetaldehyde, butyraldehyde, propyl aldehyde, and the like may be used. In the present invention, each butyraldehyde is used alone. It is preferable to use a combination of butyraldehyde and acetoaldehyde.
[0020] (画像形成層中のバインダー含有量)  [0020] (Binder content in image forming layer)
本発明の熱現像感光材料は、画像形成層中のバインダー量が、画像形成層に含 有される総固形分に対して 25〜35質量%であることを特徴とする。画像形成層に含 有される総固形分とは、バインダー含め、非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子、感 光性ハロゲン化銀粒子、銀イオン還元剤等、画像形成層に含有される全ての素材の 固形分質量を指す。画像形成層中に含有される素材に特に制限はなぐ以下明細 書中に記す様に、画像形成層は多岐にわたる素材を含有することができる。ノ^ンダ 一が 2種以上含まれる場合、本発明におけるバインダー量とは、全バインダーの質量 を合計したものを指す。 [0021] (画像形成層のバインダー重合度) The photothermographic material of the present invention is characterized in that the amount of binder in the image forming layer is 25 to 35% by mass with respect to the total solid content contained in the image forming layer. The total solid content contained in the image forming layer includes all binders, non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles, photosensitive silver halide particles, silver ion reducing agents, etc. contained in the image forming layer. Refers to the solid mass of the material. The material contained in the image forming layer is not particularly limited, and the image forming layer may contain a wide variety of materials as described in the following specification. When two or more types of solder are included, the binder amount in the present invention refers to the sum of the masses of all binders. [0021] (Binder polymerization degree of image forming layer)
本発明の熱現像感光材料に係る画像形成層中に含有されるバインダーは、少なく とも 1種の、重合度が 1000以上 3000以下の重合体を含有することが好ましい。更に は、上記の重合度が 1250以上 2750以下の範囲のものが好ましい。また、バインダ 一を複数種用いる場合、上記重合度 1000以上 3000以下の重合体は全バインダー 量に対して 20質量%以上 95質量%以下(20〜95質量%)であることが好ましぐ更 には、 30質量%以上 50質量%以下であることが好ましい。  The binder contained in the image forming layer according to the photothermographic material of the invention preferably contains at least one polymer having a polymerization degree of 1000 or more and 3000 or less. Furthermore, those having a degree of polymerization in the range of 1250 to 2750 are preferred. Further, when a plurality of binders are used, it is preferable that the polymer having a polymerization degree of 1000 or more and 3000 or less is 20% by mass to 95% by mass (20 to 95% by mass) with respect to the total binder amount. Is preferably 30% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less.
[0022] (画像形成層のバインダーの Tg)  [0022] (Tg of binder of image forming layer)
本発明の熱現像感光材料は、画像形成層に用いるノインダ一のガラス転移温度( Tg)が 70〜105°C以上であることが好ましい。更には、 70〜95°Cであることが好まし い。バインダーの Tgは各層の内部における熱的相転移温度の目安となる値であり、 Tgが低すぎると保存時の素材の拡散による写真性能の変動や、熱現像後の濃度変 化を促進してしまうため好ましくない。又、 Tgが高すぎると乾燥温度や熱現像温度の ような高温での榭脂流動性の適正化ができない。乾燥時には、塗布液溶媒の乾燥速 度の低下、現像時には画像形成に必要な素材の拡散速度の低下を招くため好ましく ない。 Tgが適正化されることにより、画像形成において十分なカプリ濃度、最高濃度 が得ることが出来る点で好ましい。従って、本発明においては、上記の Tgの範囲が 好ましい。なお、本発明のバインダーの Tgは、熱現像感光材料の画像形成層を剥離 し、これを、いわゆる DSC法にて測定することができる。  The photothermographic material of the present invention preferably has a glass transition temperature (Tg) of 70 to 105 ° C. or higher for the noinder used for the image forming layer. Furthermore, the temperature is preferably 70 to 95 ° C. The Tg of the binder is a value that is a measure of the thermal phase transition temperature inside each layer. If the Tg is too low, it promotes changes in photographic performance due to diffusion of the material during storage and changes in density after heat development. Therefore, it is not preferable. On the other hand, if Tg is too high, it is impossible to optimize the fluidity of the resin at a high temperature such as the drying temperature or the heat development temperature. When drying, the drying speed of the coating solution solvent is decreased, and during development, the diffusion speed of the material necessary for image formation is decreased. By optimizing Tg, it is preferable in that sufficient capri density and maximum density can be obtained in image formation. Therefore, in the present invention, the above Tg range is preferable. The Tg of the binder of the present invention can be measured by the so-called DSC method after peeling off the image forming layer of the photothermographic material.
[0023] (非画像形成層用バインダー)  [0023] (Binder for non-image forming layer)
又、上塗り層や下塗り層、特に保護層やバックコート層等の非画像形成層 (感光性 層)に対しては、より軟ィ匕温度の高いポリマーであるセルロースエステル類、特にトリ ァセチルセルロース、セルロースアセテートブチレート等のポリマーが好ましい。なお 、必要に応じて、 2種以上のバインダー榭脂を組み合わせて用い得る。  For non-image forming layers (photosensitive layers) such as overcoat layers and undercoat layers, particularly protective layers and backcoat layers, cellulose esters which are polymers having a higher softening temperature, especially triacetyl cellulose. Polymers such as cellulose acetate butyrate are preferred. If necessary, two or more binder resins can be used in combination.
[0024] これらのバインダーは、各層の要素を固定するバインダーとして機能するのに効果 的な範囲で用いられる。効果的な範囲は当業者が容易に決定し得る。  [0024] These binders are used in an effective range to function as a binder for fixing elements of each layer. The effective range can be easily determined by one skilled in the art.
[0025] (イソシァネートイ匕合物)  [0025] (Isocyanate compound)
本発明の熱現像感光材料は、バインダー同士を橋架け結合によって繋ぐことがで きる架橋剤として、イソシァネートイ匕合物を含有させることができる。添加量は、ノイン ダ一に対し、 0よりも多く 3. 5質量%以下の範囲であることが好ましい。 The photothermographic material of the present invention can link binders together by bridging. An isocyanate compound can be contained as a cross-linking agent. The addition amount is preferably in the range of more than 0 and not more than 3.5% by mass with respect to the noinder.
[0026] 本発明に用いられるイソシァネートイ匕合物とは、イソシァネート基を少なくとも 2個有 して 、るイソシァネート類及びその付加体 (ァダクト体)であり、具体的には脂肪族ジ イソシァネート類、環状基を有する脂肪族ジイソシァネート類、ベンゼンジイソシァネ ート類、ナフタレンジイソシァネート類、ビフエ-ルジイソシァネート類、ジフエ-ルメタ ンジイソシァネート類、トリフエニルメタンジイソシァネート類、トリイソシァネート類、テト ライソシァネート類、これらのイソシァネート類の付加体及びこれらのイソシァネート類 と 2又は 3価のポリアルコール類との付加体等が挙げられる。具体例として、特開昭 5 6— 5535号の 10〜12頁に記載されるイソシァネートイ匕合物を利用することができる [0026] The isocyanate compound used in the present invention is an isocyanate having at least two isocyanate groups and an adduct thereof (specifically, an aliphatic diisocyanate, cyclic). Aliphatic diisocyanates having a group, benzene diisocyanates, naphthalene diisocyanates, biphenyl diisocyanates, diphenylmethane diisocyanates, triphenylmethane diisocyanates, Examples include triisocyanates, tetraisocyanates, adducts of these isocyanates, and adducts of these isocyanates with divalent or trivalent polyalcohols. As a specific example, an isocyanate compound described on pages 10 to 12 of JP-A-5 6-5535 can be used.
[0027] 尚、イソシァネートとポリアルコールの付加体は、特に層間接着を良くし、層の剥離 や画像のズレ及び気泡の発生を防止する能力が高い。力かるイソシァネートは、熱 現像感光材料のどの部分に含有されてもよい。例えば支持体中(特に支持体が紙の 場合、そのサイズ組成中に含ませることができる)、画像形成層 (感光性層)、表面保 護層、中間層、アンチハレーション層、下引層等の支持体の感光性層側の任意の層 に添加でき、これらの層の中の 1層又は 2層以上に添加することができる力 本発明 では、上記の如く画像形成層に、ノ インダー量に対して 0よりも多く 3. 5質量0 /0以下 の範囲で添加することが好まし 、。 [0027] It should be noted that the adduct of isocyanate and polyalcohol has particularly high ability to improve interlayer adhesion, and prevent layer peeling, image shift and bubble generation. The strong isocyanate may be contained in any part of the photothermographic material. For example, in the support (especially when the support is paper, it can be included in the size composition), image forming layer (photosensitive layer), surface protective layer, intermediate layer, antihalation layer, subbing layer, etc. The power that can be added to any layer on the photosensitive layer side of the support, and the power that can be added to one or more of these layers. many 3.5 mass 0/0 is preferably added in the range, than 0 for.
[0028] 又、使用可能なチォイソシァネート系化合物としては、上記のイソシァネート類に対 応するチォイソシァネート構造を有する化合物も有用である。  [0028] As the thioisocyanate compounds that can be used, compounds having a thioisocyanate structure corresponding to the above-mentioned isocyanates are also useful.
[0029] (非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子)  [0029] (Non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles)
本発明に用いることのできる非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩は、光に対して比較 的安定であるが、露光された感光性ハロゲン化銀及び還元剤の存在下で、 80°C或 いはそれ以上に加熱された場合に銀イオン供給体として機能し、銀画像を形成せし める銀塩である。非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩は還元剤により還元されうる銀ィォ ンを供給できる任意の脂肪族カルボン酸塩であってよ!、。脂肪族カルボン酸の銀塩 は、特に (炭素数が 10〜30、好ましくは 15〜28の)長鎖脂肪族カルボン酸の銀塩が 好ましい。脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩の好ましい例としては、リグノセリン酸銀、ベヘン酸 銀、ァラキジン酸銀、ステアリン酸銀、ォレイン酸銀、ラウリン酸銀、カブロン酸銀、ミリ スチン酸銀、パルミチン酸銀、エル力酸銀およびこれらの混合物などを含む。本発明 にお 、ては、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩は 70〜99mol%のべヘン酸銀を含有すること が好ましい。更には、 80mol%以上 90mol%未満のベヘン酸銀を含有することが好 ましい。また、エル力酸銀含有率が 2mol%以下、より好ましくは lmol%以下、更に 好ましくは 0. lmol%以下の脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩を用いる事が好ましい。 The non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt that can be used in the present invention is relatively stable to light, but is 80 ° C or higher in the presence of exposed photosensitive silver halide and a reducing agent. Is a silver salt that functions as a silver ion supplier when heated further and forms a silver image. The non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt can be any aliphatic carboxylate salt that can supply silver ion that can be reduced by a reducing agent! The silver salt of an aliphatic carboxylic acid is particularly a silver salt of a long chain aliphatic carboxylic acid (having 10 to 30, preferably 15 to 28 carbon atoms). preferable. Preferred examples of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt include silver lignocerate, silver behenate, silver arachidate, silver stearate, silver oleate, silver laurate, silver cabrate, silver myristate, silver palmitate, Including strong acid silver and mixtures thereof. In the present invention, the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt preferably contains 70 to 99 mol% of silver behenate. Further, it is preferable to contain 80 mol% or more and less than 90 mol% of silver behenate. Further, it is preferable to use an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt having a silver uric acid silver content of 2 mol% or less, more preferably 1 mol% or less, and still more preferably 0.1 mol% or less.
[0030] 本発明の脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩は所望の量で使用できるが、ハロゲンィ匕銀を含め た合計銀量として 0. 8〜1. 5gZm2が好ましぐ更には 1. 0〜1. 3gZm2の範囲であ ることが好ましい。 [0030] The aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt of the present invention can be used in a desired amount, but the total silver amount including halogenated silver is preferably 0.8 to 1.5 gZm 2 and more preferably 1.0 to 1. A range of 3 gZm 2 is preferred.
[0031] 本発明の非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子の球相当直径は、 0. 05 μ m以上 0 . 5 m以下であることが好ましい。更に好ましくは、 0. 10 111以上0. 5 m以下で ある。またその粒子サイズ分布は単分散であることが好ましい。単分散度は、平均直 径の標準偏差で表す事ができ、本発明の脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子の標準偏差は 0. 3 m以下であることが好ましい。更には、 0. 2 m以下であることが好ましい。  [0031] The non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles of the present invention preferably have a spherical equivalent diameter of 0.05 μm or more and 0.5 m or less. More preferably, it is 0.10 111 or more and 0.5 m or less. The particle size distribution is preferably monodisperse. The monodispersity can be expressed by the standard deviation of the average diameter, and the standard deviation of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles of the present invention is preferably 0.3 m or less. Furthermore, it is preferably 0.2 m or less.
[0032] この場合の粒子サイズ及びサイズ分布の測定は、レーザー回折法、遠心沈降光透 過法、 X線透過法、電気的検知帯法、遮光法、超音波減衰分光法、画像より算出す る方法等、一般的に知られる粒度分布の測定方法により各々求めることができるが、 その中でも、微細な粒子に対しては、レーザー回折法、画像より算出する方法が好ま しい。更にはレーザー回折法が好ましぐ液中に分散した脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒 子を市販のレーザー回折粒度分布測定装置により行うことができる。  [0032] In this case, the particle size and size distribution are calculated from a laser diffraction method, a centrifugal sedimentation light transmission method, an X-ray transmission method, an electrical detection band method, a light shielding method, ultrasonic attenuation spectroscopy, and an image. The particle size distribution can be determined by a generally known particle size distribution measurement method. Among these, for fine particles, a laser diffraction method or a method of calculating from an image is preferable. Further, the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles dispersed in a liquid preferred by the laser diffraction method can be carried out by a commercially available laser diffraction particle size distribution measuring apparatus.
[0033] 粒子サイズ及び、サイズ分布測定方法の具体例を示す。 [0033] Specific examples of the particle size and size distribution measuring method will be shown.
[0034] 100mlのビーカーに、 0. Olgの脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子サンプルをとり、 0. lg のノニオン NS— 210 (日本油脂 (株)製)、 40mlの水をカ卩えた後、室温で超音波分 散し、得られた分散液でレーザー回折粒度測定装置 SALD— 2000 (島津製作所( 株)製)により、平均粒子径及び、標準偏差を測定することができる。  [0034] In a 100 ml beaker, a sample of 0. Olg aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles was taken, 0.1 g of Nonion NS-210 (manufactured by NOF Corporation), 40 ml of water was added, and room temperature was added. The average particle size and standard deviation can be measured with a laser diffraction particle size analyzer SALD-2000 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) using the obtained dispersion.
[0035] 本発明における脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子は、銀イオンを含む溶液と、脂肪族力 ルボン酸アルカリ金属塩溶液もしくは懸濁液とを反応させることによって調製されるこ とが好ましい。銀イオンを含む溶液は硝酸銀水溶液、脂肪族カルボン酸金属塩溶液 もしくは懸濁液は水溶液もしくは水分散液であることが好ましぐその添加混合は、同 時に行われることが好ましぐその方法については、反応浴の液面に添加する方法、 液中に添加する方法等何れの方法で行っても構わな 、が、移送手段中に添加混合 する方法が好ましい。移送手段中の混合とは、ラインミキシングを意味し、銀イオンを 含む溶液と脂肪族カルボン酸アルカリ金属塩溶液もしくは懸濁液との混合が反応物 を含む混合液を貯留するバッチに入る前に行われることが好まし ヽ。混合部の攪拌 手段は、ホモミキサー等の機械的攪拌、スタチックミキサー、乱流効果等いずれの手 段を用いても構わないが、機械的攪拌を用いない方が好ましい。尚、移送手段中の 混合は、銀イオンを含む溶液、脂肪族カルボン酸アルカリ金属塩溶液もしくは懸濁液 に加えて、水、混合後バッチに貯留された混合液の循環液等、第 3の液もしくは懸濁 液を混合しても構わない。 [0035] The aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles in the present invention may be prepared by reacting a solution containing silver ions with an aliphatic alkanoic acid alkali metal salt solution or suspension. And are preferred. The solution containing silver ions is preferably an aqueous silver nitrate solution, and the aliphatic carboxylic acid metal salt solution or suspension is preferably an aqueous solution or aqueous dispersion. The addition and mixing are preferably performed at the same time. The method of adding to the liquid surface of the reaction bath or the method of adding to the liquid may be used, but the method of adding and mixing in the transfer means is preferred. Mixing in the transfer means means line mixing, and mixing of a solution containing silver ions with an alkali metal salt of an aliphatic carboxylic acid salt or suspension before entering a batch storing a mixture containing reactants. It is preferred to be done ヽ. Any means such as a mechanical mixer such as a homomixer, a static mixer, or a turbulent effect may be used as the stirring means in the mixing section, but it is preferable not to use mechanical stirring. In addition to the solution containing silver ions, aliphatic carboxylic acid alkali metal salt solution or suspension, the mixing in the transfer means includes a third solution such as water or a circulating solution of the mixed solution stored in the batch after mixing. Liquids or suspensions may be mixed.
[0036] 更に本発明において、硝酸銀水溶液濃度は 1〜15質量%、脂肪族カルボン酸金 属塩水溶液もしくは水分散液の濃度は 1〜5質量%の範囲にあることが好ましい。上 記濃度範囲外において、低濃度域では生産性が著しく劣化し現実的ではなぐ高濃 度域では粒径サイズ及びサイズ分布を本発明の範囲に調整することが困難になる。 また、脂肪族カルボン酸アルカリ金属塩に対する硝酸銀の混合モル比は 0. 9〜1. 1 の範囲にあることが好ましぐ範囲外では粒径サイズ及びサイズ分布を本発明の範囲 に調整することが困難になるのに加え、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩の収率低下や、カプリ 原因になる酸ィ匕銀の生成に繋がりやすくなる。  [0036] Further, in the present invention, the concentration of the aqueous silver nitrate solution is preferably 1 to 15% by mass, and the concentration of the aliphatic carboxylic acid metal salt aqueous solution or the aqueous dispersion is preferably 1 to 5% by mass. Outside the above concentration range, productivity is significantly degraded in the low concentration region, and it is difficult to adjust the particle size and size distribution within the range of the present invention in the high concentration region which is not practical. In addition, when the mixed molar ratio of silver nitrate to the aliphatic carboxylic acid alkali metal salt is preferably in the range of 0.9 to 1.1, the particle size and size distribution should be adjusted within the range of the present invention. In addition, the yield of aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt is reduced, and the formation of acid silver that causes capri is likely to occur.
[0037] 本発明にお 、て、調製された脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩は、その保存性の観点から、 水洗され、その後乾燥されることが好ましい。水洗は、未反応イオン等の除去を主目 的に行うが、その後の乾燥工程を考慮して、有機溶剤で行っても構わない。水洗に 際しては、 50°C以下で行われることが好ましい。更には、 30°C以下で行うことが好ま L ヽ。 50°C以上で実施すると粒径サイズ及びサイズ分布を本発明の範囲に調整する ことが困難になる。また、乾燥については、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩の相転移温度以 下で行うことが好ましい。更には、 50°C以下で行うことが好ましく極力低温で行うこと が好まし!/ヽ。相転移温度以上での乾燥では粒径サイズ及びサイズ分布を本発明の 範囲に調整することが困難になる。 [0037] In the present invention, the prepared aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt is preferably washed with water and then dried from the viewpoint of storage stability. Washing with water is performed mainly to remove unreacted ions, but may be performed with an organic solvent in consideration of the subsequent drying step. The washing with water is preferably performed at 50 ° C or lower. Furthermore, it is preferable to carry out at 30 ° C or less. If it is carried out at 50 ° C. or higher, it is difficult to adjust the particle size and size distribution within the scope of the present invention. The drying is preferably performed at a temperature lower than the phase transition temperature of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt. Furthermore, it is preferable to carry out at 50 ° C or less, and it is preferred to carry out at a low temperature as much as possible! For drying above the phase transition temperature, the particle size and size distribution are It becomes difficult to adjust to the range.
[0038] 本発明にお 、て、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩の調製は感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の非 存在下で行われることが好ましい。感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀存在下での調製では、カプリ 性能との両立から、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子のサイズ及びサイズ分布を本発明の 範囲に調整することが困難になる。  [0038] In the present invention, the preparation of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt is preferably carried out in the absence of photosensitive halogenated silver particles. In the preparation in the presence of photosensitive silver halide silver, it is difficult to adjust the size and size distribution of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles within the scope of the present invention because of the compatibility with the capri performance.
[0039] 本発明の脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩は所望の量で使用できるが、ハロゲンィ匕銀を含め た合計銀量は熱現像感光材料の塗布量として 0. 8〜1. 5g/m2が好ましぐ更には 1. 0〜1. 3g/m2の範囲であることが好ましい。 [0039] The aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt of the present invention can be used in a desired amount, but the total silver amount including the halogenated silver is 0.8 to 1.5 g / m 2 as the coating amount of the photothermographic material. Further preferably, it is preferably in the range of 1.0 to 1.3 g / m 2 .
[0040] (アルカリ金属塩の種類)  [0040] (Type of alkali metal salt)
本発明で使用できるアルカリ金属塩の種類の例としては水酸ィ匕ナトリウム、水酸ィ匕 カリウム、水酸化リチウムなどがある。これらのうちの 1種類のアルカリ金属塩、例えば 、水酸ィ匕カリウムを用いることが好ましいが、水酸化ナトリウムと水酸化カリウムを併用 することも好ましい。併用比率としては前記の水酸ィ匕塩の両者のモル比が 10 : 90〜7 5: 25の範囲であることが好ま 、。脂肪族カルボン酸と反応して脂肪族カルボン酸 のアルカリ金属塩となったときに上記の範囲で使用することで、反応液の粘度を良好 な状態に制御できる。  Examples of the types of alkali metal salts that can be used in the present invention include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, and lithium hydroxide. Of these, it is preferable to use one kind of alkali metal salt such as potassium hydroxide, but it is also preferable to use sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide in combination. As a combination ratio, it is preferable that the molar ratio of the above-mentioned hydroxide salt is in the range of 10:90 to 75:25. When used in the above range when reacted with an aliphatic carboxylic acid to form an alkali metal salt of an aliphatic carboxylic acid, the viscosity of the reaction solution can be controlled in a good state.
[0041] (高銀化率銀塩粒子)  [0041] (High silveration rate silver salt particles)
本発明に係る脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子を含有する乳剤は、銀塩を形成して 、な V、遊離脂肪族カルボン酸と脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩の混合物であるが、前者の比率 が後者に対して低いことが、画像保存性等の観点から、好ましい。すなわち、本発明 に係る当該乳剤は脂肪族カルボン酸を該脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子に対して 3〜1 Omol%含有することが好ましい。特に好ましくは、 4〜8mol%含有することである。 なお、具体的には、下記の方法にて、全脂肪族カルボン酸量、遊離脂肪族カルボン 酸量をそれぞれ求めることにより、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩と遊離脂肪族カルボン酸量 及びそれぞれの比率又は全脂肪族カルボン酸に対する遊離脂肪酸の比率等を計算 することとする。  The emulsion containing the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt grains according to the present invention is a mixture of free aliphatic carboxylic acid and aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt that forms a silver salt, but the former ratio is the latter. Is low from the viewpoint of image storage stability and the like. That is, the emulsion according to the present invention preferably contains an aliphatic carboxylic acid in an amount of 3 to 1 Omol% with respect to the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt grains. The content is particularly preferably 4 to 8 mol%. Specifically, by determining the total aliphatic carboxylic acid amount and the free aliphatic carboxylic acid amount by the following methods, respectively, the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt and the free aliphatic carboxylic acid amount and the respective ratios or The ratio of free fatty acids to total aliphatic carboxylic acids will be calculated.
[0042] (全脂肪族カルボン酸量 (上記の脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩と遊離酸の両方に由来す るものの総計)の定量) (1)試料約 10mg (感光材料力も剥離するときは剥離した質量)を正確に秤量し、 20 Omlナス型フラスコに入れる。 [0042] (Quantification of total aliphatic carboxylic acid content (total of those derived from both the above aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salts and free acids)) (1) About 10 mg of sample (the mass removed when the photosensitive material strength is also peeled off) is accurately weighed and placed in a 20 Oml eggplant type flask.
(2)メタノール 15mlと 4molZL塩酸 3mlを加え、 1分間超音波分散する。  (2) Add 15 ml of methanol and 3 ml of 4 mol ZL hydrochloric acid and ultrasonically disperse for 1 minute.
(3)テフロン (登録商標)製沸石を入れ、 60分間リフラックスする。  (3) Add Teflon (registered trademark) zeolite and reflux for 60 minutes.
(4)冷却後、冷却管の上力もメタノール 5mlを加え、冷却管に付着したものをナス型 フラスコに洗 、入れる(2回)。  (4) After cooling, add 5 ml of methanol as the upper force of the cooling tube, and wash and put the material adhering to the cooling tube into the eggplant type flask (twice).
(5)得られた反応液を酢酸ェチルで抽出する(酢酸ェチル 100ml、水 70mlをカ卩えて 分液抽出を 2回行う)。  (5) Extract the resulting reaction solution with ethyl acetate (100 ml of ethyl acetate and 70 ml of water are added to perform separation and extraction twice).
(6)常温で 30分間真空乾燥する。  (6) Vacuum dry at room temperature for 30 minutes.
(7) 10mlメスフラスコに内部標準としてべンズアントロン溶液を lml入れる(ベンズァ ントロン約 lOOmgをトルエンに溶解し、トルエンで 100mlに定容する)。(8)試料をト ルェンに溶かして(7)のメスフラスコに入れ、トルエンで定容する。  (7) Into a 10 ml volumetric flask, add 1 ml of Benth Anthrone solution as an internal standard (dissolve about 1OO mg of Benzanthrone in toluene and make up to 100 ml with toluene). (8) Dissolve the sample in toluene and put it into the volumetric flask of (7).
(9)下記測定条件にてガス'クロマトグラフィー(GC)測定を行う。  (9) Perform gas' chromatography (GC) measurement under the following measurement conditions.
装置: HP— 5890+HP—ケミステーション  Equipment: HP—5890 + HP—Chem Station
カラム: HP— 1 30m X O. 32mm Χ Ο. 25 ^ πι (ΗΡ¾)  Column: HP— 1 30m X O. 32mm Χ Ο. 25 ^ πι (ΗΡ¾)
注入口: 250°C  Inlet: 250 ° C
検出器: 280°C  Detector: 280 ° C
オーブン: 250°C—定  Oven: 250 ° C—constant
キャリアガス: He  Carrier gas: He
ヘッド圧: 80kPa  Head pressure: 80kPa
(遊離脂肪族カルボン酸量の定量)  (Quantification of free aliphatic carboxylic acid content)
(1)試料約 20mgを正確に秤量し、 200mlナス型フラスコに入れ、メタノール 10mlを 加えて 25°Cにて 1分間超音波分散を行う(遊離有機カルボン酸が抽出される)。 (1) Weigh accurately about 20 mg of sample, place in a 200 ml eggplant-shaped flask, add 10 ml of methanol, and perform ultrasonic dispersion for 1 minute at 25 ° C (free organic carboxylic acid is extracted).
(2)それをろ過して、ろ液を 200π ナス型フラスコに入れ、乾固する(遊離有機カル ボン酸が分離される)。 (2) Filter it and put the filtrate in a 200π eggplant type flask to dryness (free organic carboxylic acid is separated).
(3)メタノール 15mlと 4molZL塩酸 3mlを加え、 1分間超音波分散を行う。(4)テフ ロン (登録商標)製沸騰石を入れ、 60分間リフラックスする。  (3) Add 15 ml of methanol and 3 ml of 4 mol ZL hydrochloric acid and perform ultrasonic dispersion for 1 minute. (4) Put a Teflon (registered trademark) boiling stone and reflux for 60 minutes.
(5)得られた反応液に水 60ml、酢酸ェチル 60mlをカ卩えて、有機カルボン酸のメチ ルエステルイ匕物を酢酸ェチル相に抽出する。酢酸ェチル抽出は 2回行う。 (5) Add 60 ml of water and 60 ml of ethyl acetate to the resulting reaction solution, Extract the ester cake into the ethyl acetate phase. Extract ethyl acetate twice.
(6)酢酸ェチル相を乾固し、 30分間真空乾燥する。  (6) The ethyl acetate phase is dried and vacuum dried for 30 minutes.
(7) 10mlのメスフラスコにベンズアントロン溶液(内部標準:約 lOOmgのべンズアント ロンをトルエンに溶かし、 100mlに定容したもの) 1mlを入れる。  (7) Add 1 ml of benzanthrone solution (internal standard: approx. LOOmg of benzanthrone dissolved in toluene to a constant volume of 100 ml) in a 10 ml volumetric flask.
(8) (6)をトルエンで溶かして、(7)のメスフラスコに入れ、トルエンで定容する。  (8) Dissolve (6) with toluene, put into the volumetric flask of (7), and make a constant volume with toluene.
(9)下記測定条件にて GC測定を行う。  (9) Perform GC measurement under the following measurement conditions.
[0044] 装置: HP— 5890+HP—ケミステーション [0044] Equipment: HP—5890 + HP—Chem Station
カラム: HP— 1 30m X O. 32mm Χ Ο. 25 ^ πι (ΗΡ¾)  Column: HP— 1 30m X O. 32mm Χ Ο. 25 ^ πι (ΗΡ¾)
注入口: 250°C  Inlet: 250 ° C
検出器: 280°C  Detector: 280 ° C
オーブン: 250°C—定  Oven: 250 ° C—constant
キャリアガス: He  Carrier gas: He
ヘッド圧: 80kPa  Head pressure: 80kPa
(脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩の構造と形状)  (Structure and shape of aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt)
本発明に用いることができる脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩の形状としては、特に制限はな ぐ針状、棒状、平板状、りん片状いずれでもよい。本発明においては、りん片状の脂 肪族カルボン酸銀塩及び長軸と短軸の長さの比が 5以下の短針状又は直方体状の 脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩が好ましく用いられる。  The shape of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt that can be used in the present invention is not particularly limited and may be any shape such as a needle shape, a rod shape, a flat plate shape, and a flake shape. In the present invention, flake-shaped aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salts and short needle-shaped or rectangular parallelepiped-shaped carboxylic acid silver salts having a major axis / minor axis length ratio of 5 or less are preferably used.
[0045] なお、本明細書において、りん片状の脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩とは、次のようにして 定義する。脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩を電子顕微鏡で観察し、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩 粒子の形状を直方体と近似し、この直方体の辺を一番短かい方から a、 b、 cとした (c は bと同じであってもよい。)とき、短い方の数値 a、 bで計算し、次のようにして Xを求め る。 In the present specification, the flaky aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt is defined as follows. Observe the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt with an electron microscope, approximate the shape of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particle to a rectangular parallelepiped, and define the sides of the rectangular parallelepiped as a, b, c (c is b ) When calculating with the shorter numbers a and b, calculate X as follows.
[0046] x=b/a  [0046] x = b / a
このようにして 200個程度の粒子にっ 、て Xを求め、その平均値 X (平均)としたとき 、 x(平均)≥1. 5の関係を満たすものをりん片状とする。好ましくは 30≥x (平均)≥1 . 5、より好ましくは 20≥x (平均)≥2. 0である。因みに針状とは l≤x (平均)く 1. 5 である。 [0047] りん片状粒子において、 aは bと cを辺とする面を主平面とした平板状粒子の厚さと みること力できる。 aの平均は 0. 01 μ m以上、 0. 23 μ 111カ 子ましく、 0. 1 m以上、 0. 20 m以下がより好ましい。 cZbの平均は好ましくは 1以上、 6以下、より好ましく は 1. 05以上、 4以下、更に好ましくは 1. 1以上、 3以下、特に好ましくは 1. 1以上、 2 以下である。 In this way, X is obtained from about 200 particles, and when the average value X (average) is obtained, particles satisfying the relationship of x (average) ≥1.5 are defined as flakes. Preferably 30≥x (average) ≥1.5, more preferably 20≥x (average) ≥2.0. Incidentally, an acicular shape is l≤x (average) less than 1.5. [0047] In the flake shaped particle, a can be regarded as the thickness of a tabular particle having a main plane with b and c as sides. The average of a is 0.01 μm or more, 0.23 μ111 or more, more preferably 0.1 m or more and 0.20 m or less. The average of cZb is preferably 1 or more and 6 or less, more preferably 1.05 or more and 4 or less, further preferably 1.1 or more and 3 or less, and particularly preferably 1.1 or more and 2 or less.
[0048] 本発明に係る脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩は、欧州特許 1168069A1号及び特開 2002 — 23303号に開示されているようなコア Zシェル構造を有する結晶粒子であってもよ い。なお、コア Zシェル構造にする場合には、コア部またはシェル部のいずれかの全 部または一部を脂肪族カルボン酸銀以外の有機銀塩、例えば、フタル酸、ベンゾイミ ダゾールなどの有機化合物の銀塩を当該結晶粒子の構成成分として使用してもよい  [0048] The aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt according to the present invention may be a crystal particle having a core Z shell structure as disclosed in European Patent 1168069A1 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-23303. In the case of the core Z shell structure, all or part of either the core part or the shell part is made of an organic silver salt other than silver aliphatic carboxylate, for example, an organic compound such as phthalic acid or benzimidazole. Silver salt may be used as a constituent of the crystal grains.
[0049] 本発明にお 、て、平板状の脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子は、必要に応じバインダー や界面活性剤などと共に予備分散した後、メディア分散機または高圧ホモジナイザ などで分散粉砕することが好ましい。上記予備分散方法としては、例えば、アンカー 型、プロペラ型等の一般的撹拌機や高速回転遠心放射型撹拌機 (ディゾルバ)、高 速回転剪断型撹拌機 (ホモミキサ)を使用することができる。 [0049] In the present invention, the tabular aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles may be preliminarily dispersed together with a binder, a surfactant or the like, if necessary, and then dispersed and pulverized with a media disperser or a high-pressure homogenizer. preferable. As the preliminary dispersion method, for example, a general stirrer such as an anchor type or a propeller type, a high-speed rotating centrifugal radiation type stirrer (dissolver), or a high-speed rotating shear type stirrer (homomixer) can be used.
[0050] また、上記メディア分散機としては、例えば、ボールミル、遊星ボールミル、振動ボ ールミルなどの転動ミルや、媒体撹拌ミルであるビーズミル、アトライター、その他バス ケットミルなどを用いることが可能であり、高圧ホモジナイザとしては壁、プラグなどに 衝突するタイプ、液を複数に分けてカゝら高速で液同士を衝突させるタイプ、細いオリ フィスを通過させるタイプなど様々なタイプを用いることができる。  [0050] Further, as the media disperser, for example, a rolling mill such as a ball mill, a planetary ball mill, and a vibration ball mill, a bead mill that is a medium agitation mill, an attritor, and other basket mills can be used. Various types of high-pressure homogenizers can be used, such as a type that collides with walls, plugs, etc., a type that divides the liquid into multiple parts that collide with each other at high speed, and a type that passes a thin orifice.
[0051] メディア分散時に使用されるセラミックスビーズに用いられるセラミックスとしては、分 散時におけるビーズや分散機との摩擦による不純物生成が少ない等の理由から、ィ ットリウム安定化ジルコユア、ジルコユア強化アルミナ(これらジルコユアを含有するセ ラミックスを以下においてジルコユアと略す)が特に好ましく用いられる。  [0051] Ceramics used for the ceramic beads used when dispersing the media include yttrium-stabilized zircoure and zircoua reinforced alumina (these are because of the low generation of impurities due to friction with the beads and the disperser during dispersion). A ceramic containing zircoure is hereinafter preferably abbreviated as zircoyu).
[0052] 本発明に係る平板状脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子を分散する際に用いられる装置 類において、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子が接触する部材の材質として、例えば、ジ ルコユア、アルミナ、窒化珪素、窒化ホウ素などのセラミックス類またはダイヤモンドを 用いることが好ましぐ中でもジルコユアを用いることが好ましい。上記分散を行う際、 バインダー濃度は脂肪族カルボン酸銀質量の 0. 1〜10%添加することが好ましぐ 予備分散力も本分散を通して液温が 45°Cを上回らないことが好ましい。また、本分散 の好ましい運転条件としては、例えば、高圧ホモジナイザを分散手段として用いる場 合には、 29〜: LOOMPa、運転回数は 2回以上が運転条件として好ましい。又、メディ ァ分散機を分散手段として用いる場合には、周速が 6〜13mZ秒が好ましい条件と して挙げられる。 [0052] In the apparatus used for dispersing the tabular aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles according to the present invention, as a material of the member in contact with the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles, for example, zirconium, alumina, nitriding Ceramics such as silicon and boron nitride or diamond Among them, it is preferable to use zircoyu. When the above dispersion is performed, it is preferable to add a binder concentration of 0.1 to 10% of the weight of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver. It is preferable that the liquid temperature does not exceed 45 ° C throughout the dispersion. Further, as preferable operating conditions for this dispersion, for example, when a high-pressure homogenizer is used as the dispersing means, 29 to: LOOMPa, the number of operations is preferably 2 times or more. In the case where a media disperser is used as a dispersing means, the peripheral speed is preferably 6 to 13 mZ seconds.
[0053] 本発明では、非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子が、結晶成長抑制剤又は分散 剤として機能する化合物の存在下で形成されたものであることが好ましい。また、結 晶成長抑制剤又は分散剤として機能する化合物が、ヒドロキシル基又はカルボキシ ル基を有する有機化合物であることが好まし 、。  [0053] In the present invention, it is preferable that the non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles are formed in the presence of a compound that functions as a crystal growth inhibitor or a dispersant. In addition, the compound that functions as a crystal growth inhibitor or dispersant is preferably an organic compound having a hydroxyl group or a carboxyl group.
[0054] 本発明にお 、て、脂肪族カルボン酸銀粒子に対する結晶成長抑制剤な 、し分散 剤として機能する化合物とは、脂肪族カルボン酸銀粒子の製造工程において、当該 化合物を共存させた条件下で脂肪族カルボン酸銀を製造したときに、共存させな!/、 条件下で製造したときより小粒径ィヒゃ単分散化する機能、効果を有する化合物を ヽ う。具体例として、炭素数が 10以下の一価アルコール類、好ましくは第 2級アルコー ル、第 3級アルコール、エチレングリコール、プロピレングリコールなどのグリコール類 、ポリエチレングリコールなどポリエーテル類、グリセリンが挙げられる。好ましい添カロ 量としては、脂肪族カルボン酸銀に対して 10〜200質量%である。  In the present invention, the compound functioning as a dispersant and not a crystal growth inhibitor for aliphatic silver carboxylate particles coexists with the compound in the production process of aliphatic silver carboxylate particles. When an aliphatic silver carboxylate is produced under the conditions, a compound having a function and an effect of monodispersing with a smaller particle size than that produced under the conditions is described. Specific examples include monohydric alcohols having 10 or less carbon atoms, preferably secondary alcohols, tertiary alcohols, glycols such as ethylene glycol and propylene glycol, polyethers such as polyethylene glycol, and glycerin. The preferred amount of added calories is 10 to 200% by mass with respect to the silver aliphatic carboxylate.
[0055] 一方で、イソヘプタン酸、イソデカン酸、イソトリデカン酸、イソミリスチン酸、イソパル ミチン酸、イソステアリン酸、ィソアラキジン酸、イソべヘン酸、イソへキサコ酸など、そ れぞれ異性体を含む分岐脂肪族カルボン酸も好ましい。この場合、好ましい側鎖とし て、炭素数 4以下のアルキル基又はァルケ-ル基が挙げられる。また、パルミトレイン 酸、ォレイン酸、リノール酸、リノレン酸、モロクチン酸、エイコセン酸、ァラキドン酸、 エイコサペンタエン酸、エノレカ酸、ドコサペンタエン酸— ドコサへキサェン酸、セラコレ ン酸などの脂肪族不飽和カルボン酸が挙げられる。好ましい添加量は、脂肪族カル ボン酸銀の 0. 5〜: LOmol%である。  [0055] On the other hand, branched fat containing isomers such as isoheptanoic acid, isodecanoic acid, isotridecanoic acid, isomyristic acid, isopalmitic acid, isostearic acid, isoarachidic acid, isobehenic acid, isohexaconic acid, etc. Group carboxylic acids are also preferred. In this case, preferred side chains include an alkyl group or a alkenyl group having 4 or less carbon atoms. In addition, aliphatic unsaturated carboxylic acids such as palmitoleic acid, oleic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, moloctic acid, eicosenoic acid, arachidonic acid, eicosapentaenoic acid, enolekaic acid, docosapentaenoic acid-docosahexaenoic acid, and ceracolonic acid Examples include acids. A preferable addition amount is 0.5 to: LOmol% of silver aliphatic carbonate.
[0056] ダルコシド、ガラクトシド、フルクトシドなどの配糖体類、トレハロース、スクロースなど トレハロース型ニ糖類、グリコーゲン、デキストリン、デキストラン、アルギン酸など多糖 類、メチルセ口ソルブ、ェチルセ口ソルブなどのセロソルブ類、ソルビタン、ソルビット、 酢酸ェチル、酢酸メチル、ジメチルホルムアミドなど水溶性有機溶媒、ポリビニルアル コール、ポリアクリル酸、アクリル酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、カルボキシメチ ノレセノレロース、ヒドロキシプロピノレセノレロース、ヒドロキシプロピノレメチノレセノレロース、 ポリビュルピロリドン、ゼラチンなどの水溶性ポリマー類も好まし 、ィ匕合物として挙げら れる。好ましい添加量としては脂肪族カルボン酸銀に対して 0. 1〜20質量%である [0056] Glycosides such as dalcoside, galactoside, fructoside, trehalose, sucrose, etc. Trehalose-type disaccharides, polysaccharides such as glycogen, dextrin, dextran, alginic acid, cellosolves such as methyl ceguchi sorb, ethyl ceguchi sorb, water-soluble organic solvents such as sorbitan, sorbit, ethyl acetate, methyl acetate, dimethylformamide, polyvinyl alcohol, Also preferred are water-soluble polymers such as polyacrylic acid, acrylic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, carboxymethylenosenorose, hydroxypropenoresenorerose, hydroxypropinoremethenoresenorelose, polybylpyrrolidone, and gelatin. Listed as a compound. A preferable addition amount is 0.1 to 20% by mass with respect to the silver aliphatic carboxylate.
[0057] 炭素数が 10以下のアルコール、好ましくは、イソプロピルアルコールなどの第二級 アルコール、 t ブチルアルコールなどの第三級アルコールは、粒子製造工程での 脂肪族カルボン酸アルカリ金属塩の溶解度を上げることにより減粘し、撹拌効率を上 げることで単分散で、かつ小粒径ィ匕する。分岐脂肪族カルボン酸及び脂肪族不飽和 カルボン酸は、脂肪族カルボン酸銀が結晶化する際にメイン成分である直鎖脂肪族 カルボン酸銀よりも立体障害性が高ぐ結晶格子の乱れが大きくなるため大きな結晶 は生成せず、結果的に小粒径ィ匕する。 [0057] Alcohols having 10 or less carbon atoms, preferably secondary alcohols such as isopropyl alcohol, and tertiary alcohols such as t-butyl alcohol increase the solubility of the aliphatic carboxylic acid alkali metal salt in the particle production process. By reducing the viscosity, the dispersion is monodispersed and has a small particle size by increasing the stirring efficiency. Branched aliphatic carboxylic acids and aliphatic unsaturated carboxylic acids have higher steric hindrance than the straight chain aliphatic carboxylic acid silver, which is the main component, when the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver is crystallized, and the disorder of the crystal lattice is larger. As a result, large crystals are not formed, resulting in a small particle size.
[0058] (還元剤)  [0058] (Reducing agent)
本発明においては、銀イオンの還元剤として、前記一般式(1)で表される化合物を 単独又は他の異なる化学構造を有する還元剤と併せて用いることが好まし 、。ここで 併用する還元剤にっ 、てもビスフエノール型の還元剤であることが好まし ヽ。一般式 (1)で表される化合物と併用できる還元剤は、例えば特開平 11— 65021号の段落 番号「0043」〜「0045」、欧州特許公開(EP0803764A1号)の 7頁 34行〜 18頁 1 2行、特開 2003— 302723号の段落番号「0124」〜「0133」、特開 2003— 31595 4号の段落番号「0124」〜「0127」、特開 2004— 4650号の段落番号「0042」〜「0 057」に記載されている。一般式(1)で表される化合物は有機酸銀塩を含有する画 像形成層に含有させることが好ま ヽが、隣接する非画像形成層に含有させてもよ!ヽ  In the present invention, it is preferable to use the compound represented by the general formula (1) alone or in combination with another reducing agent having a different chemical structure as a silver ion reducing agent. The reducing agent used here is preferably a bisphenol type reducing agent. Examples of reducing agents that can be used in combination with the compound represented by the general formula (1) include paragraph numbers “0043” to “0045” of JP-A-11-65021, page 7 line 34 to page 18 of European Patent Publication (EP0803764A1). 1 line 2, paragraph numbers “0124” to “0133” of JP-A-2003-302723, paragraph numbers “0124” to “0127” of JP-A-2003-31595 4, paragraph number “0042” of JP-A-2004-4650 ”To“ 0 057 ”. The compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably contained in an image forming layer containing an organic acid silver salt, but may be contained in an adjacent non-image forming layer!
[0059] 前記一般式(1)において、 Rは水素原子又は置換基を表す。置換基としては、ァ [0059] In the general formula (1), R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. As a substituent,
1  1
ルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキ-ル基、ァリール基、複素環基、 ノ、ロゲン原子、シァノ基等が挙げられる。好ましくは、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロ アルキル基又はァルケ-ル基であり、更に好ましくは、水素原子又はアルキル基であ る。これらの置換基は、更に置換基を有してもよぐ該置換基としては、アルキル基、 シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン化アルキル基、ァルケ-ル基、アルキ-ル基、ァリール基 、複素環基、ハロゲン原子、シァノ基、ヒドロキシル基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシ基 、ァリールォキシ基、シリルォキシ基、複素環ォキシ基、ァシルォキシ基、力ルバモイ ルォキシ基、アルコキシカルボ-ルォキシ基、ァリールォキシカルボ-ルォキシ基、 アミノ基、ァ-リノ基、ァシルァミノ基、ァミノカルボ-ルァミノ基、アルコキシカルボ- ルァミノ基、ァリールォキシカルボ-ルァミノ基、スルファモイルァミノ基、アルキル及 びァリールスルホ -ルァミノ基、メルカプト基、アルキルチオ基、ァリールチオ基、へテ 口環チォ基、スルファモイル基、スルホ基、アルキル及びァリールスルフィエル基、ァ ルキル及びァリールスルホ-ル基、ァシル基、ァリールォキシカルボ-ル基、アルコ キシカルボニル基、力ルバモイル基、ァリール及び複素環ァゾ基、イミド基、シリル基 、ヒドラジノ基、ウレイド基、ボロン酸基、ホスファト基、スルファト基、その他の公知の 置換基が挙げられる。 Alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, alkenyl group, alkyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, Group, a rogen atom, a cyan group and the like. A hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a alkenyl group is preferable, and a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group is more preferable. These substituents may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, an alkyl group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group. A halogen atom, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a silyloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an acyloxy group, a rubamoyloxy group, an alkoxycarboxoxy group, an aryloxycarboxoxy group, Amino group, amino group, acylamino group, aminocarbolumino group, alkoxycarbolumino group, aryloxycarbolumino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkyl and arylsulfo-lumino group, mercapto group, alkylthio Group, arylthio group, heterocyclic group, sulfamoyl group, sulfo group, alkyl group And aryl sulfier groups, alkyl and aryl sulfonyl groups, acyl groups, aryl carbonyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, strong rubamoyl groups, aryl and heterocyclic azo groups, imide groups, silyl groups, Examples thereof include hydrazino group, ureido group, boronic acid group, phosphato group, sulfato group, and other known substituents.
R2及び R3は各々、炭素原子数が 3〜8の分岐アルキル基を表す。分岐アルキル基 としては、 t—ブチル基、 t—アミル基、 i—プロピル基、 i—ブチル基、 i—プロピル基、 1, 1ージメチルブチル基、 1ーメチルシクロペンチル基、 1ーメチルシクロブチル基、 1ーメチルシクロプロピル基、 1 メチルブチル基、 1, 3 ジメチルブチル基、 1ーメチ ルプロピル基、 1, 1, 2—トリメチルプロピル基、 1—ェチル—1—メチルプロピル基等 が挙げられる。好ましくは t—ブチル基、 1, 1ージメチルブチル基又は tーァミル基で あり、更に好ましくは tーァミル基である。これらの分岐アルキル基は更に置換基を有 してもよく、該置換基としては、ヒドロキシル基、シァノ基、メルカプト基、ハロゲン原子 、アミノ基、イミド基、シリル基、ヒドラジノ基等が挙げられる。  R2 and R3 each represent a branched alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms. Examples of branched alkyl groups include t-butyl, t-amyl, i-propyl, i-butyl, i-propyl, 1,1-dimethylbutyl, 1-methylcyclopentyl, 1-methylcyclobutyl, Examples include 1-methylcyclopropyl group, 1methylbutyl group, 1,3 dimethylbutyl group, 1-methylpropyl group, 1,1,2-trimethylpropyl group, 1-ethyl-1-methylpropyl group, and the like. A t-butyl group, a 1,1-dimethylbutyl group or a tamyl group is preferable, and a tamyl group is more preferable. These branched alkyl groups may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, a mercapto group, a halogen atom, an amino group, an imide group, a silyl group, and a hydrazino group.
A及び Aは各々ヒドロキシル基又は脱保護されることによりヒドロキシル基を形成し A and A are each a hydroxyl group or deprotected to form a hydroxyl group.
1 2 1 2
得る基を表し、好ましくはヒドロキシル基である。脱保護されてヒドロキシル基を形成し うる基とは、酸及び Z又は熱の作用により脱保護してヒドロキシル基を形成する基が 挙げられる。具体的には、エーテル基 (メトキシ、 t—ブトキシ、ァリルォキシ、ベンジル ォキシ、トリフエ-ルメトキシ、トリメチルシリルォキシ等)、へミアセタール基 (テトラヒド ロビラ-ルォキシ等)、エステル基(ァセチルォキシ、ベンゾィルォキシ、 p -トロべ ンゾィルォキシ、ホルミルォキシ、トリフルォロアセチルォキシ、ビバロイルォキシ等)、 カルボナート基(エトキシカルボニルォキシ、フエノキシカルボニルォキシ、 t ブチル ォキシカルボ-ルォキシ等)、スルホナート基(p—トルエンスルホ -ルォキシ、ベンゼ ンスルホ-ルォキシ等)、力ルバモイルォキシ基(フエ-ルカルバモイルォキシ等)、 チォカルボ-ルォキシ基(ベンジルチオカルボ-ルォキシ等)、硝酸エステル基、ス ルフエナート基(2, 4 ジニトロベンゼンスルフエ-ルォキシ等)が挙げられる。 n及び mは各々 3〜5の整数を表す力 好ましくは 3又は 4であり、更に好ましくは 3である。 Represents a group to be obtained, preferably a hydroxyl group. Examples of the group that can be deprotected to form a hydroxyl group include groups that can be deprotected by the action of acid and Z or heat to form a hydroxyl group. Specifically, ether groups (methoxy, t-butoxy, aryloxy, benzyl Oxy, triphenyl methoxy, trimethylsilyloxy, etc.), hemiacetal group (tetrahydroloxy, etc.), ester group (acetyloxy, benzoyloxy, p-trobenzoyloxy, formyloxy, trifluoroacetyloxy, bivaluloyloxy, etc.), carbonate Groups (such as ethoxycarbonyloxy, phenoxycarbonyloxy, t-butyloxycarboxyloxy, etc.), sulfonate groups (such as p-toluenesulfo-loxy, benzensulfo-loxy, etc.), strong rubamoyloxy groups (such as phenylcarbamoyloxy) Thiocarboxoxy group (benzylthiocarboxoxy etc.), nitrate ester group, sulphateate group (2,4 dinitrobenzene sulphooxy etc.). n and m are each a force representing an integer of 3 to 5, preferably 3 or 4, and more preferably 3.
[0061] 上記に例示した置換基 R、 R、 R、 A及び Aの構造は、ビスフエノール型還元剤 [0061] The structure of the substituents R, R, R, A and A exemplified above is a bisphenol type reducing agent.
1 2 3 1 2  1 2 3 1 2
の熱的物性ならびに結晶性を決定する因子の一つであり、熱現像感光材料における 還元剤の融点、熱分解温度、結晶性が写真性能に大きく相関する。  This is one of the factors that determine the thermal properties and crystallinity of the photothermographic material. The melting point, thermal decomposition temperature, and crystallinity of the reducing agent in the photothermographic material greatly correlate with photographic performance.
[0062] 本発明に係る熱現像感光材料に用いる場合、融点は 80〜250°C、熱分解温度は 200°C以上であることが好ましい。現像処理後に感材中に還元剤が残留する熱現像 感光材料は、結晶性の高い還元剤の方が保存時の物質拡散が抑制されるため、画 像保存時の還元反応によるカプリ部分の濃度変動が小さくなることから、還元剤の結 晶性は高 、方がより好ま 、。  [0062] When used in the photothermographic material according to the invention, the melting point is preferably 80 to 250 ° C and the thermal decomposition temperature is preferably 200 ° C or higher. Thermal development in which a reducing agent remains in the photosensitive material after development processing For photosensitive materials, the reducing agent with higher crystallinity suppresses material diffusion during storage, so the concentration of the capri portion due to the reduction reaction during image storage Since the fluctuation is small, the crystallinity of the reducing agent is high, which is better.
[0063] 以下に、一般式(1)で表される還元剤の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定さ れない。  [0063] Specific examples of the reducing agent represented by the general formula (1) are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
[0064] [化 2] [0064] [Chemical 2]
[ε^] [S900] [ε ^] [S900]
Figure imgf000018_0001
Figure imgf000018_0001
LY LY
Figure imgf000019_0001
Figure imgf000019_0001
[0066] [化 4] [S^ ] 900] [0066] [Chemical 4] [S ^] 900]
Figure imgf000020_0001
[9^ ] [8900]
Figure imgf000020_0001
[9 ^] [8900]
Figure imgf000021_0001
[6900]
Figure imgf000021_0001
[6900]
Figure imgf000022_0001
OAV
Figure imgf000022_0001
OAV
Figure imgf000023_0001
Figure imgf000023_0001
§皇0 [6^ ] [ΐΖΟΟ] § Emperor 0 [6 ^] [ΐΖΟΟ]
Figure imgf000024_0001
Figure imgf000024_0001
Figure imgf000025_0001
Figure imgf000025_0001
[0072] [化 10] [π¾] [ε οο] [0072] [Chemical 10] [π¾] [ε οο]
Figure imgf000026_0001
Figure imgf000026_0001
Figure imgf000027_0001
Figure imgf000027_0001
[0074] [化 12] [0074] [Chemical 12]
Figure imgf000028_0001
Figure imgf000028_0001
[0075] [化 13] [0075] [Chemical 13]
Figure imgf000029_0001
Figure imgf000029_0001
Figure imgf000029_0002
Figure imgf000029_0002
[0076] 上記還元剤は、溶液形態、乳化分散形態、固体微粒子分散物形態など、如何なる 方法で塗布液に含有せしめ、熱現像感光材料に含有させても ヽ。 [0076] The reducing agent may be contained in the coating solution by any method such as a solution form, an emulsified dispersion form, or a solid fine particle dispersion form, and may be contained in the photothermographic material.
[0077] 本発明では、更に米国特許 3, 589, 903号、同 4, 021, 249号、英国特許 1, 48 6, 148号及び特開昭 51— 51933号、同 50— 36110号、同 50— 116023号、同 5 2— 84727号もしくは特公昭 51— 35727号に記載されたポリフエノールイ匕合物、例 えば 2, 2' —ジヒドロキシー 1, / ービナフチノレ、 6, 6' —ジブ口モー 2, 2' —ジヒ ドロキシー 1, 1' ービナフチル等の米国特許 3, 672, 904号に記載されたビスナフ トール類、更に、例えば 4 ベンゼンスルホンアミドフエノール、 2 ベンゼンスルホン アミドフエノール、 2, 6 ジクロロー 4 ベンゼンスルホンアミドフエノール、 4一べンゼ ンスルホンアミドナフトール等の米国特許 3, 801, 321号に記載されるようなスルホン アミドフエノール又はスルホンアミドナフトール類も、銀イオン還元剤として用いること ができる。 In the present invention, US Pat. Nos. 3,589,903 and 4,021,249, British Patent 1,486,148 and JP-A-51-51933, 50-36110, Polyphenolic compounds described in 50- 116023, 5 2-84727 or JP-B 51-35727, such as 2, 2'-dihydroxy-1, / binaphthinole, 6, 6'-jib mouth Mo 2, 2 '— Dihydroxy 1, 1' Binaphthyl described in US Pat. No. 3,672,904 such as binaphthyl Tolls, and further described in, for example, US Pat. No. 3,801,321 such as 4-benzenesulfonamidophenol, 2-benzenesulfonamidophenol, 2,6-dichloro-4benzenesulfonamidophenol, 4-benzensulfonamidonaphthol, etc. Such sulfonamide phenols or sulfonamide naphthols can also be used as a silver ion reducing agent.
[0078] 還元剤の使用量は、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩や還元剤の種類、その他の添加剤に よって変化する力 一般的には、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩 1モル当たり 0. 05〜: L0モル 、好ましくは 0. 1〜3モルが適当である。本発明においては、還元剤を塗布直前に感 光性ハロゲン化銀及び脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子及び溶媒から成る感光乳剤溶液 に添加混合し、その、塗布する方が停滞時間による写真性能変動が小さく好ましい 場合がある。  [0078] The amount of reducing agent used varies depending on the type of aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt, reducing agent, and other additives. L0 mol, preferably 0.1 to 3 mol is suitable. In the present invention, a reducing agent is added to and mixed with a photosensitive emulsion solution composed of light-sensitive silver halide and aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt grains and a solvent immediately before coating. Small and preferred.
[0079] (感光性ハロゲン化銀) [0079] (Photosensitive silver halide)
感光性ハロゲン化銀 (ハロゲンィ匕銀とも言う)とは、ハロゲンィ匕銀結晶の固有の性質 として本来的に光吸収し得て、又は人為的に物理化学的な方法により可視光〜赤外 光を吸収し得て、かつ紫外光領域〜赤外光領域の光波長範囲内の何れかの領域の 光を吸収した時に、当該ハロゲン化銀結晶内及び Z又は結晶表面において物理ィ匕 学的変化が起こり得るように処理製造されたハロゲンィ匕銀結晶粒子を言う。  Photosensitive silver halide (also referred to as “halogen-silver”) is intrinsically light-absorbing as a characteristic of halogen-silver crystals, or artificially physicochemically radiates visible to infrared light. When absorbing light in any region within the light wavelength range from the ultraviolet light region to the infrared light region, it can absorb, and there is a physical / physical change in the silver halide crystal and in the Z or crystal surface. It refers to halogen-molybdenum crystal grains that have been processed and produced as possible.
[0080] 本発明に係るハロゲンィ匕銀は、公知の方法を用いてハロゲンィ匕銀粒子乳剤 (ハロ ゲンィ匕銀乳剤とも言う)として調製することができる。即ち、酸性法、中性法、アンモ- ァ法等の何れでもよぐ又、可溶性銀塩と可溶性ハロゲン塩を反応させる方法として は、片側混合法、同時混合法、それらの組合せ等の何れを用いてもよいが、上記方 法の中、でも形成条件をコントロールしつつハロゲンィ匕銀粒子を調製する、所謂コン トロールド .ダブルジェット法が好まし 、。  [0080] The halogenated silver of the present invention can be prepared as a halogenated silver grain emulsion (also called a halogenated silver emulsion) using a known method. That is, any of acid method, neutral method, ammonia method, etc. can be used. As a method of reacting a soluble silver salt and a soluble halogen salt, any one of a one-side mixing method, a simultaneous mixing method, a combination thereof and the like can be used. Of these methods, the so-called controlled double jet method is preferred, in which halogen silver halide grains are prepared while controlling the formation conditions.
[0081] 通常、ハロゲンィ匕銀種粒子は、粒子の核の生成と粒子成長の 2段階に分けられ、 一度にこれらを連続的に行う方法でもよぐ又、核 (種粒子)形成と粒子成長を分離し て行う方法でもよい。粒子形成条件である pAg、 pH等をコントロールして粒子形成を 行うコントロールド.ダブルジェット法が粒子形状やサイズのコントロールが出来るので 好ましい。例えば、核生成と粒子成長を分離して行う方法を行う場合には、先ず銀塩 水溶液とハライド水溶液をゼラチン水溶液中で均一、急速に混合させ、核生成 (核生 成工程)した後、コントロールされた pAg、 pH等の下で銀塩水溶液とハライド水溶液 を供給しつつ粒子成長させる粒子成長工程によりハロゲンィ匕銀粒子を調製する。粒 子形成後、脱塩工程により、不要な塩類等をヌードル法、フロキユレーシヨン法、限外 濾過法、電気透析法等、公知の脱塩法により除くことで所望のハロゲン化銀乳剤を 得ることができる。 [0081] Usually, a silver halide silver seed grain is divided into two stages: grain nucleation and grain growth, and these can be performed continuously at once. Nuclei (seed grain) formation and grain growth are also possible. Alternatively, the method may be performed separately. The controlled double jet method, which controls the particle formation conditions such as pAg and pH, is preferable because the particle shape and size can be controlled. For example, when performing a method in which nucleation and grain growth are performed separately, first, a silver salt Aqueous solution and halide solution are uniformly and rapidly mixed in gelatin solution, and after nucleation (nucleation process), particles are grown while supplying silver salt solution and halide solution under controlled pAg, pH, etc. Halogenated silver particles are prepared by a grain growth process. After the formation of grains, the desired salt halide emulsion can be obtained by removing unnecessary salts, etc. by a known desalting method such as noodle method, fluorination method, ultrafiltration method, electrodialysis method, etc. Obtainable.
[0082] 本発明に係るハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の粒径分布は単分散であることが好ましい。ここで 言う単分散とは、下記式で求められる粒径の変動係数が 30%以下を言う。好ましくは 20 %以下であり、更に好ましくは 15 %以下である。  [0082] The particle size distribution of the halogen silver halide grains according to the present invention is preferably monodisperse. The monodispersion here means that the coefficient of variation of the particle diameter obtained by the following formula is 30% or less. Preferably it is 20% or less, More preferably, it is 15% or less.
[0083] 粒径の変動係数 (%) = (粒径の標準偏差 Z粒径の平均値) X 100  [0083] Coefficient of variation of particle size (%) = (standard deviation of particle size Z average value of particle size) X 100
ノ、ロゲン化銀粒子の形状としては、立方体、八面体、 14面体粒子、平板状粒子、 球状粒子、棒状粒子、ジャガイモ状粒子等を挙げることができるが、これらの中、特に 立方体、八面体、 14面体、平板状ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子が好ましい。  Examples of the shape of silver halide grains include cubes, octahedrons, tetrahedral grains, tabular grains, spherical grains, rod-shaped grains, and potato grains. Among these, cubic, octahedral grains, etc. A tetradecahedral, tabular halogen silver halide grain is preferred.
[0084] 平板状ハロゲン化銀粒子を用いる場合の平均アスペクト比は、好ましくは 1. 5〜10 0、より好ましく ίま 2〜50である。これら【こつ!ヽて ίま、米国特許 5, 264, 337号、同 5, 314, 798号、同 5, 320, 958号に記載されており、容易に目的の平板状粒子を得 ることができる。更に、ハロゲン化銀粒子のコーナーが丸まった粒子も好ましく用いる ことができる。 [0084] When tabular silver halide grains are used, the average aspect ratio is preferably 1.5 to 100, more preferably 2 to 50. These are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,264,337, 5,314,798, and 5,320,958 to easily obtain the desired tabular grains. Can do. Further, grains having rounded corners of silver halide grains can be preferably used.
[0085] ノ、ロゲン化銀粒子外表面の晶癖につ ヽても特に制限はな 、が、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子 表面への増感色素の吸着反応にぉ 、て、晶癖 (面)選択性を有する増感色素を使用 する場合には、その選択性に適応する晶癖を相対的に高い割合で有するハロゲン 化銀粒子を使用することが好ましい。例えば、ミラー指数〔100〕の結晶面に選択的に 吸着する増感色素を使用する場合には、ハロゲン化銀粒子外表面において〔100〕 面の占める割合が高いことが好ましぐこの割合が 50%以上であることが好ましぐ 7 0%以上であることがより好ましぐ 80%以上であることが特に好ましい。なお、ミラー 指数〔100〕面の比率は、増感色素の吸着における〔111〕面と〔100〕面との吸着依 存'性を禾 IJ用した T. Tani, J. ImagingSci. , 29, 165 (1985年)により求めること力 S できる。 [0086] 本発明に用いられるハロゲン化銀粒子は、該粒子形成時に平均分子量 5万以下の 低分子量ゼラチンを用いて調製することが好まし 、が、特にハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の核 形成時に用いることが好ましい。低分子量ゼラチンは平均分子量 5万以下のものが 好ましく、より好ましくは 2, 000〜40, 000であり、特に好ましくは 5, 000〜25, 000 である。ゼラチンの平均分子量はゲル濾過クロマトグラフィーで測定することができる 。低分子量ゼラチンは、通常用いられる平均分子量 10万程度のゼラチン水溶液に ゼラチン分解酵素を加えて酵素分解したり、酸又はアルカリを加えて加熱し加水分解 したり、大気圧下又は加圧下での加熱により熱分解したり、超音波照射して分解した り、それらの方法を併用したりして得ることができる。ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の核形成時の 分散媒の濃度は 5質量%以下が好ましぐ 0. 05〜3. 0質量%の低濃度で行うのが より好まし 、。 [0085] Although there is no particular limitation on the crystal habit of the outer surface of the silver halide grain, the crystal habit (plane) is selected according to the adsorption reaction of the sensitizing dye on the surface of the halogenated silver grain. In the case of using a sensitizing dye having a property, it is preferable to use silver halide grains having a relatively high ratio of crystal habits adapted to the selectivity. For example, when using a sensitizing dye that selectively adsorbs on the crystal face of the Miller index [100], it is preferable that the ratio of the [100] face is high on the outer surface of the silver halide grain. It is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 70% or more, and particularly preferably 80% or more. The ratio of the Miller index [100] plane is based on the adsorption dependency of the [111] plane and the [100] plane in the adsorption of the sensitizing dye. T. Tani, J. ImagingSci., 29, 165 (1985). [0086] The silver halide grains used in the present invention are preferably prepared using a low molecular weight gelatin having an average molecular weight of 50,000 or less at the time of forming the grains, but particularly used at the time of nucleation of the silver halide silver grains. Is preferred. The low molecular weight gelatin preferably has an average molecular weight of 50,000 or less, more preferably 2,000 to 40,000, and particularly preferably 5,000 to 25,000. The average molecular weight of gelatin can be measured by gel filtration chromatography. Low molecular weight gelatin can be hydrolyzed by adding gelatin-degrading enzyme to a commonly used gelatin aqueous solution with an average molecular weight of about 100,000, heating by adding acid or alkali, and heating at atmospheric pressure or under pressure. Can be obtained by thermal decomposition, decomposition by ultrasonic irradiation, or a combination of these methods. The concentration of the dispersion medium at the time of nucleation of the silver halide grains is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 0.05 to 3.0% by mass.
[0087] 本発明に用いられるハロゲンィ匕銀粒子は、粒子形成時に下記の一般式で表される 化合物を用いることが好ま 、。  [0087] The halogen silver halide grains used in the present invention preferably use a compound represented by the following general formula at the time of grain formation.
[0088] YO (CH CH O) (CH (CH ) CH O) (CH CH O) Y [0088] YO (CH CH O) (CH (CH) CH O) (CH CH O) Y
2 2 m 3 2 p 2 2 η  2 2 m 3 2 p 2 2 η
式中、 Υは水素原子、 SO M、または CO— B— COOMを表し、 Mは水素原子  In the formula, Υ represents a hydrogen atom, SO M, or CO—B—COOM, and M represents a hydrogen atom.
3  Three
、アルカリ金属原子、アンモ-ゥム基または炭素原子数 5以下のアルキル基にて置換 されたアンモニゥム基を表し、 Bは有機 2塩基性酸を形成する鎖状または環状の基を 表す。 m及び nは各々 0〜50を表し、 pは 1〜100を表す。  Represents an ammonium group substituted with an alkali metal atom, an ammonium group or an alkyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms, and B represents a chain or cyclic group forming an organic dibasic acid. m and n each represents 0 to 50, and p represents 1 to 100.
[0089] 上記の一般式で表されるポリエチレンォキシドィ匕合物は、通常のハロゲン化銀写真 感光材料を製造するに際し、ゼラチン水溶液を製造する工程、ゼラチン溶液に水溶 性ハロゲンィ匕物及び水溶性銀塩を添加する工程、乳剤を支持体上に塗布する工程 等、乳剤原料を撹拌したり、移動したりする場合の著しい発泡に対する消泡剤として 好ましく用いられて来たものであり、消泡剤として用いる技術は、例えば特開昭 44 9497号に記載されている。上記ポリエチレンォキシドィ匕合物は、核形成時の消泡剤 としても機能する。上記一般式で表される化合物は、銀に対して 1質量%以下で用い るのが好ましぐより好ましくは 0. 01〜0. 1質量%で用いる。 [0089] The polyethylene oxide compound represented by the above general formula is a process for producing a gelatin aqueous solution in the production of a normal silver halide photographic light-sensitive material, a water-soluble halide and a water-soluble compound in the gelatin solution. It has been used preferably as an antifoaming agent for significant foaming when the emulsion raw materials are stirred or moved, such as the step of adding a functional silver salt and the step of coating an emulsion on a support. A technique used as a foaming agent is described in, for example, JP-A-44 9497. The polyethylene oxide compound also functions as an antifoaming agent during nucleation. The compound represented by the above general formula is preferably used in an amount of 1% by mass or less based on silver, more preferably 0.01 to 0.1% by mass.
[0090] 上記ポリエチレンォキシドィ匕合物は核形成時に存在していればよぐ核形成前の分 散媒中に予め加えておくのが好ましいが、核形成中に添加してもよいし、核形成時に 使用する銀塩水溶液ゃノ、ライド水溶液に添加して用いてもよい。好ましくは、ノ、ライド 水溶液もしくは両方の水溶液に 0. 01〜2. 0質量%で添加して用いることである。又 、該化合物は、核形成工程の少なくとも 50%に亘る時間で存在せしめるのが好ましく 、更に好ましくは 70%以上に亘る時間で存在せしめる。上記ポリエチレンォキシドィ匕 合物は、粉末で添加しても、メタノール等の溶媒に溶力して添加してもよい。 [0090] The polyethylene oxide compound is preferably added in advance to the dispersion medium before nucleation as long as it exists at the time of nucleation, but it may be added during nucleation. , During nucleation The silver salt aqueous solution to be used may be added to the ride aqueous solution. Preferably, it is used by adding 0.01 to 2.0% by mass to the aqueous solution of Rhino, Ride or both. In addition, the compound is preferably present for a time of at least 50% of the nucleation step, more preferably 70% or more. The polyethylene oxide compound may be added as a powder, or may be added in a solvent such as methanol.
[0091] なお、核形成時の温度は、通常、 5〜60°C、好ましくは 15〜50°Cであり、一定の温 度であっても、昇温パターン (核形成開始時の温度が 25°Cで、核形成中徐々に温度 を上げ、核形成終了時の温度が 40°Cの様な場合)や、その逆のパターンであっても 、前記温度範囲内で制御するのが好ましい。  [0091] The temperature at the time of nucleation is usually 5 to 60 ° C, preferably 15 to 50 ° C. Even if the temperature is constant, the temperature rise pattern (the temperature at the start of nucleation is Even when the temperature is increased gradually during nucleation at 25 ° C and the temperature at the end of nucleation is 40 ° C) or vice versa, it is preferable to control within the above temperature range. .
[0092] 核形成に用いる銀塩水溶液及びハライド水溶液の濃度は 3. 5モル ZL以下が好ま しぐ更には 0. 01〜2. 5モル ZLの低濃度域で使用されるのが好ましい。核形成時 の銀イオンの添加速度は、反応液 1L当たり 1. 5 X 10— 3〜3. 0 X 10— 1モル Z分が好 ましぐ更に好ましくは 3. 0 X 10— 3〜8. 0 X 10— 2モル Z分である。 [0092] The concentration of the silver salt aqueous solution and halide aqueous solution used for nucleation is preferably 3.5 mol ZL or less, and more preferably 0.01 to 2.5 mol ZL. The rate of addition of silver ion during nucleation, the reaction solution 1L per 1. 5 X 10- 3 ~3. 0 X 10- 1 mol Z worth good better tool further preferably 3. 0 X 10- 3 ~8. is 0 X 10- 2 mole Z min.
[0093] 核形成時の pHは、通常、 1. 7〜10の範囲に設定できる力 アルカリ側の pHでは 形成する核の粒径分布を広げてしまうので、好ましくは pH2〜6である。又、核形成 時の pBrは、通常、 0. 05〜3. 0であり、好ましくは 1. 0〜2. 5、より好ましくは 1. 5〜 2. 0である。  [0093] The pH at the time of nucleation is usually a force that can be set in the range of 1.7 to 10. The pH on the alkali side broadens the particle size distribution of the nuclei to be formed, and is preferably pH 2 to 6. Moreover, pBr at the time of nucleation is usually 0.05 to 3.0, preferably 1.0 to 2.5, more preferably 1.5 to 2.0.
[0094] ハロゲン化銀粒子の平均粒径は、通常、 10〜50nm、好ましくは 10〜40nmであり 、より好ましくは 10〜35nmである。ハロゲン化銀粒子の平均粒径が lOnmより小さい と画像濃度が低下したり、光照射画像保存性 (熱現像によって得た画像を明室で診 断等のために使用したり、明室に保管した場合の保存性)が劣化したりすることがあ る。又、 50nmを超えると画像濃度が低下してしまうことがある。  [0094] The average grain size of the silver halide grains is usually 10 to 50 nm, preferably 10 to 40 nm, and more preferably 10 to 35 nm. If the average grain size of the silver halide grains is smaller than lOnm, the image density will decrease, or the light-irradiated image will be stored (the image obtained by thermal development will be used for diagnosis in a bright room, or stored in a bright room) The storage stability) may deteriorate. If it exceeds 50 nm, the image density may be lowered.
[0095] ここで言う平均粒径とは、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子乳剤中に含まれて ヽるハロゲンィ匕銀粒 子が立方体、あるいは八面体のいわゆる正常晶である場合には、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子 の稜の長さを言う。又、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子が平板状粒子である場合には、主表面の 投影面積と同面積の円像に換算した時の直径を言う。その他、正常晶でない場合、 例えば球状粒子、棒状粒子等の場合には、当該ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の体積と同等な 球を考えた時の直径を粒径として算出する。測定は電子顕微鏡写真を用いて行い、 300個の粒子の粒径の測定値を平均することで平均粒径を求めた。 [0095] The average particle size referred to here means that the halogen-silver particles contained in the halogen-silver particle emulsion are cubic or octahedral so-called normal crystals. Say the length of the ridge. In addition, when the silver halide grains are tabular grains, it means the diameter when converted into a circular image having the same area as the projected area of the main surface. In addition, when it is not a normal crystal, for example, in the case of a spherical particle, a rod-like particle, etc., the diameter when considering a sphere equivalent to the volume of the halogenated silver particle is calculated as the particle size. Measurement is performed using an electron micrograph, The average particle size was determined by averaging the measured values of the particle size of 300 particles.
[0096] 又、本発明においては、平均粒径が 55〜100nmであるハロゲン化銀粒子と平均 粒径が 10〜50nmであるハロゲンィ匕銀粒子とを併用することで、画像濃度の階調を 調整することができる他、画像濃度を向上させたり、経時での画像濃度低下を改善( 小さく)することができる。平均粒径が 10〜50nmであるハロゲンィ匕銀粒子と平均粒 径が 55〜100nmであるハロゲン化銀粒子との割合(質量比)は、 95 : 5〜50 : 50カ 好ましく、ょり好ましくは90 : 10〜60 :40でぁる。  [0096] Further, in the present invention, the gradation of image density can be adjusted by using silver halide grains having an average particle diameter of 55 to 100 nm and halogenated silver grains having an average particle diameter of 10 to 50 nm in combination. In addition to the adjustment, the image density can be improved, and the decrease in image density over time can be improved (smaller). The ratio (mass ratio) of the silver halide grains having an average particle diameter of 10 to 50 nm and the silver halide grains having an average particle diameter of 55 to 100 nm is preferably 95: 5 to 50:50, more preferably 90: 10-60: 40.
[0097] なお、上記のように、 2種の平均粒径のハロゲンィ匕銀粒子乳剤を用いる場合には、 当該 2種のハロゲ化銀乳剤を混合して、感光性層に含有させてもよい。又、階調調整 等のために、感光性層を 2層以上の層で構成し、それぞれの層に当該 2種の平均粒 径のハロゲンィ匕銀粒子乳剤を別個に含有させることも好まし 、。  [0097] As described above, when two types of silver halide emulsions having an average particle diameter are used, the two types of silver halide emulsions may be mixed and contained in the photosensitive layer. . In addition, it is also preferable that the photosensitive layer is composed of two or more layers for gradation adjustment and the like, and each layer contains the silver halide emulsions having the two average grain sizes separately. .
[0098] (沃化銀含有量が 5〜 100モル%のハロゲン化銀粒子)  [0098] (silver halide grains having a silver iodide content of 5 to 100 mol%)
ノ、ロゲン化銀粒子としては、沃化銀を含有するハロゲン化銀粒子を好ましく使用す ることができる。ハロゲン組成としては、沃化銀含有量が 5〜: LOOモル%であることが 好ましい。より好ましくは 40〜: LOOモル0 /0、更に好ましくは 70〜: LOOモル0 /0であり、特 に好ましくは 90〜: LOOモル%である。沃化銀含有率がこの範囲であれば、粒子内ハ ロゲン組成分布が均一であっても、段階的に変化したものでもよぐあるいは連続的 に変化したものでもよい。又、内部及び Z又は表面に沃化銀含有率が高いコア Zシ エル構造を有するハロゲンィ匕銀粒子も好ましく用いることができる。構造として好まし いものは 2〜5重構造であり、より好ましくは 2〜4重構造のコア Zシヱル粒子である。 As the silver halide grains, silver halide grains containing silver iodide can be preferably used. As the halogen composition, the silver iodide content is preferably 5 to: LOO mol%. More preferably 40 to: LOO mol 0/0, more preferably 70: A LOO mol 0/0, preferably especially 90: a LOO mol%. If the silver iodide content is in this range, the intra-grain halogen composition distribution may be uniform, may be changed stepwise, or may be changed continuously. Further, halogen silver halide grains having a core Z shell structure having a high silver iodide content in the interior and Z or on the surface can also be preferably used. The preferred structure is a double to five-fold structure, more preferably a two to four-fold core Z seal particle.
[0099] ハロゲン化銀粒子に沃化銀を導入する方法としては、粒子形成中に沃化アルカリ 水溶液を添加する方法、微粒子沃化銀、微粒子沃臭化銀、微粒子沃塩化銀、微粒 子沃塩臭化銀の中、少なくとも一つの微粒子を添加する方法、特開平 5— 323487 号及び同 6— 11780号に記載の沃化物イオン放出剤を用いる方法などが好ましい。  [0099] As a method for introducing silver iodide into silver halide grains, a method of adding an aqueous alkali iodide solution during grain formation, fine grain silver iodide, fine grain silver iodobromide, fine grain silver iodochloride, fine grain iodine, A method of adding at least one fine particle among silver chlorobromide and a method using an iodide ion releasing agent described in JP-A-5-323487 and JP-A-6-11780 are preferred.
[0100] 本発明に係るハロゲンィ匕銀粒子は、 350〜440nmの間の波長に沃化銀結晶構造 に由来する直接遷移吸収を示すことが好ましい。これらハロゲン化銀が直接遷移の 光吸収を持って 、るかどうかは、 400〜430nm付近に直接遷移に起因する励起子 吸収が見られることで容易に区別することができる。 [0101] (熱変換内部潜像型ハロゲン化銀粒子) [0100] The silver halide grains according to the present invention preferably exhibit direct transition absorption derived from a silver iodide crystal structure at a wavelength of 350 to 440 nm. Whether these silver halides have light absorption of direct transition can be easily distinguished by the fact that exciton absorption due to direct transition is observed in the vicinity of 400 to 430 nm. [0101] (Heat conversion internal latent image type silver halide grains)
本発明に係る感光性ハロゲンィヒ銀粒子は、特開 2003— 270755号、特開 2005— 106927号に開示される熱変換内部潜像型 (熱現像後内部潜像型)ハロゲンィ匕銀粒 子、即ち熱現像によって表面潜像型から内部潜像型に変換することにより表面感度 が低下するハロゲンィ匕銀粒子であることが好ましい。換言すると、熱現像前の露光で は、現像反応 (銀イオン還元剤による銀イオンの還元反応)の触媒として機能し得る 潜像を該ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の表面に形成し、熱現像過程経過後の露光では、該ハ ロゲン化銀粒子の表面より内部に多くの潜像を形成するようになるため、表面におけ る潜像形成が抑制されるハロゲンィ匕銀粒子であることが、感度及び画像保存性上、 好ましい。  The photosensitive silver halide silver particle according to the present invention is a heat conversion internal latent image type (internal latent image type after heat development) halogen silver halide particle disclosed in JP-A-2003-270755 and JP-A-2005-106927, that is, The silver halide grains are preferably silver halide grains whose surface sensitivity is lowered by conversion from the surface latent image type to the internal latent image type by heat development. In other words, in the exposure before thermal development, a latent image that can function as a catalyst for a development reaction (reduction reaction of silver ions by a silver ion reducing agent) is formed on the surface of the halogen silver halide grains, and after the thermal development process has elapsed. In this exposure, a larger number of latent images are formed in the interior of the silver halide grains than the surface of the silver halide grains. It is preferable in terms of storage stability.
[0102] 熱変換内部潜像型ハロゲン化銀粒子は、通常の表面潜像型ハロゲン化銀粒子と 同様に、銀イオン供給源として機能し得る脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩 1モルに対し 0. 00 1〜0. 7モル、好ましくは 0. 03〜0. 5モルの範囲で使用するのが好ましい。  [0102] The heat-converted internal latent image type silver halide grains, like ordinary surface latent image type silver halide grains, are 0.00 per mol of an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt that can function as a silver ion source. It is preferably used in the range of 1 to 0.7 mol, preferably 0.03 to 0.5 mol.
[0103] (ハロゲン化銀粒子両親媒性分散物)  [0103] (Amphiphilic dispersion of silver halide grains)
熱現像感光材料の製造過程においては、写真性能、色調を改良するという観点か ら、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の凝集を防止し、比較的均一にハロゲン化銀粒子を分散させ 、最終的に現像銀を所望の形状に制御できるようにすることが好ましい。  In the process of manufacturing a photothermographic material, from the viewpoint of improving photographic performance and color tone, the aggregation of silver halide grains is prevented, the silver halide grains are dispersed relatively uniformly, and finally the developed silver is dispersed. It is preferable that the desired shape can be controlled.
[0104] 凝集防止、均一分散等のため、用いられるゼラチンは、使用条件等に応じて、ゼラ チンが有するアミノ基ゃカルボキシル基などの親水性基をィ匕学修飾し、ゼラチンの特 性を改変させたものが好ましい。例えば、ゼラチン分子内のアミノ基の疎水化修飾と しては、フエ-ルカルバモイル化、フタル化、琥珀化、ァセチル化、ベンゾィル化、二 トロフ ニル化などが挙げられる力 特にこれらに限定されるものではない。又、これ らの置換率は 95%以上が好ましぐ更に好ましくは 99%以上である。又、カルボキシ ル基の疎水化修飾を組み合わせてもよぐメチルエステルイ匕やアミド化などが挙げら れるが、特にこれらに限定されるものではない。カルボキシル基の置換率は 50〜90 %が好ましぐ更に好ましくは 70〜90%である。ここで、上記の疎水化修飾の疎水基 とは、ゼラチンのアミノ基及び/又はカルボキシル基を置換することによって、疎水性 が増す基のことを言う。 [0105] 又、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子乳剤は、ゼラチンの代わりに又はゼラチンとの併用において 、下記のような水と有機溶媒の両方に溶解するポリマーを使用して調製することも、 目的によって好ましい。例えばハロゲンィ匕銀粒子乳剤を有機溶媒系に均一に分散さ せて塗布するような場合に、特に好ましい。なお、有機溶媒としては、アルコール系、 エステル系、ケトン系の化合物が挙げられる。特に、ケトン系有機溶媒、例えばメタノ ール、アセトン、メチルェチルケトン、ジェチルケトン等が好ましい。 [0104] In order to prevent aggregation and uniformly disperse the gelatin used, the hydrophilic groups such as amino and carboxyl groups of gelatin are chemically modified according to the conditions of use, etc., to improve the properties of gelatin. Those modified are preferred. For example, the hydrophobization modification of the amino group in the gelatin molecule includes forces such as phenylcarbamoylation, phthalation, hatching, acetylation, benzoylation, ditrophylation, etc. is not. Further, the substitution rate is preferably 95% or more, more preferably 99% or more. Further, methyl esterification or amidation, which may be combined with a hydrophobic modification of a carboxyl group, may be mentioned, but it is not particularly limited thereto. The substitution rate of the carboxyl group is preferably 50 to 90%, more preferably 70 to 90%. Here, the hydrophobic group in the above-mentioned hydrophobization modification refers to a group whose hydrophobicity is increased by substituting the amino group and / or carboxyl group of gelatin. [0105] Further, it is also preferable depending on the purpose that the halogen silver halide emulsion is prepared by using a polymer that dissolves in both water and an organic solvent as described below, instead of gelatin or in combination with gelatin. For example, it is particularly preferred when the silver halide silver halide emulsion is uniformly dispersed in an organic solvent system. Examples of the organic solvent include alcohol-based, ester-based, and ketone-based compounds. In particular, ketone organic solvents such as methanol, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, and jetyl ketone are preferable.
[0106] 上記水と有機溶媒の両方に溶解するポリマーとしては、天然ポリマー、合成ポリマ 一及びコポリマーの何れであってもよい。例えばゼラチン類、ゴム類等を改質して本 発明の範疇に属するよう改質したものを用いることもできる。又は、以下の分類に属 するポリマーを、凝集防止、均一分散等の目的に適する官能基を導入して用いること が可能である。  [0106] The polymer that is soluble in both water and the organic solvent may be any of natural polymers, synthetic polymers, and copolymers. For example, gelatins, rubbers and the like modified so as to belong to the category of the present invention can be used. Alternatively, polymers belonging to the following classifications can be used by introducing functional groups suitable for the purpose of preventing aggregation and uniform dispersion.
[0107] 上記ポリマーとしては、ポリビュルアルコール類、ヒドロキシェチルセルロース類、セ ルロースアセテート類、セルロースアセテートブチレート類、ポリビュルピロリドン類、 カゼイン、澱粉、ポリアクリル酸及びアクリル酸エステル類、ポリメチルメタクリル酸及 びメタクリル酸エステル類、ポリ塩化ビニル類、ポリメタクリル酸類、スチレン 無水マ レイン酸共重合体類、スチレン—アクリロニトリル共重合体類、スチレン—ブタジエン 共重合体類、ポリビュルァセタール類(ポリビュルホルマール及びポリビュルブチラ ール)、ポリエステル類、ポリウレタン類、フエノキシ榭脂、ポリ塩ィ匕ビユリデン類、ポリ エポキシド類、ポリカーボネート類、ポリ酢酸ビニル類、ポリオレフイン類、セルロース エステル類、ポリアミド類等が挙げられる。これらのポリマーは、数種類がコポリマーと なっていてもよいが、特にアクリル酸、メタクリル酸及びそれらのエステル類のモノマ 一を共重合したポリマーが好まし 、。  [0107] Examples of the polymer include polybulu alcohols, hydroxyethyl celluloses, cellulose acetates, cellulose acetate butyrates, polybutylpyrrolidones, casein, starch, polyacrylic acid and acrylic esters, polymethyl Methacrylic acid and methacrylic acid esters, polyvinyl chlorides, polymethacrylic acids, styrene-maleic anhydride copolymers, styrene-acrylonitrile copolymers, styrene-butadiene copolymers, polybulucetals ( Polybulformal and Polybutyral), polyesters, polyurethanes, phenoxy resins, polysalts and vinylidenes, polyepoxides, polycarbonates, polyvinyl acetates, polyolefins, cellulose esters, polyamides And the like. Several kinds of these polymers may be copolymers, but particularly preferred are polymers obtained by copolymerizing monomers of acrylic acid, methacrylic acid and esters thereof.
[0108] 当該ポリマーは、同一の状態で水と有機溶媒の両方に溶解するポリマーでもよいが 、 pHの制御や温度の制御で水や有機溶媒に溶解させたり、不溶ィ匕したりできるもの も含まれる。例えば、カルボキシル基のような酸性基を有するポリマーは、種類によつ ては解離状態では親水性となるが、 pHを下げ非解離状態にすると親油性となり溶剤 に可溶にできる。逆にアミノ基を有するポリマーは、 pHを上げると親油性となり、 pHを 下げるとイオンィ匕し水溶性が上昇する。ノ-オン活性剤では曇点の現象が良く知られ ているが、温度の上昇で親油性になり有機溶媒に可溶となり、温度の低下で親水性 、即ち水に溶解できるような性質を有する感温性ポリマー(有名な感温性ポリマーとし て、ポリ— N— i—プロピルアクリルアミド及びそのコポリマー等)も本発明に含まれる。 完全に溶解しなくともミセルを形成し均一に乳化できればょ ヽ。 [0108] The polymer may be a polymer that dissolves in both water and an organic solvent in the same state, but may be dissolved in water or an organic solvent by pH control or temperature control, or may be insoluble. included. For example, a polymer having an acidic group such as a carboxyl group becomes hydrophilic in a dissociated state depending on the type, but becomes lipophilic when it is lowered to a non-dissociated state and can be made soluble in a solvent. Conversely, polymers having amino groups become lipophilic when the pH is raised, and become ionic and water-soluble when the pH is lowered. The cloud point phenomenon is well known for non-active agents. However, it becomes lipophilic and soluble in organic solvents when the temperature rises, and it becomes hydrophilic (that is, soluble in water) when the temperature is lowered (as a well-known thermosensitive polymer, Poly-N-i-propylacrylamide and copolymers thereof) are also included in the present invention. If micelles can be formed and evenly emulsified even if not completely dissolved.
[0109] 本発明においては、各種のモノマーを組み合わせるため、一概にどのモノマーをど の程度用いるのが良 、かは述べられな 、が、親水性のモノマーと疎水性のモノマー を適当な割合で組み合わせることで所望のポリマーが得られることは容易に理解でき る。 [0109] In the present invention, since various monomers are combined, it is not generally stated which monomer should be used to what extent, but a hydrophilic monomer and a hydrophobic monomer are used in an appropriate ratio. It can be easily understood that the desired polymer can be obtained by combining them.
[0110] 前記水と有機溶媒の両方に溶解するポリマーとしては、前記の如き pH等の溶解時 の条件の調整により、あるいは未調整でもよいが、水に対して少なくとも 1質量%以上 (25°C)の溶解度を有し、かつ有機溶剤としてメチルェチルケトンに 5質量%以上(2 5°C)の溶解度を有するものが好ま 、。本発明に用いる水と有機溶媒の両方に溶解 するポリマーとしては、溶解性の観点から、直鎖のポリマーよりも所謂ブロックポリマー 、グラフトポリマー、櫛型ポリマー等が適している。特に櫛型ポリマーは好ましい。なお 、ポリマーの等電点は pH6以下であることが好ましい。  [0110] The polymer that dissolves in both the water and the organic solvent may be adjusted by dissolving the pH and the like as described above, or may be unadjusted, but at least 1% by mass or more (25 ° C with respect to water). C) and an organic solvent having a solubility of 5% by mass or more (25 ° C.) in methyl ethyl ketone is preferred. From the viewpoint of solubility, so-called block polymers, graft polymers, comb polymers, and the like are more suitable as polymers that are soluble in both water and organic solvents used in the present invention. Comb polymers are particularly preferred. The isoelectric point of the polymer is preferably pH 6 or less.
[0111] 櫛型ポリマーを製造する場合は、各種の手法を用いることができるが、櫛部 (側鎖) に 200以上の分子量の側鎖を導入できるモノマーを用いることが望ま 、。特にェチ レンォキシド、プロピレンォキシド等、ポリオキシアルキレン基含有エチレン性不飽和 モノマーを用いることが好まし 、。ポリオキシアルキレン基含有エチレン性不飽和モノ マーとしては、特に下記一般式で表されるポリオキシアルキレン基を有するものが好 ましい。  [0111] In order to produce a comb polymer, various methods can be used, but it is desirable to use a monomer capable of introducing a side chain having a molecular weight of 200 or more into the comb part (side chain). In particular, it is preferable to use an ethylenically unsaturated monomer containing a polyoxyalkylene group such as ethylene oxide or propylene oxide. As the polyoxyalkylene group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer, those having a polyoxyalkylene group represented by the following general formula are particularly preferable.
[0112] 一(EO) —(PO) - (TO) 一 R  [0112] One (EO) — (PO)-(TO) One R
k m n  k m n
式中、 Eはエチレン基、 Pはプロピレン基、 Tはブチレン基を表し、 Rは置換基を表 す。ブチレン基としてはテトラメチレン、 i—ブチレン基等を含む。 kは 1〜300、 mは 0 〜60、 ηίま 0〜40の整数を表す。好ましく ίま kiま 1〜200、 miま 0〜30、 ηίま 0〜20で ある。ただし、櫛型ポリマーとなるためには k+m+n≥ 2であることが好ましい。ポリオ キシアルキレン基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーは、 1種類だけを用いても 2種類以 上を同時に用いても構わない。 [0113] Rで表される置換基としては、アルキル基、ァリール基、複素環基などを表し、アル キル基としてはメチル、ェチル、プロピル、ブチル、へキシル、ォクチル、ドデシル等 の喜が、又、ァリール基としてはフエニル、ナフチル等の基力 又、複素環基としては チェニル、ピリジル等の基が挙げられる。又、これらの基は、更にハロゲン原子、アル コキシ基 (メトキシ、エトキシ、ブトキシ等)、アルキルチオ基 (メチルチオ、プチルチオ 等)、ァシル基 (ァセチル、ベンゾィル等)、アルカンアミド基 (ァセトアミド、プロピオン アミド等)、ァリールアミド基 (ベンゾィルアミド等)等によって置換されてもよい。又、こ れらの置換基力 更にこれらの基により置換されてもよい。 In the formula, E represents an ethylene group, P represents a propylene group, T represents a butylene group, and R represents a substituent. Examples of the butylene group include tetramethylene and i-butylene groups. k represents an integer of 1 to 300, m represents an integer of 0 to 60, and ηί. Preferably, ίMA ki ma 1 ~ 200, mi ma 0 ~ 30, ηί ma 0 ~ 20. However, k + m + n≥2 is preferable in order to be a comb polymer. The polyoxyalkylene group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer may be used alone or in combination of two or more. [0113] The substituent represented by R represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, and the like, and examples of the alkyl group include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, hexyl, octyl, dodecyl and the like. Examples of aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl groups, and examples of heterocyclic groups include enyl and pyridyl groups. These groups further include halogen atoms, alkoxy groups (methoxy, ethoxy, butoxy, etc.), alkylthio groups (methylthio, butylthio, etc.), acyl groups (acetyl, benzoyl, etc.), alkanamide groups (acetoamide, propionamide, etc.) ), An arylamide group (such as benzoylamide) or the like. Further, these substituent groups may be further substituted by these groups.
[0114] 前記一般式で表されるポリオキシアルキレン基は、これらポリオキシアルキレン基を 有するエチレン性不飽和モノマーを用いることでポリマー中に導入できる。これらの 基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマーとしては、例えばポリオキシアルキレンアタリレ ート (及びメタアタリレート)等があり、これ等は市販されているヒドロキシポリ(ォキシァ ルキレン)材料、例えば商品名"プル口-ッグ' [Pluronic (旭電ィ匕工業社製) ]、アデ 力ポリエーテル (旭電化工業社製)、カルボワックス [Carbowax (グリコ ·プロダクス社 製) ]、トリトン [Toriton (ローム 'アンド'ハース社製) ]及び P. E. G (第一工業製薬社 製)等を、公知の方法でアクリル酸、メタクリル酸、アクリルクロリド、メタクリルクロリド又 は無水アクリル酸等と反応させることによって製造できる。別に、公知の方法で製造し たポリ(ォキシアルキレン)ジアタリレート等を用いることもできる。 [0114] The polyoxyalkylene group represented by the general formula can be introduced into the polymer by using an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having the polyoxyalkylene group. Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having these groups include polyoxyalkylene acrylate (and meta acrylate), which are commercially available hydroxypoly (oxyalkylene) materials such as trade name " Pull mouth-g '[Pluronic (Asahi Denki Kogyo Co., Ltd.)], Ade force polyether (Asahi Denka Kogyo Co., Ltd.), Carbowax [Carbowax (Glico-Products Co., Ltd.)], Triton [Roriton And PE G (Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd.) and the like can be produced by reacting them with acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylic chloride, methacrylic chloride or acrylic acid anhydride by a known method. In addition, poly (oxyalkylene) diathalylate produced by a known method can also be used.
[0115] 又、市販品のモノマーとしては、 日本油脂社製のヒドロキシル基末端ポリアルキレン グリコールモノ(メタ)アタリレートとして、ブレンマー PE— 90、ブレンマー PE— 200、 ブレンマー PE— 350、ブレンマー AE— 90、ブレンマー AE— 200、ブレンマー AE 400、ブレンマー PP— 1000、ブレンマー PP— 500、ブレンマー PP— 800、ブレ ンマー AP— 150、ブレンマー AP— 400、ブレンマー AP— 550、ブレンマー AP— 8 00、ブレンマー 50PEP— 300、ブレンマー 70PEP— 350B、ブレンマー AEPシリー ズ、ブレンマー 55PET— 400、ブレンマー 30PET— 800、ブレンマー 55PET— 80 0、ブレンマー AETシリーズ、ブレンマー 30PPT—800、ブレンマー 50ΡΡΤ— 800 、ブレンマー 70ΡΡΤ—800、ブレンマー APTシリーズ、ブレンマー 10PPB—500B 、ブレンマー 10APB— 500B等が挙げられる。同様に、 日本油脂社製のアルキル末 端ポリアルキレングリコールモノ(メタ)アタリレートとして、ブレンマー PME— 100、ブ レンマー PME— 200、ブレンマー PME—400、ブレンマー PME— 1000、ブレンマ 一 PME— 4000、ブレンマー AME— 400、ブレンマー 50POEP— 800B、ブレンマ 一 50AOEP— 800B、ブレンマー PLE— 200、ブレンマー ALE— 200、ブレンマー ALE— 800、ブレンマー PSE— 400、ブレンマー PSE— 1300、ブレンマー ASEP シリーズ、ブレンマー PKEPシリーズ、ブレンマー AKEPシリーズ、ブレンマー ANE 300、ブレンマー ANE— 1300、ブレンマー PNEPシリーズ、ブレンマー PNPEシ リーズ、ブレンマー 43ANEP— 500、ブレンマー 70ANEP— 550等;共栄社ィ匕学社 製のライトエステル MC、ライトエステル 130MA、ライトエステル 041MA、ライトアタリ レート BO—A、ライトアタリレート EC— A、ライトアタリレート MTG— A、ライトアタリレ ート 130A、ライトアタリレート DPM— A、ライトアタリレート P— 200A、ライトアタリレー ト NP— 4EA、ライトアタリレート NP— 8EA等が挙げられる。 [0115] In addition, commercially available monomers include, as a hydroxyl group-terminated polyalkylene glycol mono (meth) ate acrylate manufactured by NOF Corporation, Blemmer PE-90, Blemmer PE-200, Blemmer PE-350, Blemmer AE-90. , Blemmer AE—200, Blemmer AE 400, Blemmer PP—1000, Blemmer PP—500, Blemmer PP—800, Blemmer AP—150, Blemmer AP—400, Blemmer AP—550, Blemmer AP—800, Blemmer 50PEP— 300, Blemmer 70PEP-350B, Blemmer AEP series, Blemmer 55PET-400, Blemmer 30PET-800, Blemmer 55PET-80, Blemmer AET series, Blemmer 30PPT-800, Blemmer 50ΡΡΤ-800, Blemmer 70ΡΡΤ-800, Blemmer APT series , Blemmer 10PPB-500B, Blemmer 10APB-500B and the like. Similarly, Nippon Oil & Fats Alkyl Powder As end polyalkylene glycol mono (meth) acrylates, Blemmer PME—100, Blemmer PME—200, Blemmer PME—400, Blemmer PME—1000, Blemmer One PME—4000, Blemmer AME—400, Blemmer 50POEP—800B, Blemma 50AOEP—800B, Blemmer PLE—200, Blemmer ALE—200, Blemmer ALE—800, Blemmer PSE—400, Blemmer PSE—1300, Blemmer ASEP series, Blemmer PKEP series, Blemmer AKEP series, Blemmer ANE 300, Blemmer ANE—1300 , BLEMMER PNEP series, BLEMMER PNPE series, BLEMMER 43ANEP-500, BLEMMER 70ANEP-550, etc .; Kyoeisha Co., Ltd. LIGHT ESTER MC, LIGHT ESTER 130MA, LIGHT ESTER 041MA, LIGHT ATALYLATE BO-A, LIGHT ATTALRATE EC— A, light attalate MTG A, Light Atari les over preparative 130A, light Atari rate dpm A, Light Atari rate P- 200A, light Atari rate NP- 4EA, Light Atari rate NP- 8EA and the like.
[0116] ポリマーとしては、所謂マクロマーを使用したグラフトポリマーを用いることもできる。  [0116] As the polymer, a graft polymer using a so-called macromer can also be used.
例えば、 "新高分子実験学 2、高分子の合成,反応"高分子学会編,共立出版社, 19 95に記載されている。又、山下雄也著"マクロモノマーの化学と工業"アイピーシー 刊, 1989にも詳しく記載されている。マクロマーの内、有用な分子量は 1万〜 10万 の範囲、好ましい範囲は 1万〜 5万、特に好ましい範囲は 1万〜 2万の範囲である。 分子量が 1万未満では効果を発揮できず、又、 10万を超えると主鎖を形成する共重 合モノマーとの重合性が悪くなる。具体的には、東亞合成社製: AA— 6、 AS— 6S、 AN— 6S等を用いることができる。  For example, it is described in “New Polymer Experiments 2, Polymer Synthesis, Reaction” edited by Polymer Society of Japan, Kyoritsu Shuppansha, 1995. It is also described in detail in Yuya Yamashita's “Chemical Monomer Chemistry and Industry” published by IPC, 1989. Among the macromers, the useful molecular weight is in the range of 10,000 to 100,000, the preferred range is 10,000 to 50,000, and the particularly preferred range is in the range of 10,000 to 20,000. If the molecular weight is less than 10,000, the effect cannot be exerted, and if it exceeds 100,000, the polymerizability with the copolymerization monomer forming the main chain deteriorates. Specifically, Toagosei Co., Ltd. AA-6, AS-6S, AN-6S, etc. can be used.
[0117] なお、本発明が上記具体例によって、何等限定されないことは勿論である。ポリオ キシアルキレン基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーは、 1種類だけを用いても 2種類以 上を同時に用いても構わない。  Of course, the present invention is not limited to the above specific examples. The polyoxyalkylene group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
[0118] 上記モノマーと具体的に反応させる他のモノマーとしては、(メタ)アクリル酸エステ ル類、 (メタ)アクリルアミド類、ァリルエステル類、ァリルォキシエタノール類、ビュルェ 一テル類、ビュルエステル類、ィタコン酸ジアルキル、フマール酸のモノ(又はジ)ァ ルキルエステル類等、その他、クロトン酸、ィタコン酸、(メタ)アクリロニトリル、マレイロ 二トリル、スチレン等が挙げられる。 [0119] 具体的な例としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 [0118] Other monomers specifically reacted with the above monomers include (meth) acrylic acid esters, (meth) acrylamides, aryl esters, aryloxyethanols, buresters, bur esters. , Dialkyl itaconate, mono (or di) alkyl esters of fumaric acid, etc., crotonic acid, itaconic acid, (meth) acrylonitrile, maleylnitrile, styrene, etc. [0119] Specific examples include the following compounds.
[0120] アクリル酸エステル類:アクリル酸メチル、アクリル酸ェチル、アクリル酸プロピル、ク ロノレエチノレアタリレート、 2—ヒドロキシェチノレアタリレート、トリメチロールプロパンモノ アタリレート、ベンジルアタリレート、メトキシベンジルアタリレート、フルフリルアタリレー ト、テトラヒドロフルフリルアタリレート等、メタクリル酸エステル類:メタクリル酸メチル、メ タクリル酸ェチル、メタクリル酸プロピル、クロルェチルメタタリレート、 2—ヒドロキシェ チノレメタタリレート、トリメチロールプロパンモノメタタリレート、ベンジノレメタタリレート、メ トキシベンジルメタタリレート、フルフリルメタタリレート、テトラヒドロフルフリルメタクリレ ート等、アクリルアミド類:アクリルアミド、 N—アルキルアクリルアミド (アルキル基として 炭素数 1〜3のもの、例えばメチル、ェチル、プロピル)、 N, N ジアルキルアクリル アミド、 N ヒドロキシェチルー N—メチルアクリルアミド、 N— 2—ァセトアミドエチル —N ァセチルアクリルアミドなど。又、アルキルォキシアクリルアミドとして、メトキシメ チルアクリルアミド、ブトキシメチルアクリルアミド等、メタクリルアミド類:メタクリルアミド 、 N—アルキルメタクリルアミド、 N ヒドロキシェチルー N—メチルメタクリルアミド、 N 2—ァセトアミドエチル N ァセチルメタクリルアミド、メトキシメチルメタアクリルァ ミド、ブトキシメチルメタアクリルアミド等、ァリルイ匕合物:ァリルエステル類 (酢酸ァリル 、力プロン酸ァリル、カプリル酸ァリル、ラウリン酸ァリル、パルミチン酸ァリル、ステアリ ン酸ァリル、安息香酸ァリル、ァセト酢酸ァリル、乳酸ァリル等)、ァリルォキシェタノ 一ノレ等、ビュルエーテル類:アルキルビュルエーテル(へキシルビ-ルエーテル、ォ クチノレビニノレエーテノレ、デシノレビニノレエーテノレ、ェチノレへキシノレビニノレエーテノレ、メ トキシェチノレビニノレエーテノレ、エトキシェチノレビニノレエーテノレ、クロノレエチノレビ二ノレ エーテル、 1 メチル 2, 2—ジメチルプロピルビニルエーテル、 2 ェチノレブチノレ ビニノレエーテノレ、ヒドロキシェチノレビニノレエーテノレ、ジエチレングリコーノレビニノレエー テル、ジメチルアミノエチルビニルエーテル、ジェチルアミノエチルビニルエーテル、 ブチノレアミノエチノレビニノレエーテノレ、ベンジルビ-ルエーテル、テトラヒドロフルフリル ビュルエーテル等)、ビュルエステル類:ビュルブチレート、ビ-ルー iーブチレート、 ビュルトリメチルアセテート、ビニルジェチルアセテート、ビ-ルバレート、ビニルカプ 口エート、ビュルクロルアセテート、ビュルジクロルアセテート、ビュルメトキシァセテ一 ト、ビュルブトキシアセテート、ビニルラタテート、ビュル— β—フエ-ルブチレート、ビ -ルシクロへキシルカルボキシレート等、ィタコン酸ジアルキル類:ィタコン酸ジメチル 、ィタコン酸ジェチル、ィタコン酸ジブチル等。フマール酸のジアルキルエステル類 又はモノアルキルエステル類:ジブチルフマレート等、その他、クロトン酸、ィタコン酸 、アクリロニトリル、メタタリロニトリル、マレイロ二トリル、スチレン等。 [0120] Acrylic acid esters: methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate, chloro ethino rare acrylate, 2-hydroxy ethino rare acrylate, trimethylol propane mono acrylate, benzyl acrylate, methoxy benzyl Atalylate, furfuryl acrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl acrylate, etc., methacrylic acid esters: methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, propyl methacrylate, chlorethyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate Trimethylolpropane monometatalylate, benzenoremetatalylate, methoxybenzyl methacrylate, furfuryl methacrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl methacrylate, acrylamides: acrylamide, N-alkyl Acrylamide (Alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl), N, N dialkylacrylamide, N hydroxyethyl-N-methylacrylamide, N-2-acetamidoethyl-N-acetylethylacrylamide Such. Further, as alkyloxyacrylamide, methoxymethylacrylamide, butoxymethylacrylamide, etc., methacrylamides: methacrylamide, N-alkylmethacrylamide, N-hydroxyethyl-N-methylmethacrylamide, N2-acetamidoethyl N-acetyl Merylamide, methoxymethyl methacrylamide, butoxymethyl methacrylamide, etc. allylic compounds: allylic esters (alaryl acetate, allylic acid proallyl, allylic caprylate, allylic laurate, allylic palmitate, allylic stearate, benzoic acid) Acid aryl, acetoacetyl acetate, lactyl lactate, etc.), aryloxetano mononole, etc., butyl ethers: alkyl butyl ether (hexyl vinyl ether, octino levinino leetenore, decino levinino) Leetenore, ethinorehexinorevininoreethenore, methoxetinorevininoreetenore, ethoxyethinorevininoatenore, chronoretinolinobine ether, 1 methyl 2, 2-dimethylpropyl vinyl ether, 2 ethino lebutinore vininore Tenole, hydroxyethinolevinoleateol, diethyleneglycolenovininate ether, dimethylaminoethyl vinyl ether, jetylaminoethyl vinyl ether, butinoleaminoethinolevinoleateolate, benzyl vinyl ether, tetrahydrofurfuryl bur ether, etc.) Bull esters: Bull butyrate, beluo i-butyrate, bull trimethyl acetate, vinyl jetyl acetate, belvalate, vinyl capate, bull chloracetate Over DOO, Bulle di chloroacetate, Bulle methoxy § cetearyl one , Butyl butoxyacetate, vinyl latate, bur-β-phenyl butyrate, bicyclohexyl carboxylate, etc., dialkyl itaconates: dimethyl itaconate, jetyl itaconate, dibutyl itaconate, etc. Dialkyl esters or monoalkyl esters of fumaric acid: dibutyl fumarate, etc., crotonic acid, itaconic acid, acrylonitrile, metatalonitrile, maleylnitrile, styrene, etc.
[0121] アミド基ゃ炭素数 4〜22の直鎖又は分岐アルキル基、芳香族基、 5員環以上の複 素環基を導入する場合は、上記のモノマーあるいは、その他のモノマーの中で、これ らの官能基を含有するモノマーを選択すればよ!、。例えば 5員環以上の複素環基の 導入には、 1—ビュルイミダゾールやその誘導体を用いることができる。更に、予めポ リマー中にイソシァネート基やエポキシ基を導入しておき、それらを直鎖又は分岐ァ ルキル基、芳香族基、 5員環以上の複素環基を含有するアルコール類や、ァミン類と 反応させることで、ポリマー中に各種の官能基を導入してもよい。イソシァネートゃェ ポキシを導入するには、力レンズ ΜΟΙ (昭和電工社製)ゃブレンマー G (日本油脂社 製)を用いることができる。ウレタン結合を導入することも好まし 、。  [0121] In the case of introducing a linear or branched alkyl group having 4 to 22 carbon atoms, an aromatic group, or a 5-membered or higher polycyclic group, among the above-mentioned monomers or other monomers, Choose monomers that contain these functional groups! For example, 1-Buylimidazole and its derivatives can be used to introduce a heterocyclic group having 5 or more members. Furthermore, an isocyanate group or an epoxy group is introduced into the polymer in advance, and these are combined with alcohols or amines containing a linear or branched alkyl group, an aromatic group, or a 5- or more-membered heterocyclic group. Various functional groups may be introduced into the polymer by reaction. To introduce isocyanate cyanoxy, a power lens ΜΟΙ (manufactured by Showa Denko KK) can be used as a blender G (manufactured by NOF Corporation). It is also preferable to introduce urethane bonds.
[0122] 以下に、本発明に用いるハロゲンィ匕銀調製用の両親媒性ポリマーの具体例を示す 力 本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。  [0122] The following are specific examples of the amphiphilic polymer for preparing halogenated silver used in the present invention. The present invention is not limited to these.
[0123] [化 14] [0123] [Chemical 14]
Figure imgf000042_0001
15]
Figure imgf000043_0001
Figure imgf000042_0001
15]
Figure imgf000043_0001
(重合開始剤) (Polymerization initiator)
重合開始剤としては、ァゾ系高分子重合開始剤、有機過酸ィ匕物を用いることができ る。ァゾ系高分子重合開始剤としては、日本ヒドラジン工業社製 ABN— R(2, 2' ― ァゾビスイソブチ口-トリル)、 ABN— V (2, 2' —ァゾビス(2, 4—ジメチルバレロニト リル))、 ABN— Ε (2, 2' —ァゾビス(2—メチルプチ口-トリル))等がある。又、有機 過酸ィ匕物としては、過酸化べゾィル、ジメチルェチルケトンパーオキサイド、ラウリル パーオキサイド、 日本油脂社製パーテトラ A、パーへキサ HC、パーへキサ TMH、パ 一へキサ C、 ノ 一へキサ V、 ノ 一へキサ 22、 ノ 一へキサ MC、 ノ ーブチノレ Η、 Λ—ク ミル H、パークミル P、パーメンタ H、パーォクタ H、パーブチル C、パーブチル D、パ 一へキシル D、 パーロィル IB、 ノ 一口ィル 355、 パーロイル 、パーロイル 、パーロイ ノレ SA、ナイパー BW、ナイパー BMT— K40、ナイパー ΒΜΤ— Τ40、ナイパー ΒΜ Τ—Μ、 パーロィル ΙΡΡ、 パーロィル ΝΡΡ、 パーロィル TCP、 ノ 一口ィル EEP、パー ロイル MBP、 パーロィル OPP、 パーロィル SBP、 パークミル ND、 バーオクタ ND、 ノ ーシクロ ND、パーへキシル ND、パーブチル ND、パーへキシル PV、 ノ 一へキサ 25 0、 パーォクタ 0、 パーへキシル 0、 パーブチル 0、 パーブチル IB、 パーブチル L、 ノ ーブチノレ 355、パーへキシル I、パーブチノレ I、パーブチル E、 ノ 一へキサ 25Z、パー へキサ 25MT、パーブチル A、パーへキシル Z、パーブチル ZT、パーブチル Ζ等が 挙げられる。 As the polymerization initiator, an azo polymer polymerization initiator or an organic peroxide can be used. As the azo polymer polymerization initiator, ABN-R (2, 2'-azobisisobuty-tolyl), ABN-V (2, 2'-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) manufactured by Nippon Hydrazine Kogyo Co., Ltd. )), ABN- Ε (2, 2 '-azobis (2-methyl petit-tolyl))). Organic Peroxides include benzoyl peroxide, dimethyl ethyl ketone peroxide, lauryl peroxide, Pertetra A, Perhexa HC, Perhexa TMH, Parhexa C, and Monohex, manufactured by NOF Corporation. NOxa V, NOHEXA 22, NONOHEXA MC, NOVu chinole Η, Λ—cumyl H, park mill P, permenta H, PEROCTA H, perbutyl C, perbutyl D, perhexyl D, perroyl IB, NO Nipple 355, Parroil, Parroil, Parroy Nole SA, Nyper BW, Nyper BMT—K40, Nyper ΒΜΤ— ナ イ 40, Nipper , Parroyl OPP, Parroyl SBP, Park Mill ND, Bar Octa ND, Norcyclo ND, Perhexyl ND, Perbutyl ND, Perhexyl PV , Monohexa 25 0, Peroctor 0, Perhexyl 0, Perbutyl 0, Perbutyl IB, Perbutyl L, Novutinore 355, Perhexyl I, Perbutinole I, Perbutyl E, Nohexa 25Z, Perhexa 25MT Perbutyl A, perhexyl Z, perbutyl ZT, perbutyl soot and the like.
[0126] 又、重合禁止剤としてはキノン系の禁止剤が用いられる力 ハイドロキノン、 ρ—メト キシフエノールが挙げられる。セイコーケミカル社製フエノチアジン、メトキノン、ノンフ レックスアルノ 、 ΜΗ (メチルハイドロキノン)、 TBH (t ブチルハイドロキノン)、 PBQ (p ベンゾキノン)、トルキノン、 TBQ (t—ブチル p ベンゾキノン)、 2, 5ジフエ- ル p ベンゾキノン等が挙げられる。  [0126] Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone and ρ-methoxyphenol, which are quinone-based inhibitors. Seiko Chemical's phenothiazine, methoquinone, non-flex arno, ΜΗ (methylhydroquinone), TBH (t-butylhydroquinone), PBQ (p-benzoquinone), tolquinone, TBQ (t-butyl-p-benzoquinone), 2,5-diphenyl p-benzoquinone Etc.
[0127] ポリマーの等電点は pH6以下であることが好ましい。等電点が高いポリマーを用い ると、後述するように、凝集沈殿法により、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の脱塩を行う時、ハロゲ ン化銀粒子の分解を促進し、写真性能に悪影響を与えるからである。又、溶剤中に ノ、ロゲンィ匕銀微粒子を分散する時にも pHを上げないと分散させ 1 、カプリの観点 力 好ましくない。ポリマーの等電点の測定は、例えば等電点電気泳動法や、 1%水 溶液をカチオン及びァ-オン交換樹脂の混床カラムに通した後の pHを測定する。  [0127] The isoelectric point of the polymer is preferably pH 6 or less. If a polymer with a high isoelectric point is used, as will be described later, when desalting of silver halide silver particles by the coagulation precipitation method, decomposition of the silver halide grains is promoted, and photographic performance is adversely affected. It is. In addition, when dispersing the silver or silver oxide fine particles in the solvent, it is necessary to disperse unless the pH is raised. The isoelectric point of the polymer is measured by, for example, isoelectric focusing or measuring the pH after passing a 1% aqueous solution through a mixed bed column of cation and cation exchange resin.
[0128] ポリマーの等電点を下げるため、各種の酸性基を導入することができる。例としては 、カルボキシル基やスルホ基が挙げられる。カルボキシル基の導入には、アクリル酸 、メタクリル酸のモノマーを用いる他、メタクリル酸メチル等を含有するポリマーを、一 部加水分解して得ることも可能である。カルボキシル基の導入には、スチレンスルホ ン酸ゃ 2 -アクリルアミド 2—メチルプロパンスルホン酸をモノマーとして用 、る他、 各種硫酸ィ匕の手法でポリマー作製後に導入することもできる。特にカルボン酸を用い ると、未中和の状態で溶媒に対する溶解性が比較的高ぐ中和ないし半中和にする ことで水溶性に性質を変えることができ特に好ましい。中和はナトリウムやカリウム塩 で行うこともでき、アンモニアやモノエタノールァミン、ジエタノールァミン、トリエタノー ルァミン等の有機塩としてもよい。イミダゾール類ゃトリアゾール類、アミドアミン類を 用いることちでさる。 [0128] Various acidic groups can be introduced to lower the isoelectric point of the polymer. Examples include a carboxyl group and a sulfo group. In addition to using monomers of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid for introducing a carboxyl group, a polymer containing methyl methacrylate or the like can be obtained by partially hydrolyzing. For introduction of carboxyl group, styrene sulfo In addition to using 2-acrylamide-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid as a monomer, it can also be introduced after polymer preparation by various sulfuric acid methods. In particular, the use of a carboxylic acid is particularly preferable because the property can be changed to water-soluble by neutralization or semi-neutralization in which the solubility in a solvent is relatively high in an unneutralized state. Neutralization can be carried out with sodium or potassium salts, and organic salts such as ammonia, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine and the like may be used. Imidazoles, triazoles and amidoamines can be used.
[0129] 重合は、溶媒の存在下又は不存在下の何れでも実施できる力 作業性の点から溶 媒存在下の場合の方が好ましい。なお、好ましい溶媒としては、エタノール、 i プロ ピルアルコール、ブタノール、 i—ブタノール、 t—ブタノール等のアルコール類、ァセ トン、メチルェチルケトン、メチルー iーブチルケトン、メチルアミルケトン等のケトン類、 酢酸メチル、酢酸ェチル、酢酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸ェチル、乳酸ブチル等の エステル類、 2—ォキシプロピオン酸メチル、 2—ォキシプロピオン酸ェチル、 2—ォ キシプロピオン酸プロピル、 2—ォキシプロピオン酸ブチル、 2—メトキシプロピオン酸 メチル、 2—メトキシプロピオン酸ェチル、 2—メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、 2—メトキ シプロピ  [0129] Polymerization is preferably carried out in the presence of a solvent from the viewpoint of workability that can be carried out in the presence or absence of a solvent. Preferred solvents include alcohols such as ethanol, i-propyl alcohol, butanol, i-butanol, and t-butanol, ketones such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl-i-butyl ketone, and methyl amyl ketone, and acetic acid. Esters such as methyl, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, and butyl lactate, methyl 2-oxypropionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate, 2-oxypropion Acid butyl, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2-methoxypropionate
オン酸ブチル等のモノカルボン酸エステル類、ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメチルスルホ キシド、 N メチルピロリドン等の極性溶媒、メチルセ口ソルブ、セロソルブ、ブチルセ 口ソルブ、ブチルカルビトール、ェチルセ口ソルブアセテート等のエーテル類、プロピ レングリコール、プロピレングリコーノレモノメチノレエーテル、プロピレングリコーノレモノメ チノレエーテノレアセテート、プロピレングリコーノレモノェチノレエーテノレアセテート、プロ ピレンダリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート等のプロピレングリコール類及びその エステル類、 1, 1, 1 トリクロルエタン、クロ口ホルム等のハロゲン系溶媒、テトラヒド 口フラン、ジォキサン等のエーテル類、ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン等の芳香族類、 更にパーフロロオクタン、パーフロロトリブチルァミン等の弗素ィ匕イナ一トリキッド類等 が挙げられる。  Monocarboxylic acid esters such as butyl onate, polar solvents such as dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, ethers such as methyl solvosolve, cellosolve, butylcerosolve, butyl carbitol, ethylcetosolve sorb acetate, propylene Propylene glycols such as lenglycol, propylene glycolenomonomethylenole ether, propylene glycolenomonoethylenoate acetate, propylene glycolenomonoethylenoate acetate, propylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, and esters thereof, 1, 1, 1 Halogen solvents such as trichloroethane and chloroform, ethers such as tetrahydrfuran and dioxane, aromatics such as benzene, toluene and xylene, and perfluoro Tan, fluorine I spoon Ina one Torikiddo such as perfluoro tributyl § Min, and the like.
[0130] 各モノマーの重合性に応じ、反応容器にモノマーと開始剤を滴下しながら重合する 滴下重合法なども、均一な組成のポリマーを得るために有効である。カラム濾過、再 沈精製、溶媒抽出などによって除去することで、未反応モノマーを除去できる。ある いは、低沸点の未反応モノマーはストリツビングにより除去することが可能である。 [0130] Depending on the polymerizability of each monomer, a dropping polymerization method in which a monomer and an initiator are added dropwise to a reaction vessel is also effective for obtaining a polymer having a uniform composition. Column filtration, re- Unreacted monomer can be removed by removal by precipitation purification, solvent extraction or the like. Alternatively, low-boiling unreacted monomers can be removed by stripping.
[0131] (化学増感、分光増感、強色増感)  [0131] (Chemical sensitization, spectral sensitization, supersensitization)
感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子には化学増感を施すことができる。例えば特開 2001— 2 49428号及び同 2001— 249426号に記載される方法等により、硫黄、セレン、テル ル等のカルコゲンを放出する化合物や金イオンなどの貴金属イオンを放出する貴金 属化合物の利用により、感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子又は当該粒子上の分光増感色素 の光励起によって生じた電子又は正孔 (ホール)を捕獲することができる化学増感中 心 (化学増感核)を形成付与できる。特に、カルコゲン原子を含有する有機増感剤に より化学増感されて 、るのが好まし 、。  The photosensitive silver halide grains can be chemically sensitized. For example, by a method described in JP-A-2001-249428 and 2001-249426, a compound that releases chalcogens such as sulfur, selenium, and tellurium, and a noble metal compound that releases noble metal ions such as gold ions. Use to form a chemical sensitization center (chemical sensitization nucleus) capable of capturing electrons or holes generated by photoexcitation of photosensitive silver halide grains or spectral sensitizing dyes on the grains. it can. In particular, it is preferably chemically sensitized by an organic sensitizer containing a chalcogen atom.
[0132] これらカルコゲン原子を含有する有機増感剤は、ハロゲンィ匕銀へ吸着可能な基と 不安定カルコゲン原子部位を有する化合物であることが好まし 、。これらの有機増感 剤としては、特開昭 60— 150046号、特開平 4— 109240号、同 11— 218874号、 同 11— 218875号、同 11— 218876号、同 11— 194447号等に開示される種々の 構造を有する有機増感剤を用いることができるが、それらの内、カルコゲン原子が炭 素原子又は燐原子と二重結合で結ばれている構造を有する化合物の少なくとも 1種 であることが好ましい。特に、複素環基を有するチォ尿素誘導体及びトリフエ-ルホス フィンサルファイド誘導体等が好ましい。化学増感を施す方法としては、従来の湿式 処理用のハロゲン化銀感光材料の製造の際に慣用されている種々の化学増感技術 に準じた技術が使用できる(T. H. James編" The Theory of the Photograph ic Process"第 4版, Macmillan PublishingCo. , Ltd. 1977、日本写真学会編 "写真工学の基礎 (銀塩写真編),コロナ社, 1979参照)。特に、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子 乳剤に予め化学増感を施し、その後に非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子と混合 する場合には、従来の慣用方法により化学増感を施すことができる。  [0132] The organic sensitizer containing a chalcogen atom is preferably a compound having a group capable of adsorbing to halogenated silver and an unstable chalcogen atom site. These organic sensitizers are disclosed in JP-A-60-150046, JP-A-4-109240, JP-A-11-218874, JP-A-11-218875, JP-A-11-218876, JP-A-11-194447, etc. Organic sensitizers having various structures can be used, and among them, at least one compound having a structure in which a chalcogen atom is bonded to a carbon atom or a phosphorus atom by a double bond It is preferable. In particular, a thiourea derivative having a heterocyclic group and a triphenylphosphine sulfide derivative are preferred. As a method for chemical sensitization, techniques according to various chemical sensitization techniques conventionally used in the production of silver halide light-sensitive materials for conventional wet processing can be used (TH James edition “The Theory of”). the Photograph ic Process "4th edition, Macmillan Publishing Co., Ltd. 1977, edited by the Japan Society of Photography," Basics of Photographic Engineering (Silver Salt Photography), Corona, 1979). When sensitized and then mixed with non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles, chemical sensitization can be performed by a conventional method.
[0133] 有機増感剤としてのカルコゲンィ匕合物の使用量は、使用するカルコゲン化合物、ハ ロゲン化銀粒子、化学増感を施す際の反応環境などにより変わるが、ハロゲンィ匕銀 1 モル当たり、 10— 8〜: L0— 2モルが好ましぐより好ましくは 10— 7〜: L0— 3モルを用いる。 [0133] The amount of chalcogen compound used as an organic sensitizer varies depending on the chalcogen compound used, silver halide grains, the reaction environment during chemical sensitization, etc. 10- 8 ~: L0- 2 more preferably moles preferably fixture 10- 7 ~: L0- 3 molar is used.
[0134] 化学増感を施す際の環境条件としては特に制限はないが、感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀粒 子上のカルコゲンィ匕銀又は銀核を消滅あるいは、それ等の大きさを減少させ得るィ匕 合物の存在下において、又、特に銀核を酸化し得る酸化剤の共存下において、カル コゲン原子を含有する有機増感剤を用いてカルコゲン増感を施すことが好ま 、場 合がある。この場合の増感条件は、 pAgとしては 6〜: L1が好ましぐより好ましくは 7〜 10であり、 pHは 4〜10が好ましぐより好ましくは 5〜8、又、温度としては 30°C以下 で増感を施すことが好まし 、。 [0134] There are no particular restrictions on the environmental conditions for chemical sensitization, but photosensitive halogen silver halide grains. Chalcogen atoms in the presence of compounds that can annihilate or reduce the size of their chalcogen silver or silver nuclei, and in particular in the presence of oxidizing agents that can oxidize silver nuclei. It may be preferable to perform chalcogen sensitization using an organic sensitizer containing benzene. The sensitizing conditions in this case are 6 to pAg: 7 to 10, more preferably 7 to 10, pH 5 to 8 is more preferably 4 to 10, and 30 to 30. It is preferable to apply sensitization at a temperature below ° C.
[0135] これらの有機増感剤を用いたィ匕学増感は、分光増感色素又はハロゲンィ匕銀粒子に 対して吸着性を有するヘテロ原子含有化合物の存在下で行われることが好ましい。 ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子に吸着性を有する化合物の存在下でィ匕学増感を行うことで、化学 増感中心核の分散化を防ぐことができ、高感度、低カプリを達成できる。分光増感色 素については後述するが、ハロゲンィ匕銀に吸着性を有するヘテロ原子含有ィ匕合物と しては、特開平 3 - 24537号に記載されて 、る含窒素複素環化合物が好ま 、例と して挙げられる。含窒素複素環化合物において、複素環としては、例えばピラゾール 、ピリミジン、 1, 2, 4—トリァゾール、 1, 2, 3—トリァゾール、 1, 3, 4—チアジアゾー ル、 1, 2, 3—チアジアゾール、 1, 2, 4ーチアジアゾール、 1, 2, 5—チアジアゾー ル、 1, 2, 3, 4—テ卜ラゾール、ピリダジン、 1, 2, 3—卜リアジン環、これらの環力 〜 3個結合した環、例えばトリァゾロトリアゾール、ジァザインデン、トリアザインデン、ぺ ンタザインデン環などを挙げることができる。単環の複素環と芳香族環の縮合した複 素環、例えばフタラジン、ベンズイミダゾール、インダゾール、ベンズチアゾール環な ども適用できる。 [0135] The optical sensitization using these organic sensitizers is preferably performed in the presence of a heteroatom-containing compound having adsorptivity to the spectral sensitizing dye or the halogen silver halide particles. By performing chemical sensitization in the presence of a compound having adsorptivity to the silver halide silver particles, dispersion of the chemically sensitized central core can be prevented, and high sensitivity and low capri can be achieved. Spectral sensitizing dyes will be described later, but nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds described in JP-A No. 3-24537 are preferred as heteroatom-containing compounds having adsorptivity to halogenated silver. As an example. In the nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, examples of the heterocyclic ring include pyrazole, pyrimidine, 1,2,4-triazole, 1,2,3-triazole, 1,3,4-thiadiazole, 1,2,3-thiadiazole, 1, 2, 4-thiadiazole, 1, 2, 5-thiadiazole, 1, 2, 3, 4-tetrazole, pyridazine, 1, 2, 3-thiadiazine ring, these ring forces ~ 3 bonded Examples of the ring include triazolotriazole, diazaindene, triazaindene, and pentazaindene rings. A heterocyclic ring condensed with a monocyclic heterocyclic ring and an aromatic ring, for example, phthalazine, benzimidazole, indazole, benzthiazole ring and the like can also be applied.
[0136] これらの中で好ましいのはァザインデン環であり、かつ置換基としてヒドロキシル基 を有するァザインデン化合物、例えばヒドロキシトリアザインデン、テトラヒドロキシァザ インデン、ヒドロキシペンタザインデンィ匕合物等が更に好ま U、。  [0136] Among these, azaindene ring is preferable, and an azaindene compound having a hydroxyl group as a substituent, for example, hydroxytriazaindene, tetrahydroxyazaindene, hydroxypentazaindene compound and the like are more preferable. U ,.
[0137] 複素環にはヒドロキシル基以外の置換基を有してもよい。該置換基としては、例え ばアルキル基、置換アルキル基、アルキルチオ基、アミノ基、ヒドロキシァミノ基、アル キルアミノ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、ァリールアミノ基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシ力 ルボニル基、ハロゲン原子、シァノ基などを有してもよい。  [0137] The heterocyclic ring may have a substituent other than a hydroxyl group. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, a substituted alkyl group, an alkylthio group, an amino group, a hydroxyamino group, an alkylamino group, a dialkylamino group, an arylamino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxy group, a carbonyl group, a halogen atom, and a cyano group. And so on.
[0138] これら含複素環化合物の添加量は、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の大きさや組成その他の条 件等に応じて広い範囲に亘つて変化する力 大凡の量はハロゲンィ匕銀 1モル当たり 1 0一6〜 1モルの範囲であり、好ましくは 10— 4〜101モルの範囲である。 [0138] The amount of the heterocyclic compound added depends on the size, composition, and other conditions of the halogenated silver particles. The amount of force approximate to Wataru connexion vary over a wide range depending on the matter or the like is in the range of 1 0 one 6 -1 mole per Harogeni匕銀1 mol, preferably 10 4 to 1 0 - is 1 mols .
[0139] 感光性ハロゲン化銀には、金イオン等の貴金属イオンを放出する化合物を利用し て貴金属増感を施すことができる。例えば金増感剤として、塩化金酸塩や有機金化 合物が利用できる。なお、特開平 11— 194447号に開示される金増感技術が参考と なる。  [0139] The photosensitive silver halide can be subjected to noble metal sensitization by using a compound that releases noble metal ions such as gold ions. For example, chloroaurate and organic gold compounds can be used as gold sensitizers. The gold sensitization technique disclosed in JP-A-11-194447 is a reference.
[0140] 又、上記の増感法の他、還元増感法等も用いることができ、還元増感の貝体的な 化合物として、ァスコルビン酸、 2酸ィ匕チォ尿素、塩化第 1錫、ヒドラジン誘導体、ボラ ン化合物、シランィ匕合物、ポリアミンィ匕合物等を用いることができる。又、乳剤の pHを 7以上又は pAgを 8. 3以下に保持して熟成することにより還元増感することができる。  [0140] In addition to the above-described sensitization methods, reduction sensitization methods and the like can also be used. As a shell-like compound for reduction sensitization, ascorbic acid, diacid thiourea, stannous chloride, A hydrazine derivative, a borane compound, a silane compound, a polyamine compound, or the like can be used. Further, reduction sensitization can be performed by ripening the emulsion while maintaining the pH at 7 or more or pAg at 8.3 or less.
[0141] 本発明にお ヽて、化学増感を施されるハロゲンィ匕銀粒子は、脂肪族カルボン酸銀 塩の存在下で形成されたのでも、当該脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩の存在しな 、条件下 で形成されたものでも、又、両者が混合されたものでもよい。  [0141] In the present invention, the silver halide grains subjected to chemical sensitization were formed in the presence of an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt, but the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt was not present. It may be formed under conditions, or a mixture of both.
[0142] 感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子の表面に化学増感を施した場合においては、熱現像過 程経過後に該化学増感の効果が実質的に消失することが好ましい。ここで、化学増 感の効果が実質的に消失するとは、前記の化学増感技術によって得た当該イメージ ング材料の感度が熱現像過程経過後に化学増感を施して!/ヽな 、場合の感度の 1. 1 倍以下に減少することを言う。なお、化学増感効果を熱現像過程において消失させ るためには、熱現像時に、化学増感中心 (化学増感核)を酸ィ匕反応によって破壊でき る酸化剤、例えば前記のハロゲンラジカル放出性ィ匕合物等の適当量を当該イメージ ング材料の乳剤層又は Z及び非感光性層に含有させておくことが必要である。当該 酸化剤の含有量については、酸化剤の酸化力、化学増感効果の減少幅等を考慮し て調整することが好ましい。  [0142] When the surface of the photosensitive silver halide grains is chemically sensitized, it is preferable that the chemical sensitization effect substantially disappears after the thermal development process. Here, the effect of chemical sensitization substantially disappears when the sensitivity of the imaging material obtained by the chemical sensitization technique is chemically sensitized after the thermal development process! / Sensitive, say that the sensitivity decreases to 1.1 times or less. In order to eliminate the chemical sensitization effect in the heat development process, an oxidant that can destroy the chemical sensitization center (chemical sensitization nucleus) by an acid-oxidation reaction at the time of heat development, for example, release of the above-mentioned halogen radicals. It is necessary to add an appropriate amount of the organic compound or the like to the emulsion layer or Z and the non-photosensitive layer of the imaging material. The content of the oxidant is preferably adjusted in consideration of the oxidizing power of the oxidant, the decrease in the chemical sensitization effect, and the like.
[0143] 感光性ハロゲン化銀には、分光増感色素を吸着させ分光増感を施すことが好まし い。分光増感色素としてシァニン色素、メロシアニン色素、コンプレックスシァニン色 素、コンプレックスメロシアニン色素、ホロポーラーシァニン色素、スチリル色素、へミ シァニン色素、ォキソノール色素、へミオキソノール色素等を用いることができる。例 えば特開昭 63— 159841号、同 60— 140335号、同 63— 231437号、同 63— 259 651号、同 63— 304242号、同 63— 15245号、米国特許 4, 639, 414号、同 4, 7 40, 455号、同 4, 741, 966号、同 4, 751, 175号、同 4, 835, 096号に記載され た増感色素が使用できる。 [0143] The photosensitive silver halide is preferably subjected to spectral sensitization by adsorbing a spectral sensitizing dye. As the spectral sensitizing dye, cyanine dyes, merocyanine dyes, complex cyanine dyes, complex merocyanine dyes, holopolar cyanine dyes, styryl dyes, hemiyanine dyes, oxonol dyes, hemioxonol dyes, and the like can be used. For example, JP-A-63-159841, 60-140335, 63-231437, 63-259 651, 63-304242, 63-15245, U.S. Patents 4, 639, 414, 4, 7 40, 455, 4, 741, 966, 4, 751, 175, Sensitizing dyes described in US Pat. No. 4,835,096 can be used.
[0144] 本発明に使用される有用な増感色素は、例えばリサーチ ·ディスクロージャー(以下 、 RDと略す) 17643IV— A項(1978年 12月 23頁)、 RD18431X項(1978年 8月 4 37頁)に記載もしくは引用された文献に記載されている。特に、各種レーザーィメー ジャーやスキャナーの光源の分光特性に適した分光感度を有する増感色素を用いる の力 S好まし ヽ。 ί列えば、、特開平 9 34078号、同 9 54409号、同 9 80679号に 記載の化合物が好ましく用 、られる。  [0144] Useful sensitizing dyes used in the present invention include, for example, Research Disclosure (hereinafter abbreviated as RD) 17643IV—A (December 23, 1978), RD18431X (August 1978 4 page 37) ) Is described in the literature described or cited. In particular, the power of using sensitizing dyes with spectral sensitivity suitable for the spectral characteristics of various laser imagers and scanner light sources is preferred. For example, the compounds described in JP-A Nos. 934078, 954409, and 980679 are preferably used.
[0145] 有用なシァニン色素は、例えばチアゾリン核、ォキサゾリン核、ピロリン核、ピリジン 核、ォキサゾール核、チアゾール核、セレナゾール核及びイミダゾール核などの塩基 性核を有するシァニン色素である。有用なメロシアニン染料で好ましいものは、上記 の塩基性核に加えて、チォヒダントイン核、ローダニン核、ォキサゾリジンジオン核、 チアゾリンジオン核、バルビツール酸核、チアゾリノン核、マロノ-トリル核及びピラゾ ロン核などの酸性核も含む。  [0145] Useful cyanine dyes are cyanine dyes having basic nuclei such as thiazoline nucleus, oxazoline nucleus, pyrroline nucleus, pyridine nucleus, oxazole nucleus, thiazole nucleus, selenazole nucleus and imidazole nucleus. In addition to the basic nuclei described above, preferred merocyanine dyes are preferably thiohydantoin, rhodanine, oxazolidinedione, thiazolinedione, barbituric acid, thiazolinone, malono-tolyl and pyrazo. Includes acidic nuclei such as Ron nuclei.
[0146] 本発明においては、特に赤外に分光感度を有する増感色素を用いることもできる。  [0146] In the present invention, a sensitizing dye having spectral sensitivity particularly in the infrared can also be used.
好ましく用いられる赤外分光増感色素としては、例えば米国特許 4, 536, 473号、 同 4, 515, 888号、同 4, 959, 294号等に開示される赤外分光増感色素が挙げら れる。  Examples of infrared spectral sensitizing dyes preferably used include infrared spectral sensitizing dyes disclosed in US Pat. Nos. 4,536,473, 4,515,888, and 4,959,294. It is
[0147] 本発明の熱現像感光材料においては、特開 2004— 309758号に記載されている ような下記一般式 (SD1)で表される増感色素及び下記一般式 (SD2)で表される増 感色素の中力も少なくとも 1種を選び含有することが好ま 、。  In the photothermographic material of the present invention, the sensitizing dye represented by the following general formula (SD1) and the following general formula (SD2) as described in JP-A-2004-309758 It is preferable that at least one sensitizing dye is selected and contained.
[0148] [化 16] 一般式 (SD1) [0148] [Chemical 16] General formula (SD1)
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000050_0001
[0149] 式中、 Y及び Yは各々、酸素原子、硫黄原子、セレン原子又は CH=CH 基 [0149] In the formula, Y and Y are each an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, or a CH = CH group.
1 2  1 2
を表し、 L 〜Lは各々メチン基を表す。 R1及び R2は各々、脂肪族基を表す。 R3及び L to L each represent a methine group. R 1 and R 2 each represent an aliphatic group. R 3 and
1 9  1 9
R4は各々、低級アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アルケニル基、ァラルキル基、ァリー ル基又は複素環基を表す。 W、 W 、 W、 Wは各々、水素原子、置換基、あるいは R 4 each represents a lower alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. W, W, W, and W are each a hydrogen atom, a substituent, or
1 2 3 4  1 2 3 4
Wと W、 Wと Wの間で結合して縮合環を形成するのに必要な非金属原子群を表 A group of nonmetallic atoms necessary to form a condensed ring by bonding between W and W or W and W.
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
す。あるいは R3と W 、 R3と W、 R4と R3、 R4と Wの間で結合して 5又は 6員の縮合環を The Or R 3 and W, R 3 and W, R 4 and R 3 , R 4 and W
1 2 4  1 2 4
形成するのに必要な非金属原子群を表す。 X  Represents a group of non-metallic atoms necessary to form. X
1は分子内の電荷を相殺するに必要な イオンを表し、 klは分子内の電荷を相殺するに必要なイオンの数を表す。 mlは 0又 は 1を表し、 nl及び n2は各々 0、 1又は 2を表す。ただし、 nlと n2は同時に 0とはなら ない。  1 represents the ions necessary to cancel the charge in the molecule, and kl represents the number of ions required to cancel the charge in the molecule. ml represents 0 or 1; nl and n2 each represents 0, 1 or 2; However, nl and n2 are not 0 at the same time.
[0150] 上記の赤外増感色素は、例えばエフ'ェム 'ノヽ一マー著: The Chemistry of H eterocyciic し ompounds, ^¾18^, The Cyanme Dyes and Related し o mpounds (A. Weissberger ed. Interscience社干 (J, New York, 1964年)【こ g己 載の方法によって容易に合成することができる。  [0150] The above infrared sensitizing dyes are, for example, the authors of F'Nom's: The Chemistry of Heterociciic and ompounds, ^ ¾18 ^, The Cyanme Dyes and Related and o mpounds (A. Weissberger ed. Interscience Company dried (J, New York, 1964) [It can be easily synthesized by this method.
[0151] これらの赤外増感色素の添加時期はハロゲンィ匕銀調製後の任意の時期でよぐ例 えば溶剤に添加して、あるいは微粒子状に分散した、いわゆる固体分散状態でハロ ゲンィ匕銀粒子あるいはハロゲンィ匕銀粒子 Z脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子を含有する 感光性乳剤に添加できる。又、前記のハロゲンィ匕銀粒子に対し吸着性を有するへテ 口原子含有化合物と同様に、化学増感に先立ってハロゲンィ匕銀粒子に添加し吸着さ せた後、化学増感を施すこともでき、これにより化学増感中心核の分散化を防ぐこと が出来、高感度、低カプリを達成できる。 [0151] These infrared sensitizing dyes may be added at any time after the preparation of halogen silver, for example, added to a solvent or dispersed in the form of fine particles in a so-called solid dispersion state. It can be added to a light-sensitive emulsion containing grains or halogenated silver grains Z aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt grains. Similarly to the compound containing a helium atom having an adsorptivity to the above-described halogen silver particles, it is added to the halogen silver particles prior to chemical sensitization and adsorbed. Then, chemical sensitization can be performed, which can prevent dispersion of the chemical sensitization central core and achieve high sensitivity and low capri.
[0152] 上記の分光増感色素は 1種類を単独に用いてもよいが、上述のように、分光増感色 素の複数の種類の組合せを用いることが好ましぐそのような増感色素の組合せは、 特に強色増感及び感光波長領域の拡大や調整等の目的でしばしば用いられる。  [0152] The above-mentioned spectral sensitizing dye may be used alone, but as described above, it is preferable to use a combination of plural kinds of spectral sensitizing dyes. This combination is often used for the purpose of supersensitization and enlargement or adjustment of the photosensitive wavelength region.
[0153] 熱現像感光材料に用いられる感光性ハロゲン化銀、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩を含有 する乳剤は、増感色素と共に、それ自身分光増感作用を持たない色素あるいは可視 光を実質的に吸収しな 、物質であって、強色増感効果を発現する物質を乳剤中に 含ませ、これによりハロゲンィ匕銀粒子が強色増感されてもよ!、。  [0153] Emulsions containing photosensitive silver halides and aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salts used in heat-developable photosensitive materials, together with sensitizing dyes, substantially do not have a spectral sensitizing action themselves or visible light. A substance that does not absorb and exhibits a supersensitizing effect may be included in the emulsion, so that the silver halide grains may be supersensitized!
[0154] 有用な増感色素、強色増感を示す色素の組合せ及び強色増感を示す物質は、 R D17643 (1978年 12月発行), 23頁 IVの J項、あるいは特公平 9— 25500号、同 43 —4933号、特開昭 59— 19032号、同 59— 192242号、特開平 5— 341432号等 に記載されるが、強色増感剤としては、下記で表される複素芳香族メルカプト化合物 又はメルカプト誘導体ィ匕合物が好ま 、。  [0154] Useful sensitizing dyes, combinations of dyes exhibiting supersensitization, and substances exhibiting supersensitization are described in RD17643 (issued in December 1978), page J, Section IV, or Japanese Patent Publication 9- No. 25500, No. 43-4933, JP-A-59-19032, JP-A-59-192242, JP-A-5-341432, and the like. Aromatic mercapto compounds or mercapto derivative compounds are preferred.
[0155] Ar-SM  [0155] Ar-SM
式中、 Mは水素原子又はアルカリ金属原子であり、 Arは 1個以上の窒素、硫黄、酸 素、セレニウム、又はテルリウム原子を有する芳香環又は縮合芳香環である。複素芳 香環として好ましくは、ベンズイミダゾール、ナフトイミダゾール、ベンゾチアゾール、 ナフトチアゾーノレ、ベンズォキサゾール、ナフトォキサゾール、ベンゾセレナゾール、 ベンゾテルラゾール、イミダゾール、ォキサゾール、ピラゾール、トリァゾール、トリアジ ン、ピリミジン、ピリダジン、ピラジン、ピリジン、プリン、キノリン、又はキナゾリンである。 しかしながら、他の複素芳香環も含まれる。  In the formula, M is a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal atom, and Ar is an aromatic ring or condensed aromatic ring having one or more nitrogen, sulfur, oxygen, selenium, or tellurium atoms. The heteroaromatic ring is preferably benzimidazole, naphthimidazole, benzothiazole, naphthothiazole, benzoxazole, naphthoxazole, benzoselenazole, benzotelrazole, imidazole, oxazole, pyrazole, triazole, triazine. , Pyrimidine, pyridazine, pyrazine, pyridine, purine, quinoline, or quinazoline. However, other heteroaromatic rings are also included.
[0156] なお、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩又はハロゲン化銀粒子乳剤の分散物中に含有させた 時に実質的に上記のメルカプト化合物を生成するメルカプト誘導体化合物も含まれ る。特に下記で表されるメルカプト誘導体ィ匕合物が、好ましい例として挙げられる。  [0156] Mercapto derivative compounds that substantially produce the above mercapto compounds when contained in a dispersion of an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt or a silver halide grain emulsion are also included. In particular, preferred examples include mercapto derivative compounds represented by the following.
[0157] Ar-S-S -Ar  [0157] Ar-S-S -Ar
式中、 Arは上記で表されたメルカプトィ匕合物の場合と同義である。  In the formula, Ar has the same meaning as in the case of the mercaptoic compound represented above.
[0158] 上記の複素芳香環は、例えばハロゲン原子 (塩素、臭素、沃素)、ヒドロキシル基、 アミノ基、カルボキシル基、アルキル基(1個以上の炭素原子、好ましくは 1〜4個の炭 素原子を有するもの)及びアルコキシ基(1個以上の炭素原子、好ましくは、 1〜4個 の炭素原子を有するもの)から成る群から選ばれる置換基を有し得る。 [0158] The above heteroaromatic ring includes, for example, a halogen atom (chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, Amino group, carboxyl group, alkyl group (having 1 or more carbon atoms, preferably having 1 to 4 carbon atoms) and alkoxy group (1 or more carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms) It may have a substituent selected from the group consisting of those having atoms.
[0159] 上記の強色増感剤の他に、特開 2001— 330918号に開示されるへテロ原子を有 する大環状ィ匕合物も強色増感剤として使用できる。  [0159] In addition to the supersensitizer described above, a macrocyclic compound having a heteroatom disclosed in JP-A-2001-330918 can also be used as the supersensitizer.
[0160] 強色増感剤は、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩及びハロゲンィ匕銀粒子を含む感光性層中 に銀 1モル当たり 0. 001〜1. 0モルで用いるのが好ましい。特に好ましくは、銀 1モ ル当たり 0. 01〜0. 5モルである。  [0160] The supersensitizer is preferably used in a photosensitive layer containing an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt and a silver halide silver particle in an amount of 0.001 to 1.0 mol per mol of silver. Particularly preferred is 0.01 to 0.5 mole per silver mole.
[0161] 本発明においては、感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の表面に分光増感色素を吸着せし め分光増感が施されており、かつ熱現像過程経過後に該分光増感効果が実質的に 消失することが好ましい。ここで、分光増感効果が実質的に消失するとは、増感色素 、強色増感剤等によって得た当該イメージング材料の感度が熱現像経過後に分光 増感を施して 、な 、場合の感度の 1. 1倍以下に減少することを言う。  [0161] In the present invention, spectral sensitization is performed by adsorbing a spectral sensitizing dye to the surface of photosensitive halogen silver halide grains, and the spectral sensitization effect is substantially reduced after the thermal development process. It is preferable to disappear. Here, the spectral sensitization effect substantially disappears when the sensitivity of the imaging material obtained with a sensitizing dye, supersensitizer, etc. is spectrally sensitized after the thermal development, 1. It means to decrease to less than 1 times.
[0162] なお、分光増感効果を熱現像過程において消失させるためには、熱現像時に、熱 によってハロゲンィ匕銀粒子より脱離し易い分光増感色素を使用する又は Z及び分光 増感色素を酸ィ匕反応によって破壊できる酸化剤、例えば前記のハロゲンラジカル放 出性化合物等の適当量を当該イメージング材料の乳剤層又は Z及び非感光性層に 含有含有させておくことが必要である。当該酸化剤の含有量については、酸化剤の 酸ィ匕力、分光増感効果の減少幅等を考慮して調整することが好ましい。  [0162] In order to eliminate the spectral sensitization effect in the thermal development process, a spectral sensitizing dye that is easily detached from the halogenated silver particles by heat is used during thermal development, or Z and the spectral sensitizing dye are acidified. It is necessary to contain an appropriate amount of an oxidizing agent that can be destroyed by the reaction, such as the halogen radical-releasing compound, in the emulsion layer or Z and the non-photosensitive layer of the imaging material. The content of the oxidizing agent is preferably adjusted in consideration of the oxidizing power of the oxidizing agent, the reduction range of the spectral sensitization effect, and the like.
[0163] (色調調整剤)  [0163] (Color tone adjusting agent)
次に、熱現像感光材料を熱現像処理して得られる画像の色調にっ ヽて述べる。  Next, the color tone of an image obtained by thermally developing a photothermographic material will be described.
[0164] 従来のレントゲン写真フィルムのような医療診断用の出力画像の色調に関しては、 冷調の画像調子の方が、判読者にとってより的確な診断観察結果が得易いと言われ ている。ここで冷調な画像調子とは、純黒調もしくは黒画像が青味を帯びた青黒調で あることを言う。一方、温調な画像調子とは、黒画像が褐色味を帯びた温黒調である と言われているが、より厳密な定量的な議論ができるように、以下、国際照明委員会( CIE)の推奨する表現法に基づき説明する。  [0164] Regarding the color tone of an output image for medical diagnosis such as a conventional X-ray photographic film, it is said that a cold tone image tone is easier for a reader to obtain a more accurate diagnostic observation result. Here, the cool image tone means a pure black tone or a bluish black tone of a black image. On the other hand, a warm image tone is said to be a dark black tone with a black image, but in order to allow a more precise quantitative discussion, the International Lighting Commission (CIE) ), Based on the recommended expression.
[0165] 色調に関しての用語「より冷調」及び「より温調」は、最低濃度 Dmin及び光学濃度 D= l. 0における色相角 habにより表現できる。即ち、色相角 habは、国際照明委員 会(CIE)が 1976年に推奨した知覚的にほぼ均等な歩度を持つ色空間である L*aV 色空間の色座標 a*、 b*を用いて次の式によって求める。 [0165] The terms "more cold" and "more warm" in terms of color tone refer to the minimum density Dmin and optical density. It can be expressed by the hue angle hab at D = l. That is, the hue angle hab is calculated using the color coordinates a * and b * of the L * aV color space, which is a color space with a perceptually uniform rate recommended by the International Commission on Illumination (CIE) in 1976. It is calculated by the following formula.
[0166] (式) hab =tan—l (b*Za*)  [0166] (Formula) hab = tan—l (b * Za *)
上記色相角に基づく表現法により検討した結果、本発明の熱現像感光材料の現像 後の色調は、色相角 habの範囲が 180度く habく 270度であることが好ましぐ更に 好ましくは 200度く habく 270度、最も好ましくは 220度く habく 260度であることが 判った。このことは、特開 2002— 6463号に開示されている。  As a result of examination by the expression method based on the hue angle, it is preferable that the hue of the photothermographic material of the present invention after development is in the range of hue angle hab of 180 degrees, hab, 270 degrees, and more preferably 200. It was found to be hab 270 degrees, most preferably 220 hab 260 degrees. This is disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-6463.
[0167] 尚、従来、光学濃度 1. 0付近での CIE 1976 (L*u*v*)色空間又は (LW)色空 間における u、 V*又は a*、 b*を特定の数値に調整することにより、見た目の色調が好 ましい診断画像が得られることが知られており、例えば特開 2000— 29164号に記載 されている。  [0167] Conventionally, u, V * or a *, b * in the CIE 1976 (L * u * v *) color space or (LW) color space near an optical density of 1.0 is a specific numerical value. It is known that a diagnostic image with a favorable visual color tone can be obtained by adjustment, and is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-29164.
[0168] し力しながら、熱現像感光材料について更に鋭意検討の結果、 CIE 1976 (L uV *)色空間又は (L*aV)色空間にお 、て横軸を u*又は a*、縦軸を V*又は b*としたグラフ 上に、様々な写真濃度での u*、 V又は a*、 b*をプロットし、線形回帰直線を作成した 際に、その線形回帰直線を特定の範囲に調整することにより、従来の湿式の銀塩感 光材料同等以上の診断性を持つことを見い出した。以下に好ましい条件範囲につい て述べる。  [0168] As a result of further intensive studies on photothermographic materials, the horizontal axis is u * or a * in the CIE 1976 (L uV *) color space or (L * aV) color space. When plotting u *, V or a *, b * at various photographic densities on a graph with the axis as V * or b *, and creating a linear regression line, the linear regression line is set to a specific range. By adjusting to, it was found that it has a diagnostic ability equal to or better than that of conventional wet silver salt light-sensitive materials. The preferred range of conditions is described below.
[0169] (1)熱現像感光材料を熱現像処理後に得られた銀画像の光学濃度 0. 5、 1. 0、 1 . 5及び最低光学濃度の各濃度を測定し、 CIE 1976 (L*u*v*)色空間の横軸を u*、 縦軸を V*とする 2次元座標に、上記各光学濃度での u、 Vを配置し作成した線形回 帰直線の決定係数 (重決定) R2が 0. 998〜1. 000であること力好ましい。更に、当 該線形回帰直線の縦軸との交点の V*値が 5〜5であること、且つ傾き (v*Zu*)が 0 . 7〜2. 5であることが好ましい。  [0169] (1) Measure the optical density 0.5, 1.0, 1.5 and the minimum optical density of the silver image obtained after heat development processing of the photothermographic material, and CIE 1976 (L * u * v *) The linear coefficient of determination (multiple determination) of the linear regression line created by placing u and V at each optical density above in two-dimensional coordinates, where the horizontal axis of the color space is u * and the vertical axis is V *. ) R2 is preferably from 0.998 to 1.000. Furthermore, it is preferable that the V * value of the intersection with the vertical axis of the linear regression line is 5 to 5, and the slope (v * Zu *) is 0.7 to 2.5.
[0170] (2)又、当該熱現像感光材料の光学濃度 0. 5、 1. 0、 1. 5及び最低光学濃度の各 濃度を測定し、 CIE 1976 (LW)色空間の横軸を a*、縦軸を b*とする 2次元座標 に、上記各光学濃度での a*、 b*を配置し作成した線形回帰直線の決定係数 (重決定 )R2が 0. 998〜1. 000であることが好ましい。更に、当該線形回帰直線の縦軸との 交点の b*値がー5〜5であること、かつ傾き(b*Za*)が 0. 7〜2. 5であることが好まし い。 [0170] (2) Measure the optical density of the photothermographic material of 0.5, 1.0, 1.5 and the lowest optical density, and set the horizontal axis of the CIE 1976 (LW) color space to a *, And the vertical coefficient b * is a two-dimensional coordinate where the a * and b * at each optical density above are placed and the coefficient of determination (multiple determination) R2 of the linear regression line created is between 0.998 and 1.000. Preferably there is. Furthermore, with the vertical axis of the linear regression line It is preferable that the b * value of the intersection point is -5 to 5 and the slope (b * Za *) is 0.7 to 2.5.
[0171] 尚、次に、上述の線形回帰直線の作成法、則ち CIE 1976色空間における u、 v* 及び a*、 b*の測定法の一例を説明する。  [0171] Next, an example of a method for creating the above-described linear regression line, that is, a method for measuring u, v * and a *, b * in the CIE 1976 color space will be described.
[0172] 熱現像装置を用いて未露光部、及び光学濃度 0. 5、 1. 0、 1. 5を含む 4段のゥェ ッジ試料を作製する。このようにして作製した、それぞれのゥエッジ濃度部を分光色 彩計 (コ-力ミノルタ社製: CM— 3600d等)で測定し、 u、 V*又は a*、 b*を算出する。 その際の測定条件は光源として F7光源、視野角を 10度として透過測定モードで測 定を行う。横軸を u*又は a*、縦軸を V*又は b*としたグラフ上に測定した u*、 V又は a*、 b *をプロットし線形回帰直線を求め、決定係数 (重決定) R2、切片及び傾きを求める。  [0172] Using a heat development apparatus, prepare a 4-stage wedge sample including unexposed areas and optical densities of 0.5, 1.0, and 1.5. Each wedge density part produced in this way is measured with a spectrocolorimeter (manufactured by Koryo Minolta, Inc .: CM-3600d, etc.), and u, V * or a *, b * are calculated. The measurement conditions at that time are F7 light source as the light source, 10 degree viewing angle, and measurement in the transmission measurement mode. Plot u *, V or a *, b * measured on a graph with u * or a * on the horizontal axis and V * or b * on the vertical axis to obtain a linear regression line, and the coefficient of determination (multiple determination) R2 Find the intercept and slope.
[0173] 次に、上記のような特徴を持つ線形回帰直線を得るための具体的な方法について 説明する。  [0173] Next, a specific method for obtaining a linear regression line having the above characteristics will be described.
[0174] 本発明にお ヽては、還元剤 (現像剤)、ハロゲン化銀粒子、脂肪族カルボン酸銀及 び下記の調色剤等の現像反応過程において、直接的及び間接的に関与する化合 物等の添加量の調整により、現像銀形状を最適化して好ましい色調にすることができ る。例えば、現像銀形状をデンドライト状にすると青味を帯びる方向になり、フィラメン ト状にすると黄色味を帯びる方向になる。即ち、このような現像銀形状の性向を考慮 して調整でさる。  [0174] In the present invention, it is directly and indirectly involved in the development reaction process of a reducing agent (developer), silver halide grains, aliphatic carboxylic acid silver and the following toning agent. By adjusting the addition amount of the compound or the like, the developed silver shape can be optimized to obtain a preferable color tone. For example, if the developed silver shape is dendritic, it becomes a bluish direction, and if it is a filament shape, it becomes a yellowish direction. That is, the adjustment is made in consideration of the tendency of the developed silver shape.
[0175] 従来、調色剤としてはフタラジノン又はフタラジンとフタル酸類、フタル酸無水物類 が一般的に使用されている。好適な調色剤の例は、 RD17029号、米国特許 4, 123 , 282号、同 3, 994, 732号、同 3, 846, 136号、同 4, 021, 249号等に開示され る。  [0175] Conventionally, phthalazinone or phthalazine, phthalic acids, and phthalic anhydrides are generally used as toning agents. Examples of suitable toning agents are disclosed in RD17029, US Pat. Nos. 4,123,282, 3,994,732, 3,846,136, 4,021,249 and the like.
[0176] このような調色剤の他に、特開平 11 288057号、欧州特許 1, 134, 611A2号 等に開示されているカプラー、及び以下で詳述するロイコ染料を使用して色調を調 整することもできる。特に、色調の微調整のためにカプラー又はロイコ染料を用いるこ とが好ましい。  In addition to such a toning agent, the color tone is adjusted using couplers disclosed in JP-A-11 288057, European Patent 1,134,611A2, etc., and leuco dyes described in detail below. It can also be adjusted. In particular, it is preferable to use a coupler or a leuco dye for fine adjustment of the color tone.
[0177] 熱現像感光材料は、上記のように、ロイコ染料を使用して色調を調整することもでき る。ロイコ染料として好ましくは、約 80〜200°Cの温度で約 0. 5〜30秒間加熱した時 に、酸化されて着色形態になる何れの無色又は僅かに着色したィ匕合物でよぐ上記 の還元剤の酸化体等により酸化して色素を形成する何れのロイコ染料を用いることも できる。 pH感受性を有し、かつ着色状態に酸ィ匕できる化合物は有用である。 The photothermographic material can also be adjusted in color tone using a leuco dye as described above. The leuco dye is preferably heated at a temperature of about 80 to 200 ° C. for about 0.5 to 30 seconds. In addition, any leuco dye that forms a pigment by being oxidized by an oxidized form of the above reducing agent or the like, which is any colorless or slightly colored compound that is oxidized to a colored form, can be used. Compounds that are pH sensitive and can be oxidized to a colored state are useful.
[0178] 本発明に使用するのに適した代表的なロイコ染料は特に限定されないが、例えば ビフエノールロイコ染料、フエノールロイコ染料、インドア-リンロイコ染料、アクリルィ匕 ァジンロイコ染料、フエノキサジンロイコ染料、フエノジァジンロイコ染料及びフエノチ ァジンロイコ染料等が挙げられる。有用なものは、米国特許 3, 445, 234号、同 3, 8 46, 136号、同 3, 994, 732号、同 4, 021, 249号、同 4, 021, 250号、同 4, 022 , 617号、同 4, 123, 282号、同 4, 368, 247号、同 4, 461, 681号、及び特開昭 5 0— 36110号、同 59— 206831号、特開平 5— 204087号、同 11— 231460号、特 開 2002— 169249号、同 2002— 236334号等に開示されるロイコ染料である。  [0178] Representative leuco dyes suitable for use in the present invention are not particularly limited. For example, biphenol leuco dyes, phenol leuco dyes, indoor-phosphorus leuco dyes, acrylic vinyl leuco dyes, phenoxazine leuco dyes, Nojiazine leuco dye and phenothiazine leuco dye. U.S. Pat.Nos. 3,445,234, 3,846,136, 3,994,732, 4,021,249, 4,021,250, 4,4 No. 022,617, No. 4,123,282, No. 4,368,247, No. 4,461,681, and JP-A-50-36110, JP-A-59-206831, JP-A-5-204087 No. 11-231460, No. 2002-169249, No. 2002-236334, and the like.
[0179] 所定の色調に調整するために、種々の色のロイコ染料を単独使用又は複数の種類 の併用をすることが好ましい。本発明においては、高活性な還元剤を使用することに 伴ってその使用量や使用比率によって色調 (特に黄色味)が変化したり、微粒子のハ ロゲン化銀を用いることにより、特に濃度が 2. 0以上の高濃度部で画像が過度に赤 みを帯びることを防止するために、黄色及びシアン色に発色するロイコ染料を併用し て、その使用量を調整するのが好ましい。  [0179] In order to adjust to a predetermined color tone, it is preferable to use leuco dyes of various colors singly or in combination of a plurality of types. In the present invention, the use of a highly active reducing agent changes the color tone (especially yellowishness) depending on the amount and ratio of use, or the use of fine-grain silver halide makes the concentration particularly 2. In order to prevent an image from becoming excessively reddish at a high density portion of 0 or more, it is preferable to use a leuco dye that develops yellow and cyan in combination and adjust the amount of use.
[0180] 発色濃度は現像銀自身による色調との関係で適切に調整することが好ま 、。本 発明では、 0. 01〜0. 05の反射光学濃度又は 0. 005〜0. 50の透過光学濃度を 有するように発色させ、上記の好ま 、色調範囲の画像になるように色調を調整する ことが好ましい。ロイコ染料により形成される色素像の極大吸収波長における最高濃 度の総和を 0. 01〜0. 50とするのが好ましぐより好ましくは 0. 02〜0. 30、特に好 ましくは 0. 03〜0. 10を有するように発色させるのが好ましい。  [0180] The color density is preferably adjusted appropriately in relation to the color tone of the developed silver itself. In the present invention, the color is adjusted so as to have a reflection optical density of 0.01 to 0.05 or a transmission optical density of 0.005 to 0.50, and the color tone is adjusted so that an image in the color tone range is preferable. It is preferable. It is preferable that the sum of the maximum densities at the maximum absorption wavelength of the dye image formed by the leuco dye is 0.01 to 0.50, more preferably 0.02 to 0.30, and particularly preferably 0. It is preferable to develop the color so as to have 03 to 0.10.
[0181] (黄色発色性ロイコ染料)  [0181] (Yellow coloring leuco dye)
熱現像感光材料は、上記のように、ロイコ染料を使用して色調を調整することもでき る。本発明において、黄色発色性ロイコ染料として好ましく用いられるのは、酸化され ることにより 360〜450nmの吸光度が増加する色像形成剤である。これらの色像形 成剤としては、下記一般式 (YA)で表される色像形成剤であることが特に好ま ヽ。 [0182] [化 17] 一般式 (YA>
Figure imgf000056_0001
The photothermographic material can also be adjusted in color tone using a leuco dye as described above. In the present invention, a color image forming agent that increases the absorbance at 360 to 450 nm when oxidized is preferably used as the yellow color-forming leuco dye. These color image forming agents are particularly preferably color image forming agents represented by the following general formula (YA). [0182] [Chemical Formula 17] General formula (YA>
Figure imgf000056_0001
[0183] 式中、 R は置換又は無置換のアルキル基を表し、 R は水素原子、置換もしくは無 [0183] In the formula, R represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and R represents a hydrogen atom, substituted or unsubstituted.
11 12  11 12
置換のアルキル基又はァシルアミノ基を表す力 R 、R は 2—ヒドロキシフエニルメ  The forces R 1 and R 2 representing substituted alkyl or acylamino groups are 2-hydroxyphenyl groups.
11 12  11 12
チル基であることはない。 R は水素原子又は置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基を表  It is never a til group. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.
13  13
し、 R はベンゼン環に置換可能な置換基を表す。  R 1 represents a substituent that can be substituted on the benzene ring.
14  14
[0184] R は置換又は無置換のアルキル基を表す力 R が水素原子以外の置換基である  [0184] R represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and R represents a substituent other than a hydrogen atom.
11 12  11 12
場合、 R はアルキル基を表す。当該アルキル基としては炭素数 1〜30のアルキル基 In this case, R represents an alkyl group. The alkyl group is an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
11 11
が好ましぐ置換基を有してもよい。具体的には、メチル、ェチル、プチル、ォクチル、 i プロピル、 tーブチノレ、 tーォクチル、 t ペンチル、 sec ブチル、シクロへキシノレ 、 1ーメチルーシクロへキシル等が好ましぐ i—プロピルよりも立体的に大きな基 (i— プロピル、 iーノニル、 tーブチル、 tーァミル、 tーォクチル、シクロへキシル、 1ーメチ ルーシクロへキシル、ァダマンチル等)であることが好ましぐその中でも 2級又は 3級 のアルキル基が好ましぐ 3級アルキル基である tーブチル、 tーォクチル、 t ペンチ ル等が特に好ましい。 R が有してもよい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、ァリール基、  May have a preferred substituent. Specifically, methyl, ethyl, butyl, octyl, i-propyl, t-butynole, t-octyl, t-pentyl, sec-butyl, cyclohexenole, 1-methyl-cyclohexyl and the like are sterically larger than i-propyl. Groups such as i-propyl, i-nonyl, t-butyl, t-amyl, t-octyl, cyclohexyl, 1-methyl cyclohexyl, adamantyl, etc., among which secondary or tertiary alkyl groups are preferred. Particularly preferred are tertiary alkyl groups such as t-butyl, t-octyl, and t-pentyl. Examples of the substituent that R 1 may have include a halogen atom, an aryl group,
11  11
アルコキシ基、アミノ基、ァシル基、ァシルァミノ基、アルキルチオ基、ァリールチオ基 、スルホンアミド基、ァシルォキシ基、ォキシカルボ-ル基、力ルバモイル基、スルファ モイル基、スルホニル基、ホスホリル基等が挙げられる。  Examples thereof include an alkoxy group, an amino group, an acyl group, an acylamino group, an alkylthio group, an arylothio group, a sulfonamide group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, a strong rubamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a sulfonyl group, and a phosphoryl group.
[0185] R は水素原子、置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基又はァシルアミノ基を表す。アル  [0185] R represents a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or an acyl amino group. Al
12  12
キル基は炭素数 1〜30のアルキル基が好ましぐァシルアミノ基は炭素数 1〜30のァ シルァミノ基が好ましい。この内、アルキル基の説明は前記 R と同様である。ァシル  The kill group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and the acylamino group is preferably an acyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. Among them, the explanation of the alkyl group is the same as R. Asyl
11  11
アミノ基は無置換でも置換基を有してもよぐ具体的にはァセチルァミノ基、アルコキ シァセチルァミノ基、ァリールォキシァセチルァミノ基等が挙げられる。 R として好ま  The amino group may be unsubstituted or substituted, and specific examples include an acetylylamino group, an alkoxyacetylylamino group, an aryloxycetylamino group, and the like. Preferred as R
12 しくは、水素原子又は無置換の炭素数 1〜24のアルキル基であり、具体的にはメチ ル、 i—プロピル、 t—ブチルが挙げられる。又、 R 、R は 2—ヒドロキシフエ-ルメチ 12 or a hydrogen atom or an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms. , I-propyl, t-butyl. R and R are 2-hydroxyphenol
11 12  11 12
ル基であることはない。  It is not a ru group.
[0186] R は水素原子又は置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基を表す。アルキル基としては  [0186] R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group. As an alkyl group
13  13
炭素数 1〜30のアルキル基が好ましぐアルキル基の説明は前記 R と同様である。  The explanation of the alkyl group preferred by the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms is the same as that for R.
11  11
R として好ましくは、水素原子又は無置換の炭素数 1〜24のアルキル基で、具体的 R is preferably a hydrogen atom or an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms.
13 13
にはメチル、 i—プロピル、 t—ブチル等が挙げられる。又、 R 、R の何れか一方は水  Examples include methyl, i-propyl, t-butyl and the like. One of R and R is water
12 13  12 13
素原子であることが好まし 、。  It is preferable to be an elementary atom.
[0187] R はベンゼン環に置換可能な基を表し、例えば前記一般式 (RD1)における置換 [0187] R represents a substitutable group on the benzene ring, for example, the substitution in the general formula (RD1)
14  14
基 R4で説明したのと同様な基である。 R として好ましいのは、置換又は無置換の炭 The same group as described for the group R 4 . R is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbon.
14  14
素数 1〜30のアルキル基、炭素数 2〜30のォキシカルボ-ル基であり、炭素数 1〜2 4のアルキル基がより好ましい。アルキル基の置換基としてはァリール基、アミノ基、ァ ルコキシ基、ォキシカルボ-ル基、ァシルァミノ基、ァシルォキシ基、イミド基、ウレイド 基等が挙げられ、ァリール基、アミノ基、ォキシカルボニル基、アルコキシ基がより好 ましい。これらのアルキル基の置換基は、更にこれらの置換基で置換されてもよい。  They are a C1-C30 alkyl group and a C2-C30 oxycarbonyl group, and a C1-C24 alkyl group is more preferable. Examples of the substituent of the alkyl group include aryl, amino, alkoxy, oxycarbol, acylamino, acyloxy, imide, ureido, aryl, amino, oxycarbonyl and alkoxy. The group is more preferred. These alkyl group substituents may be further substituted with these substituents.
[0188] 次に、一般式 (YA)で表される化合物の中でも特に本発明で好ましく用いられる、 下記一般式 (YB)で表されるビスフ ノールイ匕合物にっ 、て説明する。  Next, the bisphenol compound represented by the following general formula (YB), which is particularly preferably used in the present invention among the compounds represented by the general formula (YA), will be described.
[0189] [化 18]  [0189] [Chemical 18]
Figure imgf000057_0001
Figure imgf000057_0001
[0190] 式中、 Zは—S—又は— C (R ) (R [0190] In the formula, Z is —S— or — C (R) (R
21 21 ' )—を表し、 R 、R  21 21 ') — represents R and R
21 21 ' は各々、水素原子又 は置換基を表す。 R 、R ' が表す置換基としては、前記一般式 (RDl)の R1の説明 21 21 ′ each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent represented by R 1 and R ′ include R 1 in the general formula (RDl).
21 21  21 21
で挙げた置換基と同様な基が挙げられる。 R 、R  And the same groups as the substituents mentioned in the above. R, R
21 21 ' として好ましくは、水素原子又 はアルキル基である。  21 21 ′ is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
[0191] R 、R 、R ' 及び R ' は各々置換基を表す力 置換基としては一般式 (RDl)  [0191] R 1, R 2, R 'and R' each represent a substituent. The substituent is represented by the general formula (RDl)
22 23 22 23  22 23 22 23
における R2、 R3で挙げた置換基と同様な基が挙げられる。 [0192] R 、R 、R ' 及び R ' として、好ましくはアルキル基、ァルケ-ル基、アルキ-ルAnd the same groups as the substituents mentioned for R 2 and R 3 in. [0192] R 1, R 2, R 'and R' are preferably an alkyl group, a alkenyl group or an alkyl group.
22 23 22 23 22 23 22 23
基、ァリール基、複素環基であるが、アルキル基が更に好ましい。アルキル基上の置 換基としては、一般式 (RD1)における置換基の説明で挙げた置換基と同様な基が 挙げられる。 R 、R 、R ' 及び R  Group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group, and an alkyl group is more preferable. Examples of the substituent on the alkyl group include the same groups as those described in the description of the substituent in formula (RD1). R, R, R 'and R
22 23 22 23 ' として、更に好ましくは t—ブチル、 t—ペンチ ル、 tーォクチル、 1ーメチルーシクロへキシル等の 3級アルキル基である。  22 23 22 23 ′ is more preferably a tertiary alkyl group such as t-butyl, t-pentyl, t-octyl, 1-methyl-cyclohexyl and the like.
[0193] R 及び R ' は各々、水素原子又は置換基を表すが、置換基としては、一般式 (R [0193] R 1 and R 'each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and examples of the substituent include those represented by the general formula (R
24 24  24 24
D1)における R4の説明で挙げた置換基と同様な基が挙げられる。 Examples thereof include the same groups as the substituents exemplified in the description of R 4 in D1).
[0194] 一般式 (YA)及び (YB)で表される化合物としては、例えば特開 2002— 169249 号の段落「0032」〜「0038」に記載のィ匕合物 II 1〜Π— 40、欧州特許 1, 211, 09 3号の段落「0026」に記載の化合物 ITS - 1〜ITS - 12を挙げることができる。 [0194] Examples of the compounds represented by the general formulas (YA) and (YB) include compounds II 1 to -40 described in paragraphs "0032" to "0038" of JP-A-2002-169249, Mention may be made of the compounds ITS-1 to ITS-12 described in paragraph "0026" of European Patent 1,211,093.
[0195] 以下に、一般式 (YA)及び (YB)で表されるビスフ ノールイ匕合物の具体例を示す[0195] Specific examples of the bisphenol compounds represented by the general formulas (YA) and (YB) are shown below.
1S 本発明はこれらに限定されない。 1S The present invention is not limited to these.
[0196] [化 19] [0196] [Chemical 19]
Figure imgf000059_0001
Figure imgf000059_0001
Figure imgf000060_0001
Figure imgf000060_0001
[0198] 一般式 (YA)の化合物(ヒンダードフ ノールィヒ合物、一般式 (YB)の化合物も含 む)の添加量は、通常、銀 1モル当たり 0. 00001〜0. 01モルであり、好ましくは 0. 0 005〜0. 01モル、より好まし <は 0. 001〜0. 008モルである。 [0198] The addition amount of the compound of general formula (YA) (including the compound of hindered dorfolhi compound and the compound of general formula (YB)) is usually 0.0001 to 0.01 mol per mol of silver, preferably Is from 0.0005 to 0.01 mol, more preferably <0.001 to 0.008 mol.
[0199] 又、黄色発色性ロイコ染料の還元剤の総和に対する添加量比は、モル比で 0. 00 1〜0. 2であることが好ましぐ 0. 005-0. 1であることがより好ましい。  [0199] Further, the molar ratio of the addition ratio of the yellow color-forming leuco dye to the total of the reducing agents is preferably 0.001 to 0.2. More preferred.
[0200] (シアン発色性ロイコ染料)  [0200] (Cyan coloring leuco dye)
本発明の熱現像感光材料は、上記の黄色発色性ロイコ染料の他に、シアン発色性 ロイコ染料も使用して色調を調整することもできる。シアン発色性ロイコ染料としては、 好ましくは、約 80〜200°Cの温度で約 0. 5〜30秒間加熱した時に、酸化されて着色 形態になる何れの無色又は僅かに着色した化合物でよぐ還元剤の酸化体等により 酸ィ匕して色素を形成する何れのロイコ染料を用いることもできる。 pH感受性を有し、 かつ着色状態に酸ィ匕できる化合物は有用である。  The photothermographic material of the present invention can also be adjusted in color tone using a cyan color-forming leuco dye in addition to the yellow color-forming leuco dye. The cyan chromophoric leuco dye is preferably any colorless or slightly colored compound that oxidizes into a colored form when heated at a temperature of about 80-200 ° C for about 0.5-30 seconds. Any leuco dye that forms a pigment by oxidation with an oxidant of a reducing agent can be used. Compounds that are pH sensitive and can be oxidized to a colored state are useful.
[0201] シアン発色性ロイコ染料として好ましく用いられるのは、酸ィ匕されることにより 600〜 700nmの吸光度が増加する色像形成剤である。これらの化合物としては、例えば特 開昭 59 - 206831号(特に λ maxが 600〜700nmの範囲内にある化合物)、特開 平 5— 204087号の一般式 (I)〜(IV)の化合物(具体的には段落「0032」〜「0037」 に記載の(1)〜(18)の化合物)及び特開平 11 - 231460号の一般式 4〜7の化合 物(具体的には段落「0105」に記載される No. l〜No. 79の化合物)が挙げられる [0201] A color image forming agent that increases the absorbance at 600 to 700 nm when oxidized is preferably used as the cyan color-forming leuco dye. As these compounds, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 59-206831 (particularly compounds having λ max in the range of 600 to 700 nm), Compounds of general formulas (I) to (IV) of JP-A-5-204087 (specifically, compounds of (1) to (18) described in paragraphs “0032” to “0037”) and JP-A-11-231460 And compounds of the general formulas 4 to 7 (specifically, compounds No. 1 to No. 79 described in the paragraph “0105”)
[0202] 本発明に好ましく用いられるシアン発色性ロイコ染料は、下記一般式 (CLA)、一般 式 (CLB— I)で表される化合物である。一般式 (CLB— I)で表される色像形成剤は 発色効率が高ぐ少量の添加でも色調調整が可能であり、又、画像保存性にも優れ ている点で特に好ましい。 [0202] The cyan color-forming leuco dye preferably used in the present invention is a compound represented by the following general formula (CLA) or general formula (CLB-I). The color image forming agent represented by the general formula (CLB-I) is particularly preferable in that it can adjust the color tone even when added in a small amount due to its high coloring efficiency and is excellent in image storage stability.
[0203] 以下、一般式 (CLA)、一般式 (CLB— I)の化合物について詳細に説明する。  [0203] Hereinafter, the compounds of general formula (CLA) and general formula (CLB-I) will be described in detail.
[0204] [化 21] 一般式 (CLA) [0204] [Chemical formula 21] General formula (CLA)
Figure imgf000061_0001
Figure imgf000061_0001
[0205] 式中、 R 、R は水素原子、ハロゲン原子、置換又は無置換の、アルキル基、アル [0205] In the formula, R 1 and R 2 are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, an alkyl,
31 32  31 32
ケニル基、アルコキシ基、 NHCOR 基 (R はアルキル基、ァリール基、複素環基  Kenyl group, alkoxy group, NHCOR group (R is an alkyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group
30 30  30 30
を表す。)であるか、又は R 、R は互いに連結して脂肪族炭化水素環、芳香族炭化  Represents. Or R 1 and R 2 are connected to each other to form an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring or aromatic carbon
31 32  31 32
水素環又は複素環を形成する基である。 Aは— NHCO 基、—CONH 基又は  It is a group that forms a hydrogen ring or a heterocyclic ring. A is — NHCO group, —CONH group or
3  Three
NHCONH 基を表し、 R は置換又は無置換の、アルキル基、ァリール基又は  NHCONH group, R is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group or
33  33
複素環基を表す。  Represents a heterocyclic group.
[0206] 又、—A R は水素原子であってもよい。例えば—A R 部分は、水素原子を表す  [0206] In addition, -A R may be a hydrogen atom. For example, the —A R moiety represents a hydrogen atom
3 33 3 33  3 33 3 33
力 又は Aは一 NHCO 基、 CONH 基もしくは一 NHCONH 基を表し、 R  Or A represents one NHCO group, CONH group or one NHCONH group, and R
3 33 は置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、ァリール基又は複素環基を表す。  3 33 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group or heterocyclic group.
[0207] Wは水素原子又は— CONHR 基、— COR 基又は— COOR 基 (R は置換又  [0207] W is a hydrogen atom or —CONHR group, —COOR group or —COOR group (R is substituted or
3 35 35 35 35 は無置換のアルキル基、ァリール基又は複素環基を表す。)を表し、 R  3 35 35 35 35 represents an unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group or heterocyclic group. ) And R
34は水素原子 34 is a hydrogen atom
、ハロゲン原子、置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、力 ルバモイル基又は-トリル基を表す。 R は CONHR 基、—COR 基又は CO , Halogen atom, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkoxy group, force Rubamoyl group or -tolyl group is represented. R is CONHR, —COR or CO
36 37 37  36 37 37
OR 基 (R は置換又は無置換の、アルキル基、ァリール基又は複素環基を表す。) OR group (R represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group or heterocyclic group.)
37 37 37 37
Xは、置換又は無置換の、ァリール基、複素環基を表す。  X represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group or heterocyclic group.
3  Three
[0208] 一般式 (CLA)において、 R 、 R で表されるハロゲン原子としては、例えば弗素原  [0208] In the general formula (CLA), examples of the halogen atom represented by R 1 and R 2 include fluorine atom
31 32  31 32
子、臭素原子、塩素原子等が挙げられ、アルキル基としては炭素原子数が 20までの アルキル基 (メチル基、ェチル、ブチル、ドデシル等)が挙げられ、ァルケ-ル基とし ては炭素原子数 20までのァルケ-ル基(ビュル、ァリル、ブテュル、へキセ -ル、へ キサジェニノレ、ェテニノレー 2 プロぺニノレ、 3 ブテニノレ、 1ーメチノレー 3 プロぺニ ル、 3 ペンテ-ル、 1ーメチルー 3 ブテュル等)が挙げられ、アルコキシ基としては 炭素原子数 20までのアルコキシ基 (メトキシ、エトキシ等)が挙げられる。又、 NHC OR 基における R で表されるアルキル基としては、炭素原子数が 20までのアルキ The alkyl group includes alkyl groups having up to 20 carbon atoms (methyl group, ethyl, butyl, dodecyl, etc.), and the alkyl group includes carbon atoms. Up to 20 alkenyl groups (bule, allyl, butyl, hexyl, hexagenole, etheninore 2 propenole, 3 butenore, 1-methylolene 3 propenyl, 3 pentale, 1-methyl-3 butyr, etc.) Examples of the alkoxy group include alkoxy groups having up to 20 carbon atoms (methoxy, ethoxy, etc.). In addition, the alkyl group represented by R in the NHC OR group is an alkyl group having up to 20 carbon atoms.
30 30 30 30
ル基 (メチル、ェチル、ブチル、ドデシル等)が挙げられ、ァリール基としてはフエニル 、ナフチ  Group (methyl, ethyl, butyl, dodecyl, etc.), and aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl.
ルのような炭素原子数 6〜20の基が挙げられ、複素環基としては、例えばチェニル、 フリル、イミダゾリル、ピラゾリル、ピロリル等が挙げられる。 R で表されるアルキル基  Groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms such as ruthenium, and examples of the heterocyclic group include chenyl, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl and the like. An alkyl group represented by R
33  33
は、好ましくは炭素原子数 20までのアルキル基であり、例えばメチル、ェチル、プチ ル、ドデシル等が挙げられ、ァリール基は好ましくは炭素数 6〜20のァリール基であ り、例えばフエ-ル、ナフチル等が挙げられ、複素環基としては、例えばチェ-ル、フ リル、イミダゾリル、ピラゾリル、ピロリル等が挙げられる。  Is preferably an alkyl group having up to 20 carbon atoms, for example, methyl, ethyl, propyl, dodecyl, etc., and the aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, such as phenol. And heterocyclic groups include, for example, chael, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl and the like.
[0209] Wで表される CONHR 基、 COR 基又は COOR 基において、 R で表さ [0209] In the CONHR group, COR group or COOR group represented by W, represented by R
3 35 35 35 35 れるアルキル基は、好ましくは炭素原子数 20までのアルキル基であり、例えば、メチ ル、ェチル、ブチル、ドデシル等が挙げられ、ァリール基は、好ましくは炭素数 6〜20 までのァリール基であり、例えばフエ-ル、ナフチル等が挙げられ、複素環基としては 、例えばチェニル、フリル、イミダゾリル、ピラゾリル、ピロリル等が挙げられる。  The alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having up to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include methyl, ethyl, butyl, dodecyl and the like, and the aryl group preferably has from 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Examples of the aryl group include phenyl and naphthyl, and examples of the heterocyclic group include chenyl, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl and pyrrolyl.
[0210] R で表されるハロゲン原子としては、例えば弗素、塩素、臭素、沃素等が挙げられ [0210] Examples of the halogen atom represented by R include fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine and the like.
34  34
、アルキル基としては鎖状若しくは環状のアルキル基、例えばメチル、プチル、ドデシ ル、シクロへキシル等が挙げられ、アルケニル基としては炭素原子数 20までのァルケ -ル基(ビュル、ァリル、ブテュル、へキセ -ル、へキサジェ -ル、エテュルー 2—プ ロぺニノレ、 3 ブテニル、 1—メチル 3 プロぺニル、 3 ペンテニル、 1—メチルー 3—ブテニル等)が挙げられ、アルコキシ基としては、例えばメトキシ、ブトキシ、テトラ デシルォキシ等が挙げられ、力ルバモイル基としては、例えばジェチルカルバモイル 、フエ-ルカルバモイル等が挙げられる。又、二トリル基も好ましい。これらの中でも、 水素原子、アルキル基がより好ましい。 Examples of the alkyl group include chain or cyclic alkyl groups such as methyl, butyl, dodecyl, cyclohexyl and the like, and examples of the alkenyl group include alkenyl groups having up to 20 carbon atoms (bulu, allyl, butyr, Hexane, Hexagel, Etul 2 Lopeninole, 3-butenyl, 1-methyl-3-propenyl, 3-pentenyl, 1-methyl-3-butenyl, etc.), and examples of alkoxy groups include methoxy, butoxy, tetradecyloxy, Examples thereof include jetyl carbamoyl, phenol carbamoyl and the like. A nitrile group is also preferred. Among these, a hydrogen atom and an alkyl group are more preferable.
[0211] 前記 R と R は、互いに連結して環構造を形成してもよい。上記の基は更に単一の [0211] R 1 and R 2 may be linked to each other to form a ring structure. The above groups are further single
33 34  33 34
置換基又は複数の置換基を有することができる。典型的な置換基としては、ハロゲン 原子(弗素、塩素、臭素等)、アルキル基 (メチル、ェチル、プロピル、プチル、ドデシ ル等)、ヒドロキシル基、シァノ基、ニトロ基、アルコキシ基 (メトキシ、エトキシ等)、アル キルスルホンアミド基 (メチルスルホンアミド、ォクチルスルホンアミド等)、ァリールス ルホンアミド(フエ-ルスルホンアミド、ナフチルスルホンアミド基等)、アルキルスルフ ァモイル基(プチルスルファモイル等)、ァリールスルファモイル(フエ-ルスルファモイ ル等)、アルキルォキシカルボ-ル基 (メトキシカルボ-ル等)、ァリールォキシカルボ -ル基(フエ-ルォキシカルボ-ル等)、アミノスルホンアミド基、ァシルァミノ基、カル バモイル基、スルホ-ル基、スルフィエル基、スルホキシ基、スルホ基、ァリールォキ シ基、アルコキシ基、アルキルカルボ-ル基、ァリールカルボ-ル基、ァミノカルボ- ル基等が挙げられる。  It can have a substituent or a plurality of substituents. Typical substituents include halogen atoms (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, etc.), alkyl groups (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, dodecyl, etc.), hydroxyl groups, cyano groups, nitro groups, alkoxy groups (methoxy, ethoxy). Etc.), alkylsulfonamide groups (methylsulfonamide, octylsulfonamide, etc.), arylsulfonamides (phenylsulfonamide, naphthylsulfonamide groups, etc.), alkylsulfamoyl groups (ptylsulfamoyl etc.), arylsulfa Moyl (phenylsulfamoyl, etc.), alkyloxycarbonyl group (methoxymethoxy, etc.), aryloxycarboro group (phenoloxycarbol, etc.), aminosulfonamide group, acylamino group, carbon Vamoyl, sulfol, sulfiel, sulfoxy, sulfo, Ruoki sheet group, alkoxy group, alkyl carboxymethyl - group, Arirukarubo - group, Aminokarubo - group, and the like.
[0212] R 又は R は好ましくはフエ-ル基であり、より好ましくは、ハロゲン原子及びシァノ  [0212] R or R is preferably a phenol group, more preferably a halogen atom or cyan.
30 35  30 35
基を置換基として複数有するフ -ル基である。  A full group having a plurality of groups as substituents.
[0213] R で表される CONHR 基、 COR 基又は COOR 基において、 R で表さ  [0213] In a CONHR group, COR group or COOR group represented by R, represented by R
36 37 37 37 37 れるアルキル基は、好ましく炭素原子数 20までのアルキル基であり、例えばメチル、 ェチル、ブチル、ドデシル等が挙げられ、ァリール基は、好ましくは炭素数 6〜20の ァリール基であり、例えばフエ-ル、ナフチル等が挙げられ、複素環基としては、例え ばチェニル、フリル、イミダゾリル、ピラゾリル、ピロリル等が挙げられる。  The alkyl group having 36 to 37 37 37 is preferably an alkyl group having up to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include methyl, ethyl, butyl, dodecyl and the like. The aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include phenol, naphthyl and the like, and examples of the heterocyclic group include chenyl, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl and the like.
[0214] R で表される基が有することができる置換基としては一般式 (CLA)の R 〜R の [0214] Examples of the substituent that the group represented by R can have include R 1 to R 5 in the general formula (CLA).
37 31 34 説明において挙げた置換基と同様のものが使用できる。  37 31 34 The same substituents as mentioned in the description can be used.
[0215] Xで表されるァリール基としては、フエ-ル、ナフチルのような炭素原子数 6〜20の [0215] The aryl group represented by X has 6 to 20 carbon atoms such as phenol and naphthyl.
3  Three
ァリール基が挙げられ、複素環基としては、例えばチェニル、フリル、イミダゾリル、ピ ラゾリル、ピロリル等が挙げられる。 Xで表される基が有することができる置換基として And heterocyclic groups include, for example, chenyl, furyl, imidazolyl, and pyridine. Examples include lazolyl and pyrrolyl. As a substituent that the group represented by X can have
3  Three
は一般式 (CLA)の R 〜R の説明において挙げた置換基と同様のものを挙げること  Is the same as the substituents mentioned in the explanation of R to R in the general formula (CLA).
31 34  31 34
ができる。 Xで表される基としては、パラ位にアルキルアミノ基 (ジェチルァミノ等)を  Can do. As the group represented by X, an alkylamino group (such as jetylamino) at the para position
3  Three
有するァリール基又は複素環基が好まし 、。  Preferred are aryl groups or heterocyclic groups having.
[0216] これらの基は写真的に有用な基を含んでもよい。 [0216] These groups may include photographically useful groups.
[0217] 以下にシアン発色性ロイコ染料 (CLA)の具体例を示すが、本発明で用いられるシ アン発色性ロイコ染料はこれらに限定されるものではない。  Specific examples of cyan color-forming leuco dye (CLA) are shown below, but the cyan color-forming leuco dye used in the present invention is not limited to these examples.
[0218] [化 22] [0218] [Chemical 22]
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000065_0002
Figure imgf000065_0002
23] twenty three]
Figure imgf000066_0001
4]
Figure imgf000067_0001
Figure imgf000066_0001
Four]
Figure imgf000067_0001
[0221] 次に一般式 (CLB— I)で表される化合物について説明する。一般式 (CLB— I)で 表される化合物は、更に後記一般式 (CLB— II)又は (CLB— III)で表される化合物 が好ましく、 (CLB - III)で表される化合物が最も好ましレ、。 [0221] Next, the compound represented by the general formula (CLB-I) will be described. The compound represented by the general formula (CLB-I) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (CLB-II) or (CLB-III), and most preferably a compound represented by (CLB-III). Masle.
[0222] まず一般式 (CLB— I)で表される化合物にっ 、て説明する。  First, the compound represented by the general formula (CLB—I) will be described.
[0223] [化 25] —般式 (CLB— 1> [0223] [Chemical 25] —General formula (CLB— 1>
Figure imgf000068_0001
Figure imgf000068_0001
[0224] 式中、 R 、 R 、 R 及び R は各々、水素原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基、アルコキシ [0224] In the formula, R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 are each a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, an alkoxy group
41 42 40a 40b  41 42 40a 40b
基、ァリールォキシ基、ァシルァミノ基、スルホンアミド基、力ルバモイル基、ハロゲン 原子を表す。 R は水素原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基、ァシル基、アルコキシカルボ二  Represents a group, an aryloxy group, an acylamino group, a sulfonamide group, a strong rubermoyl group, or a halogen atom. R is a hydrogen atom, aliphatic group, aromatic group, acyl group, alkoxycarbon
43  43
ル基、ァリールォキシカルボキニル基、力ルバモイル基、スルファモイル基、スルホ二 ル基を表す。 X X  Represents an alkyl group, an aryloxycarboquinyl group, a strong rubamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, or a sulfonyl group. X X
41及び 42はベンゼン環上に置換可能な基を表す。 m41及び m42は 41 and 42 represent a substitutable group on the benzene ring. m41 and m42
0〜5の整数を表す。 m41及び m42が 2以上の場合、複数の X 及び X は同じでも Represents an integer from 0 to 5. If m41 and m42 are 2 or more, multiple Xs and Xs may be the same
41 42 異なってもよい。  41 42 May be different.
[0225] R 、R 、R 及び R で表される脂肪族基の具体例としては、アルキル基、ァルケ  [0225] Specific examples of the aliphatic group represented by R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 include an alkyl group, an alkyl group,
41 42 40a 40b  41 42 40a 40b
ニル基、アルキニル基等の炭化水素基が挙げられる。これらの炭化水素基は炭素数 1〜25であることが好ましぐ炭素数 1〜20であることがより好ましい。炭素数 1〜25 のアルキル基としては、メチル、ェチル、プロピル、 i—プロピル、 tーブチル、ペンチ ル、へキシル、シクロへキシル等、シクロアルキル基としてはシクロへキシル、シクロべ ンチル基等、ァルケ-ル基としてはエテュルー 2—プロべ-ル、 3—ブテュル、 1ーメ チルー 3—プロべ-ル、 3—ペンテ-ル、 1ーメチルー 3—ブテュル等、アルキ-ル基 としてはェチュル、 1プロビュル、プロパルギル等が挙げられる。  Examples thereof include hydrocarbon groups such as a nyl group and an alkynyl group. These hydrocarbon groups preferably have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms include methyl, ethyl, propyl, i-propyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, cyclohexyl, etc., and examples of the cycloalkyl group include cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl group, etc. As the alkyl group, Etul 2 -probe, 3 -butur, 1-methyl 3-probe, 3-pentyl, 1-methyl 3-butur, etc. 1Probule, propargyl, etc.
[0226] R 、R 、R 及び R で表される芳香族基の具体例としては、ァリール基 (フエ-ル [0226] Specific examples of the aromatic group represented by R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 include an aryl group (phenol).
41 42 40a 40b  41 42 40a 40b
、ナフチル等)、複素環基 (ピリジル、チアゾリル、ォキサゾリル、イミダゾリル、フリル、 ピロリル、ピラジ -ル、ピリミジニル、ピリダジ -ル、セレナゾリル、スリホラ-ル、ピペリ ジニル、ピラゾリル、テトラゾリル等)が挙げられる。  , Naphthyl, etc.) and heterocyclic groups (pyridyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazyl, selenazolyl, sriphoral, piperidinyl, pyrazolyl, tetrazolyl, etc.).
[0227] アルコキシ基の具体例としては、メトキシ、エトキシ、 i—プロピポキシ基、 t—ブトキシ 等力 ァリールォキシ基の具体例としては、フエノキシ、ナフチルォキシ等力 ァシル アミノ基としては、ァセチルアミ入ベンゾィルァミノ等が、スルホンアミド基の具体例と しては、メタンスルホンアミド、ブタンスルホンアミド、オクタンスルホンアミド、ベンゼン スルホンアミド等が、力ルバモイル基としては、ァミノカルボ-ル、メチルァミノカルボ- ル、ジメチルァミノカルボニル、プロピルアミノカルボニル、ペンチルァミノカルボニル[0227] Specific examples of the alkoxy group include methoxy, ethoxy, i-propoxy group, t-butoxy group. Specific examples of the isotropic aryloxy group include phenoxy and naphthyloxy isosyl. As the acyl amino group, acetylamino-containing benzoylamino and the like, and specific examples of the sulfonamide group include methanesulfonamide, butanesulfonamide, octanesulfonamide, Benzenesulfonamide, etc., has the following rubamoyl groups: aminoamino, methylaminocarbonyl, dimethylaminocarbonyl, propylaminocarbonyl, pentylaminocarbonyl
、シクロへキシルァミノカルボニル、フエニルァミノカルボニル、 2—ピリジルァミノカル ボニル等が挙げられる。 Cyclohexylaminocarbonyl, phenylaminocarbonyl, 2-pyridylaminocarbonyl and the like.
[0228] 又、ハロゲン原子としては、塩素、臭素、沃素である。  [0228] The halogen atom is chlorine, bromine or iodine.
[0229] R 及び R として好ましくは脂肪族基、アルコキシ基、ァリールォキシ基、より好まし  [0229] R 1 and R 2 are preferably aliphatic groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, and more preferably.
41 42  41 42
くはアルキル基又はアルコキシ基、更に好ましくは 2級又は 3級アルキル基、アルコキ シ基である。  Or an alkyl group or an alkoxy group, more preferably a secondary or tertiary alkyl group or an alkoxy group.
[0230] R 及び R として好ましくは水素原子、脂肪族基、より好ましくは水素原子である。  [0230] R 1 and R 2 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
40a 40b  40a 40b
[0231] R で表される脂肪族基、芳香族基、アルコキシ基、ァリールォキシ基の例としては  [0231] Examples of the aliphatic group, aromatic group, alkoxy group, and aryloxy group represented by R include
43  43
、前記 R 、 R で、それぞれ具体例として挙げた基が挙げられる。  In the above R 1 and R 2, groups exemplified as specific examples can be exemplified.
41 42  41 42
[0232] R で表されるァシル基の具体例としては、ァセチル、プロピオニル、ブタノィル、へ  [0232] Specific examples of the acyl group represented by R include acetyl, propionyl, butanol, and
43  43
キサノィル、シクロへキサノィル、ベンゾィル、ピリジノィル等が挙げられる。  Xanoyl, cyclohexanoyl, benzoyl, pyridinoyl and the like can be mentioned.
[0233] R で表されるアルコキシカルボニル基の具体例としては、メトキシカルボニル基、ェ  [0233] Specific examples of the alkoxycarbonyl group represented by R include a methoxycarbonyl group,
43  43
トキシカルボ-ル基、 t ブトキシカルボニル基等が挙げられる。  Examples thereof include a toxicarbol group and a t-butoxycarbonyl group.
[0234] R で表されるァリールォキシカルボ-ル基の具体例としてはフエノキシカルボ-ル [0234] Specific examples of the arylcarbonyl group represented by R include phenoxycarboro.
43  43
等が挙げられ、力ルバモイル基としては、例えばァミノカルボ-ル、メチルァミノカルボ ニル、ジメチルァミノカルボニル、プロピルアミノカルボニル、ペンチルァミノカルボ二 ル、シクロへキシルァミノカルボニル、フエニルァミノカルボニル、 2—ピリジルァミノ力 ルポ-ル等が挙げられ、スルファモイル基としては、メチルスルファモイル、ジメチルス ルファモイル、フエ-ルスルファモイル等が挙げられ、スルホ-ル基としては、メチルス ルホニル、ブチルスルホ -ル、ォクチルスルホ -ル等が挙げられる。  Examples of the powerful rubamoyl group include amino carbonate, methylaminocarbonyl, dimethylaminocarbonyl, propylaminocarbonyl, pentylaminocarbonyl, cyclohexylaminocarbonyl, phenylaminocarbonyl, and the like. , 2-pyridylamino force, and the like. Examples of the sulfamoyl group include methylsulfamoyl, dimethylsulfamoyl, and phenylsulfamoyl. Examples of the sulfol group include methylsulfonyl, butylsulfol, and octylsulfo- And the like.
[0235] R として好ましくは水素原子、アルキル基、ァシル基、より好ましくは水素原子、炭 [0235] R is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an acyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or carbon.
43  43
素数 1〜 10のアルキル基、ァシル基である。  It is a 1 to 10 prime alkyl group or an acyl group.
[0236] X 及び X で表されるベンゼン環上に置換可能な基としては、具体的には炭素数 1 〜25のアルキル基(メチル、ェチル、プロピル、イソプロピル、 tーブチル、ペンチル、 へキシルシクロへキシル等)、シクロアルキル基(シクロへキシル、シクロペンチル等) 、ァルケ-ル基(ビュル、ァリル、ブテニル、へキセ -ル、へキサジェ -ル、ェテュル[0236] Specific examples of the substitutable group on the benzene ring represented by X and X include 1 carbon atom. ˜25 alkyl groups (methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexylcyclohexyl, etc.), cycloalkyl groups (cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, etc.), alkenyl groups (bulu, allyl, butenyl, hexyl) Kiseru, Hexager, Etul
—2 プロぺニル、 3 ブテニル、 1—メチル 3 プロぺニル、 3 ペンテニル、 1— メチルー 3—ブテュル等)、アルキ-ル基(ェチュル、プロパルギル等)、グリシジル基 、アタリレート基、メタタリレート基、ァリール基 (フエ-ル、ナフチル等)、複素環基 (ピリ ジル、チアゾリル、ォキサゾリル、イミダゾリル、フリル、ピロリル、ピラジュル、ピリミジニ ル、ピリダジ -ル、セレナゾリル、スリホラ-ル、ピベリジ-ル、ピラゾリル、テトラゾリル 等)、ハロゲン原子 (塩素、臭素、沃素、弗素等)、アルコキシ基 (メトキシ、エトキシ、 プロピルォキシ、ペンチルォキシ、シクロペンチルォキシ、へキシルォキシ、シクロへ キシルォキシ等)、ァリールォキシ基 (フエノキシ等)、アルコキシカルボニル基 (メチル ォキシカルボニル、ェチルォキシカルボニル、ブチルォキシカルボニル等)、ァリール ォキシカルボ-ル基(フエ-ルォキシカルボ-ル等)、スルホンアミド基(メタンスルホ ンアミド、エタンスルホンアミド、ブタンスルホンアミド、へキサンスルホンアミド、シクロ へキサンスルホンアミド、ベンゼンスルホンアミド等)、スルファモイル基(アミノスルホ ニル、メチルアミノスルホニル、ジメチルアミノスルホニル、ブチルアミノスルホニル、へ キシルアミノスルホニル、シクロへキシルアミノスルホニル、フエニルアミノスルホニル、 2—ピリジルアミノスルホ -ル等)、ウレイド基 (メチルウレイド、ェチルウレイド、ペンチ ルゥレイド、シクロへキシルウレイド、フエ-ルゥレイド、 2—ピリジルウレイド等)、ァシ ル基(ァセチル、プロピオニル、ブタノィル、へキサノィル、シクロへキサノィル、ベンゾ ィル、ピリジノィル等)、力ルバモイル基(ァミノカルボ-ル、メチルァミノカルボ-ル、 ジメチルァミノカルボニル、プロピルアミノカル —2 propenyl, 3 butenyl, 1-methyl 3 propenyl, 3 pentenyl, 1-methyl-3-butul, etc.), alkyl groups (such as etul, propargyl), glycidyl groups, attalylate groups, metatalylate groups, Aryl groups (such as phenol and naphthyl), heterocyclic groups (such as pyridyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, pyrajur, pyrimidinyl, pyridazyl, selenazolyl, sriphoral, piperidyl, pyrazolyl, tetrazolyl Etc.), halogen atoms (chlorine, bromine, iodine, fluorine, etc.), alkoxy groups (methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, pentyloxy, cyclopentyloxy, hexyloxy, cyclohexoxy, etc.), aryloxy groups (phenoxy, etc.), alkoxycarbonyl groups (Methyloxycarbonyl, ethylo Xyloxycarbonyl, butyloxycarbonyl, etc.), aryloxycarbonyl groups (such as phenylcarboxyl), sulfonamide groups (methanesulfonamide, ethanesulfonamide, butanesulfonamide, hexanesulfonamide, cyclohexanesulfonamide, Benzenesulfonamide, etc.), sulfamoyl group (aminosulfonyl, methylaminosulfonyl, dimethylaminosulfonyl, butylaminosulfonyl, hexylaminosulfonyl, cyclohexylaminosulfonyl, phenylaminosulfonyl, 2-pyridylaminosulfol, etc.), ureido Groups (methylureido, ethylureido, pentylureido, cyclohexylureido, feruleureido, 2-pyridylureido, etc.), acyl groups (acetylyl, propionyl, butanoyl) , Hexanol, cyclohexanol, benzoyl, pyridinoyl, etc.), rubamoyl group (amino carbonyl, methylamino carbonyl, dimethylaminocarbonyl, propylamino carb)
ボ -ル、ペンチルァミノカルボ-ル、シクロへキシルァミノカルボ-ル、フエニルァミノ カルボ-ル、 2—ピリジルァミノカルボ-ル等)、アミド基 (ァセトアミド、プロピオンアミド 、ブタンアミド、へキサンアミド、ベンズアミド等)、スルホ -ル基 (メチルスルホ -ル、ェ チノレスノレホニノレ、ブチノレスノレホニノレ、シクロへキシノレスノレホニノレ、フエニノレスノレホニノレ 、 2—ピリジルスルホ-ル等)、スルホンアミド基 (メチルスルホンアミド、ォクチルスルホ ンアミド、フエ-ルスルホンアミド、ナフチルスルホンアミド等)、アミノ基(アミ入ェチル アミ入ジメチルアミ入ブチルァミノ、シクロペンチルアミ入ァニリ入 2—ピリジルアミ ノ等)、シァノ基、ニトロ基、スルホ基、カルボキシル基、ヒドロキシル基、ォキザモイル 基等を挙げることができる。又、これらの基は更にこれらの基で置換されていてもよい Borol, pentylaminocarbol, cyclohexylaminocarbole, phenylaminocarbole, 2-pyridylaminocarbol, etc.), amide group (acetamido, propionamido, butanamido, hexaneamido, benzamido) ), Sulfo group (methylsulfol, ethinolesnorehoninore, butinolesnorehoninore, cyclohexenoresnorehoninore, pheninolesnorehoninole, 2-pyridylsulfol, etc.), sulfone Amide group (methylsulfonamide, octylsulfonamide, phenylsulfonamide, naphthylsulfonamide, etc.), amino group (amiethyl ester) Dimethylamino-containing butylamino, cyclopentylamino-containing 2-pyridylamino, etc.), cyano group, nitro group, sulfo group, carboxyl group, hydroxyl group, oxamoyl group and the like. These groups may be further substituted with these groups.
[0237] X 及び X として好ましくアルコキシ基、ァリールォキシ基、力ルバモイル基、アミド [0237] X and X are preferably an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a strong rubamoyl group, an amide
41 42  41 42
基、スルホンアミド基、アミノ基、更に好ましくはアルコキシ基、アミノ基である。  Group, sulfonamido group, amino group, more preferably alkoxy group, amino group.
[0238] 次に、一般式 (CLB— I)で表される化合物の内、好ましく用いられる一般式 (CLB  [0238] Next, among the compounds represented by the general formula (CLB—I), a general formula (CLB
II)及び一般式 (CLB— III)で表される化合物につ 、て述べる。  The compounds represented by II) and general formula (CLB-III) are described below.
[0239] [化 26] [0239] [Chemical 26]
Figure imgf000071_0001
Figure imgf000071_0001
[0240] 式中、 R 、R 、R は、それぞれ上記一般式(CLB— I)の R 、R 、R と同義であ [0240] In the formula, R 1, R 2 and R 3 have the same meanings as R 1, R 2 and R in the above general formula (CLB—I), respectively.
41 42 43 41 42 43 る。 X 及び X は各々、脂肪族基、芳香族基、アミノ基、アルコキシ基又はァリールォ 41 42 43 41 42 43 X and X are each an aliphatic group, aromatic group, amino group, alkoxy group or arylo group.
43 44 43 44
キシ基を表す。  Represents a xy group.
[0241] X 及び X で表される脂肪族基、芳香族基、アミノ基、アルコキシ基、ァリールォキ  [0241] Aliphatic group, aromatic group, amino group, alkoxy group, aryloxy represented by X and X
43 44  43 44
シ基の例は、前記一般式 (CLB— I)の X 及び X で表される脂肪族基、芳香族基、  Examples of the silyl group include an aliphatic group, an aromatic group represented by X and X in the general formula (CLB—I),
41 42  41 42
アミノ基、アルコキシ基、ァリールォキシ基の具体例と同じ基が挙げられる。 X 及び X  Examples thereof include the same groups as the specific examples of the amino group, alkoxy group and aryloxy group. X and X
43 として好ましくはアルコキシ基、ァリールォキシ基、アミノ基であり、更に好ましくはァ 43 is preferably an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group or an amino group, more preferably
44 44
ルコキシ基、アミノ基である。  A alkoxy group and an amino group;
[0242] R 、 R 、 R 及び R は各々、水素原子又はアルキル基を表す。該アルキル基の具  [0242] R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 each represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. Tool of the alkyl group
44 45 46 47  44 45 46 47
体例としては、メチル、ェチル、プロピル、 i プロピル、 tーブチル、ペンチル、へキシ ル等が挙げられる。これらの基は任意の位置に置換基を有していてもよぐ該置換基 の例としては前記一般式 (CLB— I)における置換基の例として挙げた基が挙げられ る。 R 、R 、R及び R として好ましくは、炭素数 1〜10のアルキル基、より好ましくExamples include methyl, ethyl, propyl, i-propyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hex And the like. These groups may have a substituent at an arbitrary position. Examples of the substituent include those exemplified as the substituent in the general formula (CLB-I). R 1, R 2, R and R are preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably
44 45 46 47 44 45 46 47
はメチル、ェチルである。  Is methyl, ethyl.
[0243] 一般式 (CLB— I)〜(CLB— III)で表される化合物は、従来公知の方法、例えば特 公平 7— 45477号に記載の方法等で容易に合成することができる。以下に、一般式 (CLB— I)〜(CLB— III)で表されるロイコ染料の具体例を示す力 本発明はこれら に限定されない。  [0243] The compounds represented by the general formulas (CLB-I) to (CLB-III) can be easily synthesized by a conventionally known method such as the method described in JP-B-7-45477. Hereinafter, the power of the present invention is not limited to these examples showing specific examples of leuco dyes represented by the general formulas (CLB-I) to (CLB-III).
[0244] [化 27] [0244] [Chemical 27]
〔 §〕」02458 [§] "02458
一c c -  C c-
Figure imgf000073_0001
Figure imgf000073_0001
4 CH  4 CH
一 { i一)B2_>B CLB3CLc—I— One {i One) B2_> B CLB3CLc—I—
[62^ ] [9W0] [62 ^] [9W0]
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000074_0001
(ΖΙ-βΊ0) (U-βΊ ) (oi.-ano) (ΖΙ-βΊ0) (U-βΊ) (oi.-ano)
LZl90/L00Zdr/13d εζ LZl90 / L00Zdr / 13d εζ
Figure imgf000075_0001
Figure imgf000075_0001
[0247] [化 30]
Figure imgf000076_0001
(CLB— 37) (CLB-38) (CLB-39)
[0247] [Chemical 30]
Figure imgf000076_0001
(CLB— 37) (CLB-38) (CLB-39)
Figure imgf000077_0001
Figure imgf000077_0001
(CLB— 40) (CLB-41) (CLB -42)  (CLB— 40) (CLB-41) (CLB -42)
Figure imgf000077_0002
32]
Figure imgf000077_0002
32]
Figure imgf000078_0001
Figure imgf000078_0001
[0250] [化 33] [0250] [Chemical 33]
Figure imgf000079_0001
Figure imgf000079_0001
[0251] シアン発色性ロイコ染料の添カ卩量は、通常、銀 1モル当たり 0. 00001〜0. 05モル であり、好ましく ίま 0. 0005〜0. 02モノレ、より好ましく ίま 0. 001〜0. 01モノレである。 シアン発色性ロイコ染料の還元剤の総和に対する添力卩量比は、モル比で 0. 001-0 . 2力女子ましく、 0. 005〜0. 1力 り女子まし!/ヽ。 [0251] The amount of the cyan chromophoric leuco dye added is usually from 0.0001 to 0.05 mole per mole of silver, preferably 0.005 to 0.02 monolayer, more preferably 0.00. 001 ~ 0.01 Mono. The ratio of the added amount of cyan chromogenic leuco dye to the total of the reducing agents is 0.001 to 0.2 force girls, and 0.005 to 0.1 force girls.
[0252] 本発明の熱現像感光材料は、シアンロイコ染料により形成される色素像の極大吸 収波長における最高濃度の総和を 0. 01-0. 50とするのが好ましぐより好ましくは 0. 02-0. 30、特に好ましくは 0. 03-0. 10を有するように発色させること力 子まし い。 The photothermographic material of the present invention has a maximum absorption of a dye image formed with a cyan leuco dye. It is preferable to set the sum of the maximum densities at the collection wavelength to be 0.01-0.50, more preferably 0.02-0.30, particularly preferably 0.03-0.10. Rikishi.
[0253] 本発明においては、上記のシアン発色性ロイコ染料にカ卩えてマゼンタ発色性ロイコ 染料又は黄色発色性ロイコ染料を併用することで、更に微妙な色調の調整を可能と することができる。  [0253] In the present invention, a subtle color tone can be adjusted by using a magenta chromogenic leuco dye or a yellow chromogenic leuco dye in combination with the cyan chromogenic leuco dye.
[0254] 前記一般式 (YA)、 (YB)で表される黄色発色性ロイコ染料及びシアン発色性ロイ コ染料の添加方法としては、一般式(1)で表される還元剤の添加方法と同様な方法 で添加することができ、溶液形態、乳化分散形態、固体微粒子分散物形態等、任意 の方法で塗布液に含有せしめ、感光材料に含有させてょ ヽ。  [0254] The yellow color-forming leuco dye and the cyan color-forming leuco dye represented by the general formulas (YA) and (YB) may be added by a reducing agent addition method represented by the general formula (1). It can be added by the same method, and it can be added to the coating solution by any method such as solution form, emulsified dispersion form, solid fine particle dispersion form, etc.
[0255] 一般式(1)の還元剤、一般式 (YA)、(YB)の黄色発色性ロイコ染料及びシアン発 色性ロイコ染料は、脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩を含有する感光性層に含有させることが 好ましいが、一方を感光性層に、他方を該感光性層に隣接する非感光性層に含有さ せてもよぐ両者を非感光性層に含有させてもよい。又、感光性層が複数層で構成さ れて 、る場合には、それぞれ別層に含有させてもょ 、。  [0255] The reducing agent of the general formula (1), the yellow coloring leuco dye and the cyan coloring leuco dye of the general formula (YA), (YB) are contained in a photosensitive layer containing an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt. Although it is preferable that one is contained in the photosensitive layer and the other may be contained in the non-photosensitive layer adjacent to the photosensitive layer, or both may be contained in the non-photosensitive layer. If the photosensitive layer is composed of a plurality of layers, each layer may be contained in a separate layer.
[0256] (省銀化剤)  [0256] (Silver saving agent)
本発明に係る感光性層又は非感光性層には、省銀化剤を含有させることができる。 ここでいう、省銀化剤とは、一定の銀画像濃度を得るために必要な銀量を低減ィ匕し得 る化合物をいう。  The photosensitive layer or the non-photosensitive layer according to the present invention may contain a silver saving agent. As used herein, a silver saving agent refers to a compound that can reduce the amount of silver necessary to obtain a certain silver image density.
[0257] この必要な銀量を低減ィ匕する機能の作用機構は種々考えられるが、現像銀の被覆 力を向上させる機能を有する化合物が好ましい。ここで、現像銀の被覆力とは、銀の 単位量当たりの光学濃度をいう。この省銀化剤は感光性層又は非感光性層、更には そのいずれにも存在せしめることができる。省銀化剤としては、ヒドラジン誘導体化合 物、ビニル化合物、フエノール誘導体、ナフトール誘導体、 4級ォ -ゥム化合物及び シランィ匕合物が好ましい例として挙げられる。具体例としては、特開 2003— 270755 号公報の段落「0195」〜「0235」に開示されている省銀化剤が挙げられる。  [0257] Although various mechanisms for the function of reducing the necessary silver amount are conceivable, a compound having a function of improving the covering power of developed silver is preferred. Here, the covering power of developed silver means the optical density per unit amount of silver. This silver saving agent can be present in the photosensitive layer, the non-photosensitive layer, or any of them. Preferred examples of the silver saving agent include hydrazine derivative compounds, vinyl compounds, phenol derivatives, naphthol derivatives, quaternary onium compounds, and silane compounds. Specific examples include silver saving agents disclosed in paragraphs “0195” to “0235” of JP-A-2003-270755.
[0258] 本発明に係る省銀化剤として、特に好ましい省銀化剤は、下記一般式 (SE1)およ び (SE2)で表される化合物である。 [0259] 一般式(SE1) [0258] As the silver saving agent according to the present invention, particularly preferred silver saving agents are compounds represented by the following general formulas (SE1) and (SE2). [0259] General formula (SE1)
Q -NHNH-Q  Q -NHNH-Q
1 2  1 2
式中、 Qは炭素原子部位で NHNH Qと結合する芳香族基、またはへテロ環  In the formula, Q is an aromatic group bonded to NHNH Q at the carbon atom site, or a heterocycle
1 2  1 2
基を表し、 Qは力ルバモイル基、ァシル基、アルコキシカルボ-ル基、ァリールォキ  Q represents a strong rubamoyl group, an acyl group, an alkoxy carbo group, an aryl group.
2  2
シカル  Shikar
ボニル基、スルホニル基、またはスルファモイル基を表す。  A bonyl group, a sulfonyl group, or a sulfamoyl group is represented.
[0260] [化 34] 一般式 (SE2) [0260] [Chemical Formula 34] General formula (SE2)
Figure imgf000081_0001
Figure imgf000081_0001
[0261] 式中、 R はアルキル基、ァシル基、ァシルァミノ基、スルホンアミド基、アルコキシ力 ルボニル基、力ルバモイル基を表す。 R12は水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、ァ ルコキシ基、ァリールォキシ基、アルキルチオ基、ァリールチオ基、ァシルォキシ基、 炭酸エステル基を表す。 R13、 R14はそれぞれベンゼン環に置換可能な基を表す。 R13 と R14は互 、に連結して縮合環を形成してもよ 、。 [0261] In the formula, R represents an alkyl group, an acyl group, an acylamine group, a sulfonamide group, an alkoxy group, a carbonyl group, or a group of rubamoyl groups. R 12 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylothio group, an acyloxy group, or a carbonate group. R 13 and R 14 each represent a group that can be substituted on the benzene ring. R 13 and R 14 may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring.
[0262] 一般式 (SE2)にお 、て R13と R"が互いに連結して縮合環を形成する場合、縮合環 としてはナフタレン環が特に好ましい。一般式 (SE2)がナフトール系の化合物である とき、 R11は力ルバモイル基であることが好ましい。その中でもベンゾィル基であること が特に好ましい。 R12はアルコキシ基、ァリールォキシ基であることが好ましぐアルコ キシ基であることが特に好まし!/、。 [0262] In the general formula (SE2), when R 13 and R "are connected to each other to form a condensed ring, the condensed ring is particularly preferably a naphthalene ring. The general formula (SE2) is a naphthol-based compound. In some cases, R 11 is preferably a strong rubamoyl group, particularly preferably a benzoyl group, and R 12 is particularly preferably an alkoxy group, preferably an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group. Better!/,.
[0263] (熱溶剤)  [0263] (Thermal solvent)
本発明の熱現像感光材料には熱溶剤が含まれていることが好ましい。ここで、熱溶 剤とは、熱溶剤含有熱現像感光材料に対して、熱溶剤を含まない熱現像感光材料 に比べて熱現像温度を 1°C以上低くすることができる素材と定義する。さらに好ましく は、 2°C以上熱現像温度を低くできる素材であり、特に好ましくは 3°C以上低くできる 素材である。例えば、熱溶剤を含む熱現像感光材料 Aに対して、熱現像感光材料 A から熱溶剤を含まな ヽ熱現像感光材料を Bとした時に、熱現像感光材料 Bを露光し 熱現像温度 120°C、熱現像時間 20秒で処理して得られる濃度を、熱現像感光材料 Aで同一露光量、熱現像時間で得るための熱現像温度が 119°C以下になる場合を 熱溶剤とする。熱溶剤は極性基を置換基として有しており、一般式 (TS)で表される のが好ましいが、これらに限定されるものではない。 The photothermographic material of the present invention preferably contains a thermal solvent. Here, the thermal solvent is defined as a material capable of lowering the heat development temperature by 1 ° C. or more compared to a heat-developable photosensitive material containing no heat solvent. More preferred are materials that can lower the heat development temperature by 2 ° C or more, and particularly preferred are materials that can lower the temperature by 3 ° C or more. For example, a photothermographic material A containing a thermal solvent is different from a photothermographic material A containing a thermal solvent. When the photothermographic material containing B is a photothermographic material, the photothermographic material is exposed to the photothermographic material B and processed at a heat developing temperature of 120 ° C and a heat developing time of 20 seconds. A heat solvent is used when the heat development temperature for A with the same exposure and heat development time is 119 ° C or less. The thermal solvent has a polar group as a substituent and is preferably represented by the general formula (TS), but is not limited thereto.
[0264] 一般式 (TS) [0264] General formula (TS)
(Y) nZ  (Y) nZ
一般式 (TS)において、 Yはアルキル基、ァルケ-ル基、アルキ-ル基、ァリール基 または複素環基を表す。 Zはヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アミノ基、アミド基、スルホン アミド基、リン酸アミド基、シァノ基、イミド、ウレイド、スルホキシド、スルホン、ホスフィ ン、ホスフィンォキシドまたは含窒素複素環基力も選ばれる基を表す。 nは 1ないし 3 の整数を表し、 Zが 1価の基である場合には 1、 Zが 2価以上の基である場合には Zの 価数と同一である。 nが 2以上の場合、複数の Yは同一であっても異なっていても良 い。  In the general formula (TS), Y represents an alkyl group, an alkyl group, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. Z is a hydroxyl group, carboxy group, amino group, amide group, sulfonamide group, phosphoric acid amide group, cyano group, imide, ureido, sulfoxide, sulfone, phosphine, phosphinoxide or nitrogen-containing heterocyclic group. Represents. n represents an integer of 1 to 3, which is 1 when Z is a monovalent group, and is the same as the valence of Z when Z is a divalent or higher group. When n is 2 or more, multiple Ys may be the same or different.
[0265] Yは更に置換基を有していても良ぐ置換基として Zで表される基を有していても良 い。 Yについてさらに詳しく説明する。一般式 (TS)において、 Yは直鎖、分岐または 環状のアルキル基 (好ましくは炭素数 1〜40、より好ましくは 1〜30、特に好ましくは 1 〜25であり、例えば、メチル、ェチル、 n—プロピル、 iso—プロピル、 sec—ブチル、 t —ブチル、 t—ォクチル、 n—ァミル、 t—ァミル、 n—ドデシル、 n—トリデシル、ォクタ デシル、ィコシル、ドコシル、シクロペンチル、シクロへキシルなどが挙げられる。 )、ァ ルケニル基 (好ましくは炭素数 2〜40、より好ましくは 2〜30、特に好ましくは 2〜25 であり、例えば、ビニル、ァリル、 2—ブテュル、 3—ペンテ-ルなどが挙げられる。)、 ァリール基 (好ましくは炭素数 6〜40、より好ましくは 6〜30、特に好ましくは 6〜25で あり、例えば、フエ-ル、 p—メチルフエ-ル、ナフチルなどが挙げられる。)、複素環 基 (好ましくは炭素数 2〜20、より好ましくは 2〜16、特に好ましくは 2〜12であり、例 えば、ピリジル、ビラジル、イミダゾィル、ピロリジルなどが挙げられる。)を表す。これら の置換基はさらに他の置換基で置換されていても良い。また、これらの置換基は互い に結合して、環を形成していても良い。 [0266] Yは更に置換基を有していても良ぐ置換基の例としては、特開 2004— 21068号 公報の「0015」に記載の置換基が挙げられる。熱溶剤を使用することにより現像活性 となる理由としては、熱溶剤が現像温度付近で溶融することにより現像に関与する物 質と相溶し、熱溶剤を添加しな 、ときよりも低 、温度での反応を可能として 、るためと 考えられる。熱現像は、比較的極性の高いカルボン酸や銀イオン輸送体が関与して Vヽる還元反応であるため、極性基を有して!/ヽる熱溶剤により適度の極性を有する反 応場を形成することが好まし ヽ。 [0265] Y may further have a substituent, and may have a group represented by Z as a substituent. Y will be described in more detail. In the general formula (TS), Y is a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 1 to 25 carbon atoms such as methyl, ethyl, n -Propyl, iso-propyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, t-octyl, n-amyl, t-amyl, n-dodecyl, n-tridecyl, octadecyl, icosyl, docosyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, etc. ), An alkenyl group (preferably having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 25 carbon atoms such as vinyl, aryl, 2-butyl, and 3-pentale). ), Aryl groups (preferably having 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms such as phenol, p-methylphenol, and naphthyl). , Heterocyclic group (Preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 16 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms such as pyridyl, virazil, imidazolyl and pyrrolidyl). These substituents may be further substituted with other substituents. These substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring. [0266] Examples of the substituent which Y may further have a substituent include the substituent described in "0015" of JP-A-2004-21068. The reason why development activity is achieved by using a hot solvent is that the hot solvent melts near the development temperature, so that it is compatible with the substances involved in the development, and the temperature is lower than when no thermal solvent is added. This is thought to be possible in order to make the reaction possible. Thermal development is a reduction reaction involving a highly polar carboxylic acid or silver ion transporter, so it has a polar group! / Is preferred to form ヽ.
[0267] 本発明に好ましく用いられる熱溶剤の融点は 50°C以上 200°C以下である力 より 好ましくは 60°C以上 150°C以下である。特に、本発明の目的であるような、画像保存 性などの外的環境に対しての安定性を重視した熱現像感光材料では、融点が 100 °C以上 150°C以下の熱溶剤が好ましい。  [0267] The thermal solvent preferably used in the present invention has a melting point of 50 ° C or higher and 200 ° C or lower, more preferably 60 ° C or higher and 150 ° C or lower. In particular, in a photothermographic material that emphasizes stability to an external environment such as image storage stability, which is the object of the present invention, a thermal solvent having a melting point of 100 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower is preferable.
[0268] 熱溶剤の具体例としては特開 2004— 21068号公報の「0017」に記載される化合 物、米国公開特許 US2002Z0025498号公報の「0027」に記載の化合物、 MF— l〜MF— 3、 MF6、 MF— 7、 MF— 9〜MF—12、 MF— 15〜MF— 22をあげるこ とがでさる。  [0268] Specific examples of the thermal solvent include compounds described in "0017" of JP-A-2004-21068, compounds described in "0027" of US Published Patent No. US2002Z0025498, MF-1 to MF-3 MF6, MF-7, MF-9 to MF-12, MF-15 to MF-22.
[0269] 本発明において熱溶剤の添力卩量は 0. 01〜5. Og/m2であることが好ましぐより好 ましくは 0. 05-2. 5g/m2で、さらに好ましくは 0. 1〜1. 5g/m2である。熱溶剤は 感光性層に含有させることが好ましい。また、上記熱溶剤は単独で用いてもよいが、 2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。本発明において熱溶剤は溶液形態、乳化分 散形態、固体微粒子分散物形態など、いかなる方法で塗布液に含有せしめ、感光材 料に含有させてもよい。 [0269]添力卩量thermal solvent in the present invention is 0. 01~5. Og / m 2 is preferred instrument than good Mashiku be the 0.1 05-2 at. 5g / m 2, more preferably Is between 0.1 and 1.5 g / m 2 . The thermal solvent is preferably contained in the photosensitive layer. Moreover, although the said thermal solvent may be used independently, you may use it in combination of 2 or more type. In the present invention, the thermal solvent may be contained in the coating solution by any method such as a solution form, an emulsion dispersion form, or a solid fine particle dispersion form, and may be contained in the photosensitive material.
[0270] よく知られている乳化分散法としては、ジブチルフタレート、トリクレジルフォスフエ一 ト、グリセリルトリアセテートあるいはジェチルフタレートなどのオイル、酢酸ェチルや シクロへキサノンなどの補助溶媒を用いて溶解し、機械的に乳化分散物を作製する 方法が挙げられる。  [0270] As a well-known emulsification dispersion method, an oil such as dibutyl phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, glyceryl triacetate or jetyl phthalate, or a co-solvent such as ethyl acetate or cyclohexanone is used. And a method of mechanically preparing an emulsified dispersion.
[0271] また、固体微粒子分散法としては、熱溶剤の粉末を水等の適当な溶媒中にボール ミル、コロイドミル、振動ボールミル、サンドミル、ジェットミル、ローラーミルあるいは超 音波によって分散し、固体分散物を作製する方法が挙げられる。尚、その際に保護 コロイド (例えば、ポリビニルアルコール)、界面活性剤(例えばトリイソプロピルナフタ レンスルホン酸ナトリウム(3つのイソプロピル基の置換位置が異なるものの混合物)な どのァ-オン性界面活性剤)を用いてもよ ヽ。上記ミル類では分散媒体としてジルコ ユア等のビーズが使われるのが普通であり、これらのビーズから溶出する Zr等が分散 物中に混入することがある。分散条件にもよるが通常は lppm〜1000ppmの範囲で ある。感材 (熱現像感光材料)中の Zrの含有量が銀 lg当たり 0. 5mg以下であれば 実用上差し支えない。水分散物には防腐剤 (例えばべンゾイソチアゾリノンナトリウム 塩)を含有させることが好ま 、。 [0271] In addition, as a method for dispersing solid fine particles, a powder of a hot solvent is dispersed in an appropriate solvent such as water by a ball mill, a colloid mill, a vibrating ball mill, a sand mill, a jet mill, a roller mill or ultrasonic waves, and solid dispersion is performed. The method of producing a thing is mentioned. In that case, protection Colloids (for example, polyvinyl alcohol) and surfactants (for example, surfactants such as sodium triisopropylnaphthalene sulfonate (a mixture of three isopropyl groups having different substitution positions)) may be used. In the mills described above, beads such as zirconium are usually used as a dispersion medium, and Zr and the like eluted from these beads may be mixed in the dispersion. Although it depends on the dispersion conditions, it is usually in the range of lppm to 1000ppm. If the Zr content in the photosensitive material (photothermographic material) is 0.5 mg or less per lg of silver, there is no practical problem. The aqueous dispersion preferably contains a preservative (eg, benzoisothiazolinone sodium salt).
[0272] (カプリ防止剤、画像安定化剤)  [0272] (Anti-capricious agent, image stabilizer)
本発明の熱現像感光材料の何れかの構成層には、熱現像前の保存時における力 プリ発生を防止するためのカプリ防止剤、及び熱現像後における画像の劣化を防止 するための画像安定化剤を含有させておくことが好ましい。以下、本発明に用いるこ とができるカプリ防止及び画像安定化剤について説明する。  In any of the constituent layers of the photothermographic material of the present invention, an anti-capri agent for preventing the occurrence of force preserving during storage before heat development, and an image stabilization for preventing image deterioration after heat development. It is preferable to contain an agent. Hereinafter, the anti-capri and image stabilizer that can be used in the present invention will be described.
[0273] 還元剤として、主にビスフエノール類ゃスルホンアミドフエノール類のようなプロトン を持った還元剤が用いられているので、これらの水素を安定ィ匕し還元剤を不活性ィ匕 し、銀イオンを還元する反応を防止防止できる化合物が含有されることが好まし 、。 又、生フィルムや画像の保存時に生成する銀原子な!/ヽし金属銀 (銀クラスター)を酸 化漂白できる化合物が含有されることが好ましい。これらの機能を有する化合物の具 体例として、例えば特開 2003— 270755号の段落「0096」〜「0128」に記載される ビイミダゾリルイ匕合物、ョードニゥム化号物及びハロゲン原子を活性種として放出でき る化合等を挙げることがでさる。  [0273] Since reducing agents having protons such as bisphenols and sulfonamidophenols are mainly used as reducing agents, these hydrogens are stabilized and the reducing agents are deactivated. It is preferable that a compound capable of preventing and preventing the reaction of reducing silver ions is contained. Also, silver atoms generated when raw film and images are stored! / It is preferable that a compound capable of acid bleaching tanned metallic silver (silver cluster) is contained. As specific examples of compounds having these functions, for example, biimidazolyl compounds, ododonium compounds and halogen atoms described in paragraphs “0096” to “0128” of JP-A-2003-270755 are released as active species. List possible compounds.
[0274] 又、特開 2003— 91054号に開示されるようなハロゲンラジカル放出基を有するモ ノマーの繰返し単位を少なくとも一つ有するポリマー、特開平 6— 208192号の段落「 0013」に記載のビニルスルホン類及び Z又は j8—ハロスルホン類、及び特開 2005 - 107496号に記載される電子吸引基を有するビニル型抑制剤等の種々なカプリ防 止及び画像安定化剤等が好ましい具体例として挙げられる。  [0274] Further, a polymer having at least one monomer repeating unit having a halogen radical releasing group as disclosed in JP-A-2003-91054, a vinyl described in paragraph "0013" of JP-A-6-208192, Preferable specific examples include sulfone and Z or j8-halosulfone, and various capri prevention and image stabilizers such as vinyl type inhibitors having an electron withdrawing group described in JP-A-2005-107496. .
[0275] 本発明に用いる還元剤が芳香族性のヒドロキシル基(― OH)を有する場合、特に ビスフエノール類の場合には、これらの基と水素結合を形成することが可能な基を有 する非還元性の化合物を併用することが好ましい。本発明で、特に好ましい水素結 合性の化合物の具体例としては、例えば特開 2002— 90937号の段落「0061」〜「0[0275] When the reducing agent used in the present invention has an aromatic hydroxyl group (-OH), particularly in the case of bisphenols, it has a group capable of forming a hydrogen bond with these groups. It is preferable to use a non-reducing compound in combination. Specific examples of particularly preferred hydrogen bonding compounds in the present invention include, for example, paragraphs “0061” to “0” of JP-A-2002-90937.
064」に記載の化合物(II 1)〜(II 40)が挙げられる。 Compound (II 1) to (II 40) described in “064”.
[0276] 又、一方、カプリ防止及び画像安定化剤として、ハロゲン原子を活性種として放出 できる化合物も多くのものが知られて 、る。これらの活性ハロゲン原子を生成する化 合物の具体 f列としては、特開 2002— 287299号の段落「0264」〜「0271」に記載 の一般式 (9)の化合物が挙げられる。 [0276] On the other hand, many compounds that can release a halogen atom as an active species are known as an anti-capri and image stabilizer. Specific examples of the column f of the compounds that generate these active halogen atoms include compounds of general formula (9) described in paragraphs “0264” to “0271” of JP-A-2002-287299.
[0277] これらの化合物の添加量は、当該化合物から放出されるハロゲンと銀イオンが反応 してハロゲンィ匕銀の生成によるプリントアウト銀の増加が実質的に問題にならない範 囲が好ましい。これらの活性ハロゲン原子を生成する化合物の具体例としては、上記 特許の他に、特開 2002— 169249号の段落「0086」〜「0087」に記載される化合 物 (III- 1)〜(III— 23)、特開 2003— 50441号の段落「0031」〜「0034」記載のィ匕 合物 1— la〜l— lo、 1 2a〜l 2o、段落「0050」〜「0056」記載の化合物 2a〜 2z、 2aa〜211、 2— la〜2— lf、特開 2003— 91054号の段落「0055」〜「0058」記 載の化合物 4 1〜4 32、段落「0069」〜「0072」記載の化合物 5— 1〜5— 10を 挙げることができる。 [0277] The amount of these compounds added is preferably within a range in which the increase in printout silver due to the formation of halogenated silver due to the reaction of halogen released from the compound with silver ions does not become a problem. Specific examples of compounds that generate these active halogen atoms include compounds (III-1) to (III) described in paragraphs “0086” to “0087” of JP-A-2002-169249 in addition to the above-mentioned patents. — 23), compounds described in paragraphs “0031” to “0034” of JP2003-50441 1-la to l-lo, 1 2a to l 2o, compounds described in paragraphs “0050” to “0056” 2a to 2z, 2aa to 211, 2-la to 2-lf, JP-A 2003-91054, paragraphs “0055” to “0058”, compounds 4 1 to 4 32, paragraphs “0069” to “0072” The compounds 5-1 to 5-10 can be mentioned.
[0278] 本発明で好ましく使用されるカプリ防止剤としては、例えば特開平 8— 314059号 の段落「0012」に記載の化合物例 a〜j、特開平 7— 209797号の段落「0028」に記 載のチォスルホネートエステル A〜K、特開昭 55— 140833号の 14頁から記載の化 合物例(1)〜(44)、特開 2001— 13627号の段落「0063」記載の化合物(I— 1)〜 (I 6)、段落「0066」記載の(C 1)〜(C 3)、特開 2002— 90937号の段落「00 27」記載の化合物(III 1)〜(III 108)、ビニルスルホン類及び Z又は β ーハロス ルホン類の化合物として特開平 6— 208192号の段落「0013」に記載の化合物 VS — 1〜VS— 7、化合物 HS— 1〜HS— 5、スルホ-ルベンゾトリアゾール化合物として 特開 2000— 330235号に記載の KS— 1〜KS— 8のィ匕合物、置換されたプロペン 二トリル化合物として特表 2000— 515995号に記載の PR— 01〜PR— 08、特開 20 02— 207273号の段落「0042」〜「0051」に記載のィ匕合物(1) 1〜(1) 132、 を挙げることができる。 [0279] 上記カプリ防止剤は、一般に、銀 1モルに対して少なくとも 0. 001モル用いる。通 常、その範囲は銀の 1モルに対して化合物は 0. 01〜5モル、好ましくは 0. 02〜0. 6モルである。 [0278] Examples of the capri inhibitor preferably used in the present invention include compound examples a to j described in paragraph "0012" of JP-A-8-314059, and paragraph "0028" of JP-A-7-209797. Thiosulfonate esters A to K, compound examples (1) to (44) described from page 14 of JP-A-55-140833, compounds described in paragraph “0063” of JP-A-2001-13627 (I — (1) to (I 6), (C 1) to (C 3) described in paragraph “0066”, compounds (III 1) to (III 108) described in paragraph “00 27” of JP-A-2002-90937, As compounds of vinyl sulfones and Z or β-halosulfones, compounds described in paragraph “0013” of JP-A-6-208192, VS—1 to VS-7, compound HS—1 to HS-5, sulfo-benzotriazole Compound KS-1 to KS-8 as described in JP-A-2000-330235, and substituted propene nitrile compound as PR-20 as described in JP-T 2000-515995 Examples include PR-08 and compounds (1) 1 to (1) 132 described in paragraphs “0042” to “0051” of JP-A-20 02-207273. [0279] In general, the anti-capri agent is used in an amount of at least 0.001 mol per mol of silver. Usually, the range is 0.01 to 5 moles, preferably 0.02 to 0.6 moles of compound per mole of silver.
[0280] なお、上記の化合物の他に、熱現像感光材料中には、従来カプリ防止剤として知ら れている各種ィ匕合物が含まれてもよいが、上記の化合物と同様な反応活性種を生成 することができる化合物であっても、カプリ防止機構が異なる化合物であってもよい。 例えば米国特許 3, 589, 903号、同 4, 546, 075号、同 4, 452, 885号、特開昭 5 9— 57234号、米国特許 3, 874, 946号、同 4, 756, 999号、特開平 9— 288328 号、同 9— 90550号に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。更に、その他のカブリ防 止剤としては、米国特許 5, 028, 523号及び欧州特許 600, 587号、同 605, 981 号、同 631, 176号に開示される化合物が挙げられる。  [0280] In addition to the above compounds, the photothermographic material may contain various compounds conventionally known as anti-capriformants, but has the same reaction activity as the above compounds. Even if it is a compound which can produce | generate a seed | species, the compound from which a capri prevention mechanism differs may be sufficient. For example, U.S. Pat.Nos. 3,589,903, 4,546,075, 4,452,885, JP-A-5-57234, U.S. Pat.No. 3,874,946, 4,756,999 And compounds described in JP-A-9-288328 and JP-A-9-90550. Further, other antifoggants include compounds disclosed in US Pat. No. 5,028,523 and European Patents 600,587, 605,981, and 631,176.
[0281] (活性剤'滑り剤)  [0281] (Activator 'Slip agent)
(弗素系界面活性剤)  (Fluorine surfactant)
本発明ではレーザーイメージヤー (熱現像処理装置)でのフィルム搬送性や環境適 性 (生体内への蓄積性)を改良するために、下記一般式 (SF)で表される弗素系界面 活性剤が好ましく用いられる。  In the present invention, a fluorine-based surfactant represented by the following general formula (SF) is used in order to improve film transportability and environmental suitability (accumulation in a living body) in a laser imager (heat development processing apparatus). Is preferably used.
[0282] 一般式 (SF) [0282] General formula (SF)
(Rf- (Lf) -) — (Yf) — (Af)  (Rf- (Lf)-) — (Yf) — (Af)
nl pi ml ql  nl pi ml ql
式中、 Rfは弗素原子を含有する置換基を表し、 Lfは弗素原子を有しない 2価の連 結基を表し、 Yfは弗素原子を有さない (pi + ql)価の連結基を表し、 Afはァ-オン 基又はその塩を表し、 nl、 mlは各々 0又は 1の整数を表し、 piは 1〜3の整数を表し 、 qlは 1〜3の整数を表す。ただし、 qlが 1の時は nlと mlは同時に 0ではない。  In the formula, Rf represents a substituent containing a fluorine atom, Lf represents a divalent linking group having no fluorine atom, and Yf represents a (pi + ql) -valent linking group having no fluorine atom. Af represents a cation group or a salt thereof, nl and ml each represents an integer of 0 or 1, pi represents an integer of 1 to 3, and ql represents an integer of 1 to 3. However, when ql is 1, nl and ml are not 0 at the same time.
[0283] 一般式 (SF)において、 Rfが表す弗素原子を含有する置換基としては、例えば炭 素数 1〜25の弗化アルキル基(トリフロロメチル、トリフロロェチル、パーフロロェチル 、ノ ーフロロブチノレ、パーフロロォクチノレ、パーフロロドデシノレ及びパーフロロォクタ デシル等)又は弗化ァルケ-ル基(パーフロロプロべ-ル、パーフロロブテュル、パー フロロノネ-ル及びパーフロロドデセ-ル等)等が挙げられる。 Rfは炭素数 2〜8であ ることが好ましぐより好ましくは炭素数が 2〜6である。又、 Rfは弗素原子数 2〜12で あることが好ましく、より好ましくは弗素原子数が 3〜 12である。 [0283] In the general formula (SF), examples of the substituent containing a fluorine atom represented by Rf include a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms (trifluoromethyl, trifluoroethyl, perfluoroethyl, fluorobutinole, perfluorooctinole. Perfluorododecinole and perfluorooctadecyl) or a fluorinated group (perfluoroprobe, perfluorobutur, perfluoronone and perfluorododecyl, etc.). Rf preferably has 2 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms. Rf is 2-12 fluorine atoms Preferably, the number of fluorine atoms is 3-12.
[0284] Lfが表す弗素原子を有さな 、2価の連結基としては、例えばアルキレン基 (メチレン 、エチレン、ブチレン等)、アルキレンォキシ基(メチレンォキシ、エチレンォキシ、ブ チレンォキシ等)、ォキシアルキレン基(ォキシメチレン、ォキシエチレン、ォキシブチ レン等)、ォキシアルキレンォキシ基(ォキシメチレンォキシ、ォキシエチレンォキシ、 ォキシエチレンォキシエチレンォキシ等)、フエ-レン基、ォキシフエ-レン基、フエ- ルォキシ基、ォキシフエ-ルォキシ基又はこれらの基を組み合わせた基等が挙げら れる。 [0284] Divalent linking groups having no fluorine atom represented by Lf include, for example, alkylene groups (methylene, ethylene, butylene, etc.), alkyleneoxy groups (methyleneoxy, ethyleneoxy, butyleneoxy, etc.), oxyalkylenes, etc. Group (oxymethylene, oxyethylene, oxybutylene, etc.), oxyalkyleneoxy group (oxymethyleneoxy, oxyethyleneoxy, oxyethyleneoxyethyleneoxy, etc.), phenylene group, oxyphenylene group , A phenyl group, an oxyphenyl group, or a group obtained by combining these groups.
[0285] Afはァ-オン基又はその塩を表す力 例えばカルボキシル基又はその塩 (ナトリウ ム塩、カリウム塩及びリチウム塩)、スルホ基又はその塩 (ナトリウム塩、カリウム塩及び リチウム塩)、硫酸ノヽーフェステル基又はその塩 (ナトリウム塩、カリウム塩及びリチウ ム塩)、及び燐酸基又はその塩けトリウム塩及びカリウム塩等)等が挙げられる。 Yが表す弗素原子を有さない (pi + ql)価の連結基としては、例えば弗素原子を有 さな 、3又は 4価の連結基として、窒素原子又は炭素原子を中心にして構成される原 子群が挙げられる。 nlは 0又は 1の整数を表すが、 1であるのが好ましい。  [0285] Af represents the power of a cation group or a salt thereof, for example, a carboxyl group or a salt thereof (a sodium salt, a potassium salt and a lithium salt), a sulfo group or a salt thereof (a sodium salt, a potassium salt and a lithium salt), sulfuric acid And a non-festel group or a salt thereof (sodium salt, potassium salt and lithium salt), a phosphoric acid group or a salt thereof such as thorium salt and potassium salt thereof, and the like. Examples of the (pi + ql) -valent linking group having no fluorine atom represented by Y include, for example, a trivalent or tetravalent linking group having no fluorine atom and a nitrogen or carbon atom as the center. A group of atoms. nl represents an integer of 0 or 1, and is preferably 1.
[0286] 一般式 (SF)で表される弗素系界面活性剤は、弗素原子を導入した炭素数 1〜25 のアルキル化合物(トリフロロメチル、ペンタフロロェチル、パーフロロブチル、パーフ ロロォクチル及びパーフロロォクタデシル等を有する化合物)及びアルケ-ル化合物 (パーフロロへキセニル及びパーフロロノネ二ル等を有する化合物)と、それぞれ弗素 原子を導入して 、な 、3〜6価のアル力ノール化合物、ヒドロキシル基を 3〜4個有す る芳香族化合物又はへテロ化合物との付加反応や縮合反応によって得られたィ匕合 物(一部 Rfィ匕されたアルカノールイ匕合物)に、更に例えば硫酸エステルイ匕等によりァ ユオン基 (Af)を導入することにより得られる。  [0286] The fluorine-based surfactant represented by the general formula (SF) is an alkyl compound having 1 to 25 carbon atoms into which a fluorine atom is introduced (trifluoromethyl, pentafluoroethyl, perfluorobutyl, perfluorooctyl and perfluorooctyl). A compound having a lotadecyl, etc.) and an alkenyl compound (a compound having perfluorohexenyl, perfluorononenyl, etc.) and a fluorine atom, respectively, a tri- to hexavalent alkanol compound, a hydroxyl group The compound obtained by addition reaction or condensation reaction with 3 to 4 aromatic compounds or hetero compounds (partially Rf-modified alkanol compounds) is further added to, for example, sulfate ester compounds. It can be obtained by introducing a cation group (Af) by means such as 匕.
[0287] 上記 3〜6価のアル力ノール化合物としては、グリセリン、ペンタエリスリトール、 2— メチルー 2—ヒドロキシメチル 1, 3—プロパンジオール、 2, 4—ジヒドロキシー 3—ヒド ロキシメチルペンテン、 1, 2, 6—へキサントリオール、 1, 1, 1—トリス(ヒドロキシメチ ル)プロパン、 2, 2—ビス(ブタノール)—3、脂肪族トリオール、テトラメチロールメタン 、 D—ソルビトール、キシリトール、 D—マン-トール等が挙げられる。又、上記ヒドロキ シル基を 3 4個有する芳香族化合物及びへテロ化合物としては、 1, 3 5—トリヒド ロキシベンゼン(フロロダルシン)及び 2 4 6—トリヒドロキシピリジン等が挙げられる [0287] Examples of the tri- to hexavalent alkanol compound include glycerin, pentaerythritol, 2-methyl-2-hydroxymethyl 1,3-propanediol, 2,4-dihydroxy-3-hydroxymethylpentene, 1, 2, 6-hexanetriol, 1, 1, 1-tris (hydroxymethyl) propane, 2,2-bis (butanol) -3, aliphatic triol, tetramethylolmethane, D-sorbitol, xylitol, D-man -Tall and so on. In addition, the above hydroxy Examples of aromatic compounds and hetero compounds having 3 to 4 sil groups include 1,3 5-trihydroxybenzene (fluorodalcine) and 2 4 6-trihydroxypyridine.
[0288] 以下 -般式 (SF)で表される弗素系界面活性剤の好ま 、具体的化合物を示 す。 [0288] Preferred examples of the fluorine-based surfactant represented by the general formula (SF) are shown below.
[0289] [化 35]  [0289] [Chemical 35]
SF- 1 SF— 2
Figure imgf000088_0001
SF- 1 SF— 2
Figure imgf000088_0001
SF— 3 SF— 4  SF— 3 SF— 4
CH2OC9F17 CH 2 OC 9 F 17
CH— CH2OS03Li C9F17OCH2-C-CH2OS03Li CH— CH 2 OS0 3 Li C 9 F 17 OCH 2 -C-CH 2 OS0 3 Li
CH2OS03Li CH2OS03Li CH 2 OS0 3 Li CH 2 OS0 3 Li
SF— 5 SF— 6
Figure imgf000088_0002
SF—5 SF—6
Figure imgf000088_0002
SF SF— 8 3Li SF SF— 8 3Li
Figure imgf000088_0003
Figure imgf000088_0003
SF— 9 SF— 10  SF— 9 SF— 10
CH2OC3F CH3 CH 2 OC3F CH 3
CH2 CHOS03Li CH 2 CHOS0 3 Li
CH— OS03Na CH— CH2OC8 CH— OS0 3 Na CH— CH 2 OC 8
CH2 CHOS03Li CH 2 CHOS0 3 Li
CH2 CH3 CH 2 CH 3
CH2OS03Na CH 2 OS0 3 Na
[0290] [化 36] SF— 11 SF— 12 [0290] [Chemical 36] SF— 11 SF— 12
CH2OC8F17 CH2OC12F 5 CH 2 OC 8 F 17 CH2OC12F 5
CaF, 7OCH2一 C一 CH2OS03Li C12F2SOCH2-C-CH2OS03Li CaF, 7 OCH 2 1 C 1 CH 2 OS0 3 Li C 12 F 2S OCH 2 -C-CH 2 OS0 3 Li
CH2OS03Li CH2OS03Li CH 2 OS0 3 Li CH 2 OS0 3 Li
- 13 —14  -13 —14
Figure imgf000089_0001
Figure imgf000089_0001
SF- 15 SF— 16  SF- 15 SF— 16
O CH2OC8F17 CH2OS03Li O CH 2 OC 8 F 17 CH 2 OS0 3 Li
LiOSCH2— C— CH2OS03Li レ 6 13OCH2— 一 CHsOC^Fis LiOSCH 2 — C— CH 2 OS0 3 Li Re 6 13OCH2— One CHsOC ^ Fis
O CH2OS03Li CH2OS03Li O CH 2 OS0 3 Li CH 2 OS0 3 Li
- 17 - 18  -17-18
Li03S— C3F&— S03Li Li05S-C4h8— SO3L1 Li0 3 S— C 3 F & — S0 3 Li Li0 5 SC 4 h 8 — SO3L1
SFscience fiction
CHjCOOCH2(CF2CF2)3HCHjCOOCH 2 (CF 2 CF 2 ) 3 H
Figure imgf000089_0002
3S-CHCOOCH2{CF2CF2)3H
Figure imgf000089_0002
3 S-CHCOOCH 2 (CF 2 CF 2 ) 3 H
SF 21 C2H5 SF 21 C 2 H 5
CH2COOCH2CHC4H9 CH 2 COOCH 2 CHC 4 H 9
Na03S-CHCOOCH2CH,{CF2CF2)3-H Na0 3 S-CHCOOCH 2 CH, {CF 2 CF 2 ) 3-H
[0291] 一般式 (SF)で表される弗素系界面活性剤を塗布液に添加する方法としては、公 知の添加法に従って添加することができる。即ち、メタノールやエタノール等のアルコ ール類、メチルェチルケトンやアセトン等のケトン類、ジメチルスルホキシドゃジメチル ホルムアミド等の極性溶媒等に溶解して添加することができる。又、サンドミル分散や ジェットミル分散、超音波分散やホモジナイザ分散により 1 m以下の微粒子にして 水や有機溶媒に分散して添加することもできる。微粒子分散技術については多くの 技術が開示されている力 これらに準じて分散することができる。一般式 (SF)で表さ れる弗素系界面活性剤は最外層の保護層に添加することが好ましい。 [0291] As a method of adding the fluorine-based surfactant represented by the general formula (SF) to the coating solution, it can be added according to a known addition method. That is, it can be dissolved in an alcohol such as methanol or ethanol, a ketone such as methyl ethyl ketone or acetone, or a polar solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide or dimethylformamide. In addition, fine particles of 1 m or less can be added by dispersing in water or an organic solvent by sand mill dispersion, jet mill dispersion, ultrasonic dispersion or homogenizer dispersion. Regarding the fine particle dispersion technique, many techniques have been disclosed. The fluorine-based surfactant represented by the general formula (SF) is preferably added to the outermost protective layer.
[0292] 一般式 (SF)で表される弗素系界面活性剤の添加量は lm2当たり 1 X 10—8〜1 X 1 0 1モルが好ましぐ 1 X 10— 5 1 X 10—モルが特に好ましい。前者の範囲未満では帯 電特性が得られないことがあり、前者の範囲を超えると湿度依存性が大きぐ高湿下 の保存性が劣化することがある。 [0292] The addition amount of the fluorine-based surfactant represented by the general formula (SF) is lm 2 per 1 X 10- 8 ~1 X 1 0 1 mole preferably tool 1 X 10- 5 1 X 10- mol are particularly preferred. If the range is less than the former range, the charging characteristics may not be obtained. If the range exceeds the former range, humidity dependence is high, and the storage stability under high humidity may deteriorate.
[0293] (表面物性調整剤)  [0293] (Surface property modifier)
熱現像感光材料は、塗布、乾燥、加工などの製造工程等における当該感光材料の 卷取り、卷返し、搬送の際に種々の装置との接触、又は感光表面とバッキング面との 間におけるような感光材料同士の接触によって、好ましからざる影響を受けることが 多い。例えば、当該感光材料表面の引搔き傷や滑り傷の発生や、現像装置等の中 での当該感光材料の搬送性劣化等である。  The photothermographic material is used in the manufacturing process such as coating, drying, processing, etc., when the photosensitive material is scraped, turned over, brought into contact with various devices during transportation, or between the photosensitive surface and the backing surface. The contact between photosensitive materials is often undesirably affected. For example, the surface of the photosensitive material may be scratched or slipped, or the photosensitive material may be transported in a developing device or the like.
[0294] 従って、熱現像感光材料にお!ヽては、上記の表面の傷や搬送性劣化を防止する ために、当該材料の構成層の内の何れかの構成層、特に支持体上の最外層に、潤 滑剤、マット剤等を含有させ、当該感光材料の表面物性を調整することが好ましい。  [0294] Therefore, in the photothermographic material, in order to prevent scratches on the surface and deterioration in transportability, any one of the constituent layers of the material, particularly on the support. It is preferable that the outermost layer contains a lubricant, a matting agent or the like to adjust the surface physical properties of the photosensitive material.
[0295] 本発明の熱現像感光材料においては、支持体上の最外層に平均径 l 30 /z mの 有機固体潤滑剤粒子を含有し、この有機固体潤滑剤粒子が高分子分散剤によって 分散されていることがこのましい。又、当該潤滑剤粒子の融点は、熱現像処理温度よ りも高いことが好ましぐ 80°C以上、より好ましくは 110°C以上である。  [0295] In the photothermographic material of the invention, the outermost layer on the support contains organic solid lubricant particles having an average diameter of l30 / zm, and these organic solid lubricant particles are dispersed by a polymer dispersant. This is what it is. The melting point of the lubricant particles is preferably higher than the heat development processing temperature, preferably 80 ° C or higher, more preferably 110 ° C or higher.
[0296] 本発明に用いる有機固体潤滑剤粒子としては、表面のエネルギーを下げる化合物 が好ましぐ例えばポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリテトラフルォロエチレン、及びこ れらの共重合体などを粉砕して形成した粒子などが挙げられる。ポリエチレン、ポリプ ロピレン力も成る有機固体潤滑剤粒子の一例としては、ポリテトラフルォロエチレン、 ポリプロピレン zポリエチレン共重合、ポリエチレン (低密度)、ポリエチレン (高密度) 、ポリプロピレン等がある。  [0296] As the organic solid lubricant particles used in the present invention, compounds that lower the surface energy are preferred. For example, polyethylene, polypropylene, polytetrafluoroethylene, and copolymers thereof are pulverized. Examples thereof include formed particles. Examples of organic solid lubricant particles having polyethylene and polypropylene power include polytetrafluoroethylene, polypropylene / polyethylene copolymer, polyethylene (low density), polyethylene (high density), and polypropylene.
[0297] 上記有機固体潤滑剤粒子が、下記一般式 (SC1)又は一般式 (SC2)で表される化 合物であることが好ましい。  [0297] The organic solid lubricant particles are preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (SC1) or general formula (SC2).
[0298] 一般式(SCI) (R ) -X L X —(R ) [0298] General formula (SCI) (R) -X L X — (R)
SCI p2 SCI 6 SC2 SC2 q2  SCI p2 SCI 6 SC2 SC2 q2
一般式(SC2) (R COO M+z General formula (SC2) (R COO M + z
SCI z  SCI z
式中、 R R は各々、炭素数 6 60の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、アル In the formula, each R R represents a C 6 60 substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group,
SCI SC2 SCI SC2
ケニル基、ァラルキル基又はァリール基であり、 p2又は q2が 2以上である場合、複数 の R 及び R は互いに同一でも相違してもよい。 X 、X は各々、窒素原子を含A kenyl group, an aralkyl group or an aryl group, and when p2 or q2 is 2 or more, R and R may be the same or different. X and X each contain a nitrogen atom
SCI SC2 SCI SC2 SCI SC2 SCI SC2
む 2価の連結基を示す。 Lは置換又は無置換の p2 + q2価のアルキル基、ァルケ- Indicates a divalent linking group. L is a substituted or unsubstituted p2 + q2 valent alkyl group, alkyl-
6 6
ル基、ァラルキル基又はァリール基を示す。 Mは Z価の金属イオンを示す。  R group, aralkyl group or aryl group. M represents a Z-valent metal ion.
[0299] 上記一般式 (SC1)又は(SC2)で表される化合物において、総炭素数は特に限定 されないが、一般的には 20以上が好ましぐ 30以上が更に好ましい。 R と R の定 [0299] In the compound represented by the above general formula (SC1) or (SC2), the total number of carbon atoms is not particularly limited, but generally 20 or more is preferable, and 30 or more is more preferable. Definition of R and R
SCI SC2 義におけるアルキル基、ァルケ-ル基、ァラルキル基又はァリール基が有していても よい置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシル基、シァノ基、アルコキシ基、ァ リールォキシ基、アルキルチオ基、ァリールチオ基、アルコキシカルボ-ル基、ァリー ルォキシカルボ-ル基、アミノ基、ァシルァミノ基、スルホ -ルァミノ基、ウレイド基、力 ルバモイル基、スルファモイル基、ァシル基、スルホ-ル基、スルフィエル基、ァリー ル基及びアルキル基等を挙げることができる。これらの基は更に置換基を有してもよ ぐ好ましい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシル基、アルコキシ基、アルキル チォ基、アルコキシカルボ-ル基、ァシルァミノ基、スルホ -ルァミノ基、ァシル基及 びアルキル基である。ハロゲン原子としては、弗素、塩素原子が好ましい。  Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group, alkenyl group, aralkyl group or aryl group in SCI SC2 may have include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a cyan group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, Aryloyl group, alkoxycarbol group, aryloxycarbol group, amino group, acylamino group, sulfo-lumino group, ureido group, force rubermoyl group, sulfamoyl group, isacyl group, sulfol group, sulfiel group, aryl group And an alkyl group. These groups may further have a substituent, and preferred substituents include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an alkoxycarbo group, an acylamine group, a sulfo-amino group, an acyl group, and the like. And an alkyl group. As the halogen atom, a fluorine atom and a chlorine atom are preferable.
[0300] アルコキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アルコキシカルボ-ル基におけるアルキル成分は 、後述する R のアルキル基と同じである。ァシルァミノ基、スルホ -ルァミノ基のアミ [0300] The alkyl component in the alkoxy group, the alkylthio group, and the alkoxycarbonyl group is the same as the alkyl group of R 1 described later. The amino group of the acylamino group and sulfo-lumino group
SC2  SC2
ノ基は、 N置換アミノ基であってもよぐ置換基はアルキル基が好ましい。ァシルァミノ 基、ァシル基のカルボ-ル基及びスルホ -ルァミノ基のスルホ-ル基に結合する基 はアルキル基、ァリール基であるが、上記アルキル基が好ましい。  The group may be an N-substituted amino group, and the substituent is preferably an alkyl group. The groups bonded to the acyl group, the carbo group of the acyl group, and the sulfo group of the sulfoamino group are an alkyl group and an aryl group, and the above alkyl groups are preferable.
[0301] R 及び R は、炭素数 6〜60、好ましくは炭素数 6〜40、より好ましくは炭素数 10 [0301] R 1 and R 2 have 6 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 10 carbon atoms.
SCI SC2  SCI SC2
〜30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、ァルケ-ル基、ァラルキル基又はァリール 基であり、これらアルキル基、アルケニル基、ァラルキル基は、直鎖でも分岐鎖でも環 状構造を含むものでもよぐこれらが混合したものでもよい。好ましい 及び R の例  -30 substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, or aralkyl groups, and these alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, and aralkyl groups may be linear, branched, or containing a cyclic structure. A mixture of these may be used. Preferred and R examples
RSCl SC2 としては、ォクチル、 tーォクチル、ドデシル、テトラデシル、へキサデシル、 2—へキシ ルデシル、ォクタデシル、 C H (nは 20〜60)、エイコシル、ドコサ -ル、メリシ-ル  RSCl SC2 includes octyl, t-octyl, dodecyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, 2-hexyldecyl, octadecyl, C H (n is 20 to 60), eicosyl, docosal, melicyl.
n 2n- 1  n 2n- 1
、ォクテニル、ミリストレイル、ォレイル、エルシル、フエニル、ナフチル、ベンジル、ノ -ルフヱ-ル、ジペンチルフヱ-ル、シクロへキシルの各基及びこれらの上記置換基 を有する基等を挙げることができる。 [0302] 窒素原子を含む 2価の連結基 X 、X として好ましくは、 CON (R )—、—N (R , Octenyl, myristol, oleyl, erucyl, phenyl, naphthyl, benzyl, naphthyl, dipentyl, cyclohexyl, and groups having these substituents. [0302] Divalent linking groups X and X containing a nitrogen atom are preferably CON (R) —, —N (R
SCI SC2 3 4 SCI SC2 3 4
) CON (R )―、— N (R ) COO である。ここで、 R〜Rは各々、水素原子又は置換 ) CON (R) —, — N (R) COO. Where R to R are each a hydrogen atom or a substitution
5 6 3 6  5 6 3 6
基を示す。  Indicates a group.
[0303] Lは置換もしくは無置換の p + q価のアルキル基、アルケニル基、ァラルキル基、ァ  [0303] L represents a substituted or unsubstituted p + q-valent alkyl group, alkenyl group, aralkyl group,
6  6
リール基を示す。これら炭化水素基の炭素数は特に限定されないが、好ましくは 1〜 60、より好ましくは 1〜40、更に好ましくは 10〜40である。 p2 + q2価の炭化水素基 における「p2 + q2価」とは炭化水素中の p2 + q2個の水素原子が除かれて、そこに p 2個の X —基と q2個の X 基が結合することを示す。 p2及び q2は 0〜6の整数 Indicates the reel group. Although carbon number of these hydrocarbon groups is not specifically limited, Preferably it is 1-60, More preferably, it is 1-40, More preferably, it is 10-40. p2 + q2 valent hydrocarbon in p2 + q2 valent hydrocarbon group means that p2 + q2 hydrogen atoms in the hydrocarbon are removed and p 2 X — groups and q2 X groups are bonded Indicates to do. p2 and q2 are integers from 0 to 6
SCI SC2 SCI SC2
を表し、 I≤p2 + q2≤6であり、好ましくは I≤p2 + q2≤4である。又、 p2及び q2力 ^ 共に 1である場合が好ましい。  I≤p2 + q2≤6, preferably I≤p2 + q2≤4. It is also preferred that both p2 and q2 forces ^ are 1.
[0304] 上記一般式 (SC1)で表される化合物は、合成物でも天然物でもよい。天然物ある いは合成物であっても、天然物の高級脂肪酸やアルコールを原料とした合成化合物 は、炭素数の異なるものや直鎖と分岐のものを含み、これらの混合物となる力 これら の混合物を使用することは何等差し支えな!/ヽ。組成の品質安定性の観点からは合成 物が好ましい。 [0304] The compound represented by the general formula (SC1) may be a synthetic product or a natural product. Even if it is a natural product or a synthetic product, synthetic compounds made from higher fatty acids and alcohols of natural products, including those with different carbon numbers, straight-chain and branched compounds, and the ability to form a mixture of these compounds It's okay to use a mixture! / ヽ. From the viewpoint of the quality stability of the composition, a synthetic product is preferred.
[0305] 以下に、好ましい一般式 (SC)で表される化合物の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれ らに限定されない。  [0305] Specific examples of the preferred compound represented by the general formula (SC) are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
[0306] ラウリン酸アミド、パルチミン酸アミド、ステアリン酸アミド、ベヘン酸アミド、ヒドロキシ ステアリン酸アミド、ォレイン酸アミド、エル力酸アミド、リシノール酸アミド、 N ラウリル ラウリン酸アミド、 N—パルミチルパルミチン酸アミド、 N—ステアリルステアリン酸アミド 、 N ォレイルォレイン酸アミド、 N—ステアリルォレイン酸アミド、 N ォレイルステア リン酸アミド、 N—ステアリルエル力酸アミド、 N ォレイルパルミチン酸アミド、 N—ス テアリル一ヒドロキシステアリン酸アミド、 N -ォレイル ヒドロキシステアリン酸アミド、 メチロールステアリン酸アミド、メチロールべヘン酸アミド、メチレンビスステアリン酸ァ ミド、メチレンビスラウリン酸アミド、メチレンビスヒドロキシステアリン酸アミド、エチレン ビス力プリル酸アミド、エチレンビス力プリン酸アミド、エチレンビスラウリン酸アミド、ェ チレンビスステアリン酸アミド、エチレンビスイソステアリン酸アミド、エチレンビスヒドロ キシステアリン酸アミド、エチレンビスべヘン酸アミド、へキサメチレンビスステアリン酸 アミド、へキサメチレンビスべヘン酸アミド、へキサメチレンビスヒドロキシステアリン酸 アミド、ブチレンビスヒドロキシステアリン酸アミド、 N, N' —ジステアリルアジピン酸ァ ミド、 N, N' —ジステアリルセバシン酸アミド、メチレンビスォレイン酸アミド、エチレン ビスォレイン酸アミド、エチレンビスエル力酸アミド、へキサメチレンビスォレイン酸アミ ド、 N, N' —ジォレイルアジピン酸アミド、 N, N' —ジォレイルセバシン酸アミド、 m —キシリレンステアリン酸アミド、 N, N' —ジステアリルイソフタル酸アミド、エタノール ァミンジステアレート、 N—ブチノレ一 N' —ステアリノレ尿素、 N—フエ-ノレ一 N' —ス テアリル尿素、 N—ステアリノレー N' —ステアリル尿素、キシリレンビスステアリル尿素 、トルイレンビスステアリル尿素、へキサメチレンビスステアリル尿素、ジフエ-ルメタン ビスステアリル尿素。 [0306] Lauric acid amide, palmitic acid amide, stearic acid amide, behenic acid amide, hydroxy stearic acid amide, oleic acid amide, ergic acid amide, ricinoleic acid amide, N lauryl lauric acid amide, N-palmityl palmitic acid amide , N-stearyl stearic acid amide, N oleyloleic acid amide, N-stearyl oleic acid amide, N oleyl stearic acid amide, N-stearyl oleic acid amide, N oleyl palmitic acid amide, N-stearyl monohydroxystearic acid Amide, N-oleyl hydroxystearic acid amide, methylol stearic acid amide, methylol behenic acid amide, methylene bis stearic acid amide, methylene bis lauric acid amide, methylene bis hydroxy stearic acid amide, ethylene Strength prillic acid amide, ethylene bis strength purinic acid amide, ethylene bislauric acid amide, ethylene bisstearic acid amide, ethylene bisisostearic acid amide, ethylene bishydroxystearic acid amide, ethylene bisbehenic acid amide, hexamethylene Bistearic acid Amide, Hexamethylenebisbehenamide, Hexamethylenebishydroxystearic acid amide, Butylene bishydroxystearic acid amide, N, N '-Distearyl adipic acid amide, N, N'-Distearyl sebacic acid amide, Methylene bisoleic acid amide, ethylene bis-oleic acid amide, ethylene bis-ergic acid amide, hexamethylene bis-oleic acid amide, N, N '—dioleyl adipic acid amide, N, N ′ —dioleyl sebacin Acid amide, m—xylylene stearamide, N, N ′ —distearylisophthalic acid amide, ethanolamine distearate, N—butynole N ′ —stearinoreurea, N—phenole N′—stearyl urea , N-stearinore N'-stearyl urea, xylylene bis-stearyl urea, toluylene bis-steer Rilurea, hexamethylene bisstearyl urea, diphenylmethane bisstearyl urea.
[0307] 有機固体潤滑剤は、予め塗布液中に分散した状態で用いるのが好ましい。有機固 体潤滑剤は、名の如く表面が滑り易い性質になっているため、水とも有機溶媒とも親 和性は十分に高くないことが多ぐ分散液の安定性が低いど塗布液中で凝集もしくは 沈降などを起こす場合がある。塗布液中での凝集もしくは沈降は、フィルムに加工し た際に塗布故障の原因となり好ましくない。分散液の安定性を高める方法としては、 表面を改質し静電気的な効果を用いる方法や高分子分散剤による表面吸着層を利 用した立体障害の効果を用いる方法などが上げられる。前者は一般的な分散安定 化方法であるが、熱現像感光材料に用いるという点から表面改質剤自身の他の性能 への影響が懸念されるため、又、水系、非水系のどちらでも効果の発現し易い後者 の方法が好ましい。  [0307] The organic solid lubricant is preferably used in a state of being dispersed in advance in the coating solution. As the name suggests, organic solid lubricants are slippery on the surface, so the affinity of water and organic solvents is often not sufficiently high. Aggregation or sedimentation may occur. Aggregation or sedimentation in the coating solution is undesirable because it causes coating failure when processed into a film. Methods for improving the stability of the dispersion include a method of modifying the surface and using an electrostatic effect, and a method of using the effect of steric hindrance using a surface adsorbing layer by a polymer dispersant. The former is a general dispersion stabilization method. However, the use of the photothermographic material is likely to affect the other performance of the surface modifier itself, and it is effective for both aqueous and non-aqueous methods. The latter method, which is easy to express, is preferred.
[0308] なお、高分子分散剤としては、当該感光材料に用いられて ヽるバインダーを利用す ることができる。具体的には、ポリビュルブチラール、ポリビニルァセタール、ポリビ- ノレァノレコーノレ、セノレロースアセテートブチレート、セノレロースアセテートプロピオネート 等を利用できる。  [0308] As the polymer dispersant, a binder used in the photosensitive material can be used. Specifically, polybutyl butyral, polyvinyl acetal, poly vinyleno cornole, senorelose acetate butyrate, senorelose acetate propionate and the like can be used.
[0309] 高分子分散剤の量は、被分散物である有機固体潤滑剤粒子に対し 1〜200質量 %の範囲で用いることが好ましい。分散方法は特に限定されないが、デゾルバ一式、 超音波式、圧力式などを用いることができ、発熱しないよう冷却装置の調った分散装 置で分散処理することが好まし ヽ。 [0310] 上記有機固体潤滑剤粒子の平均粒径は、下記方法による分散後の平均粒径を指 す。本発明で言う平均粒径を求めるには、潤滑剤粒子を含む分散液を希釈して、力 一ボン支持膜付きグリッド上に滴下、乾燥させた試料を透過型電子顕微鏡(日本電 子社製: 2000FX型など)、直接倍率 5000倍にて撮影を行った後、スキャナにてネ ガをデジタル画像として取り込み、適当な画像処理ソフトを用いて、それぞれの粒径( 円相当径)を 300個以上測定し、その算術平均より平均粒径を求めることができる。 [0309] The amount of the polymer dispersant is preferably used in the range of 1 to 200% by mass with respect to the organic solid lubricant particles to be dispersed. The dispersion method is not particularly limited, but a resolver set, an ultrasonic method, a pressure method, or the like can be used, and it is preferable to perform the dispersion treatment with a dispersion device with a cooling device so as not to generate heat. [0310] The average particle size of the organic solid lubricant particles refers to the average particle size after dispersion by the following method. In order to obtain the average particle diameter referred to in the present invention, a dispersion liquid containing lubricant particles is diluted, dropped onto a grid with a strong support film, and dried, and then a transmission electron microscope (manufactured by Nippon Denshi Co., Ltd.) is used. : 2000FX type, etc.), directly after taking a photo at 5000x magnification, the scanner captures the negative as a digital image, and using an appropriate image processing software, each particle size (equivalent circle diameter) is 300 The average particle size can be obtained from the arithmetic average measured as described above.
[0311] 本発明の感光材料においては、支持体上の少なくとも 1層が前記一般式 (SC)で 表される化合物を含有し、かつ非イオン性含弗素界面活性剤とァニオン性含弗素界 面活性剤とを含有することが好ま U 、。  [0311] In the light-sensitive material of the present invention, at least one layer on the support contains the compound represented by the general formula (SC), and a nonionic fluorine-containing surfactant and an anionic fluorine-containing interface. U, which preferably contains an activator.
[0312] 用いることのできる非イオン性含弗素界面活性剤としては特に制限はないが、下記 一般式 (AIF)で表される化合物が好ま 、。  [0312] The nonionic fluorine-containing surfactant that can be used is not particularly limited, but a compound represented by the following formula (AIF) is preferred.
[0313] 一般式 (AIF) Rf —(AO) — Rf  [0313] General formula (AIF) Rf — (AO) — Rf
1 n3 2  1 n3 2
式中、 Rf  Where Rf
1及び Rf  1 and Rf
2は弗素含有脂肪族基を表し、同じでも異なってもよい。 AOは少 なくとも一つのアルキレンォキシ基を有する 2価基を表し、 n3は 1〜30の整数を表す  2 represents a fluorine-containing aliphatic group, which may be the same or different. AO represents a divalent group having at least one alkyleneoxy group, and n3 represents an integer of 1 to 30
[0314] Rf及び Rfで表される弗素含有脂肪族基としては、直鎖、分岐鎖及び環式、又は [0314] The fluorine-containing aliphatic group represented by Rf and Rf includes linear, branched and cyclic groups, or
1 2  1 2
これらの組合せから成る脂肪族基、例えばアルキルシクロ脂肪族基が挙げられる。好 ましい弗素含有脂肪族基としては、それぞれ炭素数 1〜20のフルォロアルキル基( — C F 、 一 C F 等)、スルホフルォロアルキル基(C F SO—、 C F SO—等)、 C  An aliphatic group composed of these combinations, for example, an alkylcycloaliphatic group can be mentioned. Preferred fluorine-containing aliphatic groups include fluoroalkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (—C F, 1 C F, etc.), sulfofluoroalkyl groups (C F SO—, C F SO—, etc.), C
4 9 8 17 7 15 3 8 17 3 n 4 9 8 17 7 15 3 8 17 3 n
F SO N (R )R一基 (Rは水素原子、それぞれ炭素数 1〜20のアルキル基、アルF SO N (R) R single group (R is a hydrogen atom, alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms,
2n+l 2 1 2 1 2n + l 2 1 2 1
コキシ基、アルキルカルボキシル基又はァリール基、 Rは、それぞれ炭素数 1〜20の  Coxyl group, alkyl carboxyl group or aryl group, and R each have 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
2  2
アルキレン基、アルキレンカルボ二ル基を表し、 nは 1〜20の整数を表す。 C F SO  Represents an alkylene group or an alkylene carbonyl group, and n represents an integer of 1 to 20. C F SO
7 15 2 7 15 2
N (C H ) CH― N (C H) CH
2 5 2 、 C F SO N (CH COOH) CH CH CH—等)で、これらは更に  2 5 2, C F SO N (CH COOH) CH CH CH—etc.)
8 17 2 2 2 2 2  8 17 2 2 2 2 2
置換基を有してもよい。  You may have a substituent.
[0315] AOはエチレンォキシ、プロピレンォキシ、 i—プロピレンォキシ等のアルキレンォキ シ基を有する基で、末端にアミノ基等の置換基を有してもよい。 nは好ましくは 5〜15 の整数である。一般式 (AIF)で表される非イオン性含弗素界面活性剤の例としては 、 C F (CH CH O) C F 、 C F (CH CH O) C F 、 C F CH CH (OH) CH (CH CH O) CH CH(OH)CH C F 、C F (CH CH O) C F 、C F (CH C[0315] AO is a group having an alkyleneoxy group such as ethyleneoxy, propyleneoxy, i-propyleneoxy and the like, and may have a substituent such as an amino group at the terminal. n is preferably an integer of 5 to 15. Examples of nonionic fluorine-containing surfactants represented by the general formula (AIF) are CF (CH CH O) CF, CF (CH CH O) CF, CF CH CH (OH) CH (CH CH O) CH CH (OH) CH CF, CF (CH CH O) CF, CF (CH C
2 2 15 2 2 7 15 7 15 2 2 10 7 15 12 25 22 2 15 2 2 7 15 7 15 2 2 10 7 15 12 25 2
H O) C F 、C F CH CH (OH) CH (CH CH O) CH CH(OH)CH C F 、CH O) C F, C F CH CH (OH) CH (CH CH O) CH CH (OH) CH C F, C
2 15 12 25 8 17 2 2 2 2 20 2 2 8 172 15 12 25 8 17 2 2 2 2 20 2 2 8 17
F (CH CH O) C F 、 C F (CH CH O) C F 、 C F SO N(C H )CH (CHF (CH CH O) C F, C F (CH CH O) C F, C F SO N (C H) CH (CH
8 17 2 2 18 8 17 8 17 2 2 20 8 17 7 15 2 2 5 2 28 17 2 2 18 8 17 8 17 2 2 20 8 17 7 15 2 2 5 2 2
CH O) CH N(CH )SO C F 、C F O(CH CH O) C F 等が挙げられるが、CH O) CH N (CH) SO C F, C F O (CH CH O) C F and the like,
2 22 2 3 2 7 15 9 17 2 2 22 9 17 2 22 2 3 2 7 15 9 17 2 2 22 9 17
本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。  The present invention is not limited to these.
[0316] 又、本発明で用いることのできるァ-オン性含弗素界面活性剤 (FA)としては、特 に制限はなぐ下記に具体的化合物を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されない。  [0316] Further, as the ionic fluorine-containing surfactant (FA) that can be used in the present invention, there is no particular limitation, but specific compounds are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
[0317] [化 37] [0317] [Chemical 37]
FA-1 FA-1
CI CI
HOOC— (CFJ-CF^-COJH HOOC— (CFJ-CF ^ -COJH
FA-2 FA-2
CI CI
CI(CF2-CF>3CF2C02 CI (CF 2 -CF> 3 CF 2 C0 2
FA— 3
Figure imgf000095_0001
FA—3
Figure imgf000095_0001
FA-4  FA-4
CF3 CF 3
CF3 (CF2¾-CF-(CH2)— C02Na CF 3 (CF 2 ¾-CF- (CH 2 ) — C0 2 Na
FA—a  FA—a
H(CF2 - CF2)4CH2- O - SOz— < COzH H (CF 2 -CF 2 ) 4 CH 2 -O-SO z — <CO z H
FA— 6 FA—6
CH3 CH 3
CF3 (CF2 -CO-N (CH2)^~C02H CF 3 (CF 2 -CO-N (CH 2 ) ^ ~ C0 2 H
FA
Figure imgf000095_0002
FA
Figure imgf000095_0002
FA -8 FA -8
CF3 CF 3
CF3-C C-CHF-CF, CF 3 -C C-CHF-CF,
C2F3 SOjNa [0318] [化 38] C 2 F 3 SOjNa [0318] [Chemical 38]
FA— 9 FA—9
C3H7 C 3 H 7
I I
CHsCOOCHsCHaNSO H, CHsCOOCHsCHaNSO H,
Na03S-CHCOOCH2CH2NSO2C8H17 Na0 3 S-CHCOOCH 2 CH 2 NSO 2 C 8 H 17
Figure imgf000096_0001
S03Naは 4位又は 5位あるいは それらの混合物)
Figure imgf000096_0001
S0 3 Na is 4th or 5th or a mixture of them)
FA -11  FA -11
O  O
H— (CF2>4— CH2H— (CF 2 > 4 — CH 2
OH OH
FA 12 FA 12
O  O
H -(CF2)3-p-ONa H-(CF 2 ) 3 -p-ONa
ONa  ONa
FA— 13
Figure imgf000096_0002
FA—13
Figure imgf000096_0002
FA— 14  FA—14
C2H5 C 2 H 5
C6H13CONCH2COONa C 6 H 13 CONCH 2 COONa
FA— 15 C3H7 FA— 15 C 3 H 7
I I
CFs(CF2)7S02-N-CH2-S03Na CF s (CF 2 ) 7 S0 2 -N-CH 2 -S0 3 Na
FA— 16 C3H7 FA— 16 C 3 H 7
I  I
CaH17S02-N-{CH2CH20)4(CH2)4S03Na C a H 17 S0 2 -N- {CH 2 CH 2 0) 4 (CH 2 ) 4S0 3 Na
[0319] [化 39] FA— 17 [0319] [Chemical 39] FA—17
C2H5 C 2 H 5
CF3(CF2)7S02 -N-CH2-COONa FA- 18 CF 3 (CF 2 ) 7 S0 2 -N-CH 2 -COONa FA- 18
C3H7  C3H7
I I
CF3(CF2)7S02— N— CH2— COOK CF 3 (CF 2 ) 7 S0 2 — N— CH 2 — COOK
FA— 19 FA—19
C2H6 C 2 H 6
CaH17CONCH2CH2S03Na
Figure imgf000097_0001
C a H 17 CONCH 2 CH 2 S0 3 Na
Figure imgf000097_0001
(一 S03Kは o— , m—又は p—位、 あるいは それらの混合物 > (One S0 3 K is o-, m- or p-position, or a mixture of them>
FA— 21 C2H5 FA— 21 C 2 H 5
CF3(CF2)7S02-N -{CH2)s-COOK FA -22 CF 3 (CF 2 ) 7 S0 2 -N-{CH 2 ) s -COOK FA -22
CF3<CF2> "— CH2— 0— SQ3Na CF 3 <CF 2 >"— CH 2 — 0— SQ 3 Na
FA -23 FA -23
CF3(CF2)6 - COO (CH2)3 - SO3K CF 3 (CF 2 ) 6 -COO (CH 2 ) 3 -SO3K
FA -24  FA -24
H<CF2)4— C H2 _ O— (C H2} _ S 03Na H <CF 2 ) 4 — CH 2 _ O— (CH 2 } _ S 0 3 Na
FA- 25 FA-25
CH2COOCH2(CF2)4H Na03S— CHCOOCH2(CF2)4H CH 2 COOCH 2 (CF 2 ) 4 H Na0 3 S— CHCOOCH 2 (CF 2 ) 4 H
40] 40]
Figure imgf000098_0001
Figure imgf000098_0001
3ε -Vd  3ε -Vd
E(BNO)dOzHOzHOO— ^ O d60 E (BNO) dO z HO z HOO— ^ O d 6 0
eiMOOO— ( — OildsO eiMOOO— (— O il d s O
οε-vd
Figure imgf000098_0002
eNEOS- 。" d
οε-vd
Figure imgf000098_0002
eN E OS-. "d
8Z-VJ 8Z-VJ
■j1 ·つ コ ■ j 1
ed0  ed0
'dO-^OOOO-HD-^'O 'dO- ^ OOOO-HD-^' O
BNsOS BN s OS
.Zl90/.00Zdf/X3d Z6
Figure imgf000099_0001
.Zl90 / .00Zdf / X3d Z6
Figure imgf000099_0001
FA -36  FA -36
CH3 — CONCH2CH2COOKCH 3 — CONCH 2 CH 2 COOK
FA— 37 FA—37
C9F170— — S02NCH2CH2COOHC 9 F 17 0— — S0 2 NCH 2 CH 2 COOH
FA -38 FA -38
C9F17OCHzCH2S03Na C 9 F 17 OCH z CH 2 S0 3 Na
FA - 39 FA-39
OCH2CH2CH2CH2OP(ONa)2 OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OP (ONa) 2
Figure imgf000099_0002
Figure imgf000099_0002
FA -42  FA -42
HCF2(CF2)BOCH2CH2CH2SOaNa 42] HCF 2 (CF 2 ) B OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 SO a Na 42]
FA -43 FA -43
HCF2(CF2)90— ^ V-(OCH2CH2)1 ()0-(CH2)3S03Na HCF 2 (CF 2 ) 9 0— ^ V- (OCH 2 CH 2 ) 1 () 0- (CH 2 ) 3S03Na
FA -44FA -44
Figure imgf000100_0001
Figure imgf000100_0001
FA— 45  FA— 45
C3HT C 3 H T
C8F17SOjNCH2COONa C 8 F 17 SOjNCH 2 COONa
FA 46 FA 46
C9F170— — COONa C 9 F 17 0— — COONa
FA -47 FA -47
。 S03Na . S0 3 Na
FA— 48 FA—48
C3H7  C3H7
0 F^ 7S03N- (CH2CH20)3《CH2)4S03 Wa 3] 0 F ^ 7 S0 3 N- (CH 2 CH 2 0) 3 《CH 2 ) 4 S0 3 Wa 3]
FA— 49 FA - 50 FA— 49 FA-50
C7F15COOH H-fCF2 — CHjCOOIMH4 C 7 F 15 COOH H-fCF 2 — CHjCOOIMH 4
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000101_0001
FA -55 FA -56  FA -55 FA -56
CH3 H-(CF2)j-CH2OOC-CH2 CH 3 H- (CF 2 ) j-CH 2 OOC-CH 2
C7F15CON-CH2CH2S03Na C 7 F 15 CON-CH 2 CH 2 S0 3 Na
H~fCF2)|~CH2OOC— CH— S03NaH ~ fCF 2 ) | ~ CH 2 OOC— CH— S0 3 Na
FA— 57 FA—57
H ~ CF2 CH20 ~ CH2CH20 OC - CH2 H to CF 2 CH 2 0 to CH 2 CH 2 0 OC-CH 2
H ~ cF CH20~(CH2CH20^~OC - CH - CH2S03 p:平均 3 H ~ cF CH 2 0 ~ (CH 2 CH 2 0 ^ ~ OC-CH-CH 2 S0 3 p: Average 3
FA -58  FA -58
C3H7 C 3 H 7
C8F17SO2N- CH2CH2O- {CHi)5-S03Na p:平均 4 C 8 F 17 SO 2 N- CH 2 CH 2 O- (CH i ) 5-S0 3 Na p: Average 4
FA— 59
Figure imgf000101_0002
p:平均 7
FA— 59
Figure imgf000101_0002
p: Average 7
FA -60 FA -60
Cio^iC^CHzO-fCHjC^O-^p-fCHj^j-SOaNa p:平均 6  Cio ^ iC ^ CHzO-fCHjC ^ O- ^ p-fCHj ^ j-SOaNa p: Average 6
FA ~61 -62  FA ~ 61 -62
C3H7 o C3H7 OC 3 H 7 o C 3 H 7 O
CaF17SOzN -CH2CH20一 P— ONa C8F17S02N— fCH2CH20½ -P-ONa C a F 17 SO z N -CH 2 CH 2 0 1 P— ONa C 8 F 17 S0 2 N— fCH 2 CH 2 0½ -P-ONa
ONa  ONa
p:平均 5 p: Average 5
FA -63 FA -63
C,H7 C, H 7
C8l=17S02N— CH2CH2OS03Na 44] C 8 l = 17 S0 2 N— CH 2 CH 2 OS0 3 Na 44]
FA -64 FA -64
yCOONa  yCOONa
C3F1 7S02IM C 3 F 1 7 S0 2 IM
COONa  COONa
Figure imgf000102_0001
Figure imgf000102_0001
FA -67  FA -67
C6H130 -OC-CH2 C 6 H 13 0 -OC-CH 2
C8F17CH2CH2OOC-CH-S03Na C 8 F 17 CH 2 CH 2 OOC-CH-S0 3 Na
FA -68 FA -68
C3H7 C 3 H 7
C8F17SOjN— fCH2CHCH2o)j- CH2)j-S03Na C 8 F 17 SOjN— fCH 2 CHCH 2 o) j- CH 2 ) j-S03Na
OH OH
FA -69
Figure imgf000102_0002
FA -69
Figure imgf000102_0002
各含弗素系界面活性剤の使用量は、一般に感光材料 lm2当たり 0. 01〜: Lgがよく 、 10〜500mg力好まし!/ヽ。より好ましく ίま 50〜300mgである。 The amount of each fluorine-containing surfactant used is generally from 0.01 to lm 2 of photosensitive material: Lg is preferred, and 10 to 500 mg is preferred! / ヽ. More preferably, it is 50 to 300 mg.
含弗素系界面活性剤としては、上記の他に特開昭 60— 244945号、同 63— 30643 7号、特開平 1— 24245号に記載のイオン性の弗素系界面活性剤、特開平 5— 197 068号、同 5— 204115号等に記載のァ-オン 'カチオン併用の弗素系界面活性剤 を用いることができる。 In addition to the above, fluorine-containing surfactants include ionic fluorine-based surfactants described in JP-A-60-244945, JP-A-63-306437, and JP-A-1-24245; Fluorosurfactants used in combination with cation cation as described in 197, 068, 5-204115, etc. can be used.
含弗素系界面活性剤の添加層としては特に限定がなぐどの層にあってもよいが、最 表面層に含有されることが好ま 、。 [0326] (染料、顔料) The addition layer of the fluorine-containing surfactant may be any layer without particular limitation, but is preferably contained in the outermost layer. [0326] (Dye, pigment)
本発明の熱現像感光材料においては、感光性層を透過する光の量または波長分 布を制御するために感光性層と同じ側または反対の側にフィルタ一層を形成するか 、感光性層に染料又は顔料を含有させることが好ましい。用いられる染料としては、 感光材料の感色性に応じて種々の波長領域の光を吸収する公知の化合物が使用 できる。  In the photothermographic material of the present invention, a filter layer is formed on the same side as or opposite to the photosensitive layer in order to control the amount of light transmitted through the photosensitive layer or the wavelength distribution. It is preferable to contain a dye or a pigment. As the dye used, known compounds that absorb light in various wavelength regions can be used depending on the color sensitivity of the photosensitive material.
[0327] 例えば、本発明の熱現像感光材料材料を赤外光による画像記録材料とする場合 には、特開 2001— 83655号に開示されているようなチォピリリウム核を有するスクァ リリウム染料 (本明細書ではチォピリリウムスクァリリウム染料と呼ぶ)及びピリリウム核 を有するスクァリリウム染料 (本明細書ではピリリウムスクァリリウム染料と呼ぶ)、又スク ァリリウム染料に類似したチォピリリウムクロコ -ゥム染料、又はピリリウムクロコ -ゥム 染料を使用することが好ましい。  [0327] For example, when the photothermographic material of the present invention is used as an image recording material by infrared light, a squarylium dye having a thiopyrylium nucleus as disclosed in JP-A-2001-83655 (this specification) A thiopyrylium squarium dye), a squarylium dye having a pyrylium nucleus (referred to herein as a pyrylium squarylium dye), Alternatively, it is preferable to use a pyrylium crocoum dye.
[0328] 尚、スクァリリウム核を有する化合物とは、分子構造中に 1ーシクロブテン 2 ヒド 口キシー 4 オンを有する化合物であり、クロコニゥム核を有する化合物とは分子構 造中に 1—シクロペンテン一 2 ヒドロキシ一 4, 5 ジオンを有する化合物である。こ こで、ヒドロキシル基は解離していてもよい。以下本明細書ではこれらの色素を便宜 的に一括してスクァリリウム染料とよぶ。尚、染料としては特開平 8— 201959号の化 合物も好ましい。  [0328] A compound having a squarylium nucleus is a compound having 1-cyclobutene-2-hydroxy-4one in the molecular structure, and a compound having a croconium nucleus is 1-cyclopentene-2-hydroxylone in the molecular structure. It is a compound having 4, 5 dione. Here, the hydroxyl group may be dissociated. Hereinafter, in the present specification, these pigments are collectively referred to as squarylium dyes for convenience. As the dye, a compound described in JP-A-8-201959 is also preferable.
[0329] (支持体)  [0329] (Support)
熱現像感光材料に用いる支持体の素材としては、各種高分子材料、ガラス、ウール 布、コットン布、紙、金属(アルミニウム等)等が挙げられる力 情報記録材料としての 取扱い上は、可撓性のあるシート又はロールに加工できるものが好適である。従って 、本発明の熱現像感光材料における支持体としては、セルロースアセテートフィルム 、ポリエステルフィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム、ポリエチレンナフ タレート(PEN)フィルム、ポリアミドフィルム、ポリイミドフィルム、セルローストリァセテ 一トフイルム(TAC)又はポリカーボネート(PC)フィルム等のプラスチックフィルムが 好ましぐ特に 2軸延伸した PETフィルムが特に好ましい。支持体の厚みとしては 50 〜300 μ m程度、好ましくは 70〜180 μ mである。 帯電性を改良するために金属酸化物及び z又は導電性ポリマー等の導電性化合物 を構成層中に含ませることができる。これらは何れの層に含有させてもよいが、好まし くはバッキング層又は感光性層側の表面保護層、下引層等に含まれる。米国特許 5 , 244, 773号のカラム 14〜20に記載の導電性ィ匕合物等が好ましく用いられる。 Support materials used for photothermographic materials include various polymer materials, glass, wool cloth, cotton cloth, paper, metal (aluminum, etc.), etc. What can be processed into a certain sheet or roll is suitable. Accordingly, the support in the photothermographic material of the present invention includes cellulose acetate film, polyester film, polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film, polyethylene naphthalate (PEN) film, polyamide film, polyimide film, cellulose triacetate film (TAC). ) Or a plastic film such as a polycarbonate (PC) film is preferred, and a biaxially stretched PET film is particularly preferred. The thickness of the support is about 50 to 300 μm, preferably 70 to 180 μm. In order to improve the chargeability, a metal oxide and a conductive compound such as z or a conductive polymer can be included in the constituent layers. These may be contained in any layer, but are preferably contained in the backing layer or the surface protective layer on the photosensitive layer side, the undercoat layer, and the like. The conductive compounds described in columns 14 to 20 of US Pat. No. 5,244,773 are preferably used.
[0330] 中でも、本発明では、バッキング層側の表面保護層に導電性金属酸化物を含有す ることが好ましい。ここで、導電性金属酸化物とは、結晶性の金属酸ィ匕物粒子であり、 酸素欠陥を含むもの及び用いられる金属酸ィ匕物に対してドナーを形成する異種原 子を少量含むもの等は、一般的に言って導電性が高いので特に好ましぐ特に後者 はハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤にカブリを与えな 、ので好まし 、。金属酸化物の例として ZnO、 TiO、 SnO、 Al O、 In O、 SiO、 MgO、 BaO、 MoO、 V O等、又はこれらの複[0330] In particular, in the present invention, it is preferable that the surface protective layer on the backing layer side contains a conductive metal oxide. Here, the conductive metal oxide is a crystalline metal oxide particle that contains oxygen defects and a small amount of foreign atoms that form donors with respect to the metal oxide used. Are generally preferred because of their high electrical conductivity, and the latter is particularly preferred because the latter does not add fog to the silver halide emulsion. Examples of metal oxides include ZnO, TiO, SnO, AlO, InO, SiO, MgO, BaO, MoO, VO, etc.
2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 5 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 5
合酸化物がよぐ特に ZnO、 TiO及び SnOが好ましい。異種原子を含む例としては  In particular, ZnO, TiO and SnO are preferred. Examples that include heteroatoms
2 2  twenty two
、例えば ZnOに対しては Al、 In等の添加、 SnOに対しては Sb、 Nb、 P、ハロゲン元  For example, Al, In, etc. are added to ZnO, Sb, Nb, P, halogen elements are added to SnO
2  2
素等の添加、又、 TiOに対しては Nb、 Ta等の添加が効果的である。これら異種原  Addition of elements, etc., and addition of Nb, Ta, etc. to TiO are effective. These heterogeneous fields
2  2
子の添加量は 0. 01〜30モル0 /0の範囲が好ましいが、 0. 1〜10モル0 /0であれば特 に好ましい。更に又、微粒子分散性、透明性改良のために、微粒子作製時に珪素化 合物を添加してもよい。 The addition amount of the child is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 30 mole 0/0, preferably especially if 0.1 to 10 mole 0/0. Furthermore, a silicon compound may be added during the production of fine particles in order to improve fine particle dispersibility and transparency.
[0331] 本発明に用いられる金属酸化物微粒子は導電性を有しており、その体積抵抗率は 107 Ω 'cm以下、特に 105 Ω 'cm以下である。これらの酸ィ匕物については、特開昭 5 6— 143431号、同 56— 120519号、同 58— 62647号等に記載されている。更に又 、特公昭 59— 6235号に記載の如ぐ他の結晶性金属酸ィ匕物粒子あるいは繊維状 物 (酸化チタン等)に上記の金属酸化物を付着させた導電性素材を使用してもよい。 [0331] The metal oxide fine particles used in the present invention have electrical conductivity, and the volume resistivity thereof is 10 7 Ω'cm or less, particularly 10 5 Ω'cm or less. These acid compounds are described in JP-A Nos. 56-143431, 56-120519, 58-62647 and the like. Furthermore, using a conductive material in which the above metal oxide is attached to other crystalline metal oxide particles or fibrous materials (such as titanium oxide) as described in JP-B-59-6235. Also good.
[0332] 利用できる粒子サイズは 1 μ m以下が好ましいが、 0. 5 m以下だと分散後の安定 性が良く使用し易い。又、光散乱性をできるだけ小さくするために 0. 以下の導 電性粒子を利用すると、透明感光材料を形成することが可能となり大変好ましい。又 、導電性金属酸化物が針状あるいは繊維状の場合は、その長さは 30 /z m以下で直 径が 1 μ m以下が好ましぐ特に好ましくは長さが 10 μ m以下で直径 0. 3 μ m以下で あり、長さ Z直径比が 3以上である。なお、 SnOとしては石原産業社より市販されて  [0332] The particle size that can be used is preferably 1 μm or less, but if it is 0.5 m or less, the stability after dispersion is good and it is easy to use. In order to make the light scattering property as small as possible, it is very preferable to use conductive particles of less than 0. This makes it possible to form a transparent photosensitive material. When the conductive metal oxide is needle-like or fibrous, the length is preferably 30 / zm or less and the diameter is preferably 1 μm or less, and particularly preferably the length is 10 μm or less and the diameter is 0 μm. It is 3 μm or less, and the length Z diameter ratio is 3 or more. SnO is commercially available from Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd.
2  2
おり、 SNS10M、 SN— 100P、 SN— 100D、 FSS10M等を用!/、ることカできる。 [0333] (層構成) SNS10M, SN-100P, SN-100D, FSS10M, etc. are used! / I can do it. [0333] (Layer structure)
本発明の熱現像感光材料は、支持体上に少なくとも 1層の画像形成層である感光 性層を有している。支持体上に感光性層のみを形成してもよいが、感光性層の上に 少なくとも 1層の非画像形成層を形成することが好まし ヽ。例えば感光性層の上には 、感光性層を保護する目的で保護層が設けられるのが好ましぐ又、支持体の反対 の面には、感光材料間の、又は感光材料ロールにおける「くっ付き」を防止するため に、ノックコート層が設けられる。  The photothermographic material of the present invention has a photosensitive layer which is at least one image forming layer on a support. Although only the photosensitive layer may be formed on the support, it is preferable to form at least one non-image forming layer on the photosensitive layer. For example, it is preferable that a protective layer is provided on the photosensitive layer for the purpose of protecting the photosensitive layer. On the opposite side of the support, a “clump” is formed between the photosensitive materials or in the photosensitive material roll. In order to prevent “sticking”, a knock coat layer is provided.
[0334] これらの保護層やバックコート層に用いるバインダーとしては、感光性層よりもガラス 転位点 (Tg)が高ぐ擦傷や変形の生じ難いポリマー、例えばセルロースアセテート、 セルロースアセテートブチレート、セルロースアセテートプロピオネート等のポリマー 力 前記バインダーの中力 選ばれる。  [0334] As a binder used in these protective layers and backcoat layers, a polymer having a glass transition point (Tg) higher than that of the photosensitive layer and less likely to be scratched or deformed, such as cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate, and cellulose acetate. Polymer power such as propionate The medium power of the binder is selected.
[0335] なお、階調調整等のために、感光性層を支持体の一方の側に 2層以上、又は支持 体の両側に 1層以上ずつ設置してもよい。 [0335] Note that two or more photosensitive layers may be provided on one side of the support or one or more layers on both sides of the support for gradation adjustment and the like.
[0336] (構成層の塗布)  [0336] (Application of constituent layers)
熱現像感光材料は、上述した各構成層の素材を溶媒に溶解又は分散させた塗布 液を作り、それら塗布液を複数同時に重層塗布した後、加熱処理を行って形成され ることが好ましい。ここで「複数同時に重層塗布」とは、各構成層 (感光性層、保護層 など)の塗布液を調製し、これを支持体へ塗布する際に、各層個別に塗布'乾燥の繰 返しをするのではなぐ同時に重層塗布を行い、乾燥する工程も同時に行える状態 で各構成層を形成することを意味する。即ち、下層中の全溶剤の残存量が 70質量 %以下 (より好ましくは 90質量%以下)となる前に上層を設けることである。  The photothermographic material is preferably formed by preparing a coating solution in which the above-described constituent materials are dissolved or dispersed in a solvent, applying a plurality of coating solutions simultaneously, and then performing a heat treatment. Here, “multiple simultaneous multi-layer coating” means that the coating solution for each component layer (photosensitive layer, protective layer, etc.) is prepared, and when this is applied to the support, the coating and drying are repeated for each layer individually. This means that the constituent layers are formed in such a state that the multilayer coating is simultaneously performed and the drying process can be performed simultaneously. That is, the upper layer is provided before the remaining amount of all the solvents in the lower layer reaches 70% by mass or less (more preferably 90% by mass or less).
[0337] 各構成層を複数同時に重層塗布する方法には特に制限はなぐ例えばバーコータ 一法、カーテンコート法、浸漬法、エアーナイフ法、ホッパー塗布法、リバースロール 塗布法、グラビア塗布法、エタストリュージョン塗布法等の公知の方法を用いることが できる。これらの各種方法の内、より好ましくはスライド塗布法、エタストリュージョン塗 布法である。これらの塗布方法は感光性層を有する側について述べた力 バック層 を設ける際、下引き層と共に塗布する場合についても同様である。熱現像感光材料 における同時重層塗布方法に関しては、特開 2000— 15173号に詳細な記載があ る。 [0337] There are no particular restrictions on the method of simultaneously applying multiple layers of each constituent layer, for example, bar coater method, curtain coating method, dipping method, air knife method, hopper coating method, reverse roll coating method, gravure coating method, etast A known method such as a coating method can be used. Of these various methods, the slide coating method and the etatrusion coating method are more preferable. These coating methods are the same in the case of coating with the undercoat layer when providing the force back layer described for the side having the photosensitive layer. JP-A-2000-15173 has a detailed description on the simultaneous multilayer coating method in the photothermographic material. The
[0338] 尚、塗布銀量は感光材料の目的に応じた適量を選ぶことが好ま 、が、医療用画 像を目的とする場合には、 0. 8〜1. 5g/m2が好ましぐ 1. 0〜1. 3g/m2がより好 ましい。当該塗布銀量の中、ハロゲンィ匕銀に由来するものは、全銀量に対して 2〜18 %を占めることが好ましぐ更には 5〜15%が好ましい。又、 0. 01 m以上(球相当 換算粒径)のハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の塗布密度は 1 X 1014〜1 X 1018個/ m2が好ましい 。更には 1 X 1015〜1 X 1017個/ m2が好ましい。 [0338] The silver coating amount is preferably selected in accordance with the purpose of the light-sensitive material, but is preferably 0.8 to 1.5 g / m 2 for the purpose of medical images. G 1.0 to 1.3 g / m 2 is more preferred. Among the coated silver amounts, those derived from halogenated silver preferably occupy 2-18% of the total silver amount, and more preferably 5-15%. Further, the coating density of halogen silver particles of 0.01 m or more (equivalent particle diameter equivalent to a sphere) is preferably 1 × 10 14 to 1 × 10 18 particles / m 2 . Furthermore, 1 × 10 15 to 1 × 10 17 / m 2 is preferable.
[0339] 更に、前記の非感光性長鎖脂肪族カルボン酸銀の塗布密度は、 0. 01 μ m以上( 球相当換算粒径)のハロゲンィ匕銀粒子 1個当たり 1 X 10— 17〜1 X 10— 14gが好ましぐ 1 X 10— 16〜1 X 10—15gがより好ましい。 [0339] Further, the coated weight of light-insensitive long-chain aliphatic carboxylic acid silver Said, Harogeni匕銀one particle per 1 X 10- 17 to 1 of 0. 01 mu m or more (a sphere equivalent grain diameter) X 10- 14 g is preferred instrument 1 X 10- 16 ~1 X 10- 15 g is more preferred.
[0340] 上記のような範囲内の条件において塗布した場合には、一定塗布銀量当たりの銀 画像の光学的最高濃度、即ち銀被覆量 (カバーリング 'パワー)及び銀画像の色調等 の観点力も好まし 、結果が得られる。  [0340] When applied under the conditions within the above ranges, the maximum optical density of the silver image per certain amount of applied silver, that is, the silver coating amount (covering power), the color tone of the silver image, etc. I also like power and get results.
[0341] 本発明の熱現像感光材料は、現像時に溶剤を 5〜1, OOOmgZm2の範囲で含有 して!/、ることが好まし 、。 10〜 150mg/m2であるように調整することがより好まし!/、。 それにより、高感度、低カプリ、最高濃度の高い熱現像感光材料となる。溶剤として は、特開 2001— 264930号の段落「0030」に記載のものが挙げられる力 これらに 限定されるものではない。又、これらの溶剤は、単独又は数種類組み合わせて用い ることができる。尚、感光材料中の上記溶剤の含有量は、塗布工程後の乾燥工程等 における温度条件等の条件変化によって調整できる。又、当該溶剤の含有量は、含 有させた溶剤を検出するために適した条件下におけるガスクロマトグラフィーで測定 できる。 [0341] The photothermographic material of the present invention contains a solvent in the range of 5 to 1, OOOmgZm 2 during development! /, I prefer to be. It is more preferable to be adjusted so that 10~ 150mg / m 2! /. As a result, the photothermographic material has high sensitivity, low capri and high maximum density. Examples of the solvent include those described in JP-A-2001-264930, paragraph “0030”, but are not limited thereto. These solvents can be used alone or in combination of several kinds. The content of the solvent in the photosensitive material can be adjusted by changing conditions such as temperature conditions in the drying process after the coating process. The content of the solvent can be measured by gas chromatography under conditions suitable for detecting the contained solvent.
[0342] (熱現像処理)  [0342] (Heat development)
本発明の熱現像感光材料は、像様露光後、所望の現像温度で加熱することで画 像形成する熱現像機で処理することを特徴とする。熱現像温度は 110〜150°Cの範 囲であることが好ましぐ更には 115〜135°Cの範囲が好ましい。加熱温度が 80°C未 満では短時間に十分な画像濃度が得られず、又、高温 (特に 200°C以上)ではバイ ンダ一の溶融等によるローラーへの転写や、搬送性、現像機等へも悪影響を及ぼす 。加熱することで脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩 (酸化剤として機能する)と還元剤との間の 酸化還元反応により銀画像を生成する。この反応過程は、外部からの水等の処理液 の供給を一切行わな!/ヽで進行する。 The photothermographic material of the present invention is characterized in that after imagewise exposure, the photothermographic material is processed by a heat developing machine that forms an image by heating at a desired development temperature. The heat development temperature is preferably in the range of 110 to 150 ° C, more preferably in the range of 115 to 135 ° C. If the heating temperature is less than 80 ° C, sufficient image density cannot be obtained in a short time, and if the heating temperature is high (particularly 200 ° C or more), transfer to a roller due to melting of the binder, transportability, developing machine, etc. Adversely affect . By heating, a silver image is generated by a redox reaction between an aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt (which functions as an oxidizing agent) and a reducing agent. This reaction process proceeds with no external supply of treatment liquid such as water! / ヽ.
[0343] 加熱手段は加熱ドラム、加熱プレート等との接触加熱、輻射等の非接触加熱、何れ の手段を用いても構わないが、加熱プレートとの接触加熱が好ましい。接触加熱面 は画像形成層 (感光性層)側、非画像形成層(非感光性層)側の何れでも構わない 力 処理環境に対する安定性から非画像形成層 (感光層)側が接触加熱面であるこ とが好ま 、。現像部は独立して温度制御された複数のゾーン及び複数の手段を組 み合わせて構成されていることが好ましぐ更には、特定の現像温度を維持する保温 ゾーンを少なくとも一つ有していることが好ましい。従って、本発明に好ましく使用で きる熱現像装置にお!、ては、熱現像プロセスを昇温部と保温部とで個別の構成を採 用でき、昇温部で加熱部材等の加熱手段とシートフィルムとの密な接触を図り濃度ム ラの発生を抑え、保温部では、そのような密な接触を図る必要がなぐ昇温部と保温 部とで異なる最適な加熱方式を用いることで、濃度ムラのな 、高画質を維持しながら 熱現像プロセスの迅速処理、装置の小型化及びコストダウンが可能な構成にできる。  [0343] The heating means may be any means such as contact heating with a heating drum or a heating plate, non-contact heating such as radiation, but contact heating with a heating plate is preferred. The contact heating surface may be either the image forming layer (photosensitive layer) side or the non-image forming layer (non-photosensitive layer) side. The non-image forming layer (photosensitive layer) side is the contact heating surface for stability to the processing environment. I prefer to be there. It is preferable that the developing unit is configured by combining a plurality of zones and a plurality of means that are independently temperature controlled, and further includes at least one heat retention zone that maintains a specific developing temperature. Preferably it is. Therefore, in the heat development apparatus that can be preferably used in the present invention, the heat development process can employ a separate structure for the temperature raising portion and the heat retaining portion, and in the temperature raising portion, heating means such as a heating member can be used. By maintaining close contact with the sheet film and suppressing the occurrence of density unevenness, the heat retaining part uses an optimum heating method that is different between the temperature rising part and the heat retaining part, which does not require such close contact, It is possible to achieve a configuration that allows rapid processing of the thermal development process, downsizing of the apparatus, and cost reduction while maintaining high image quality without density unevenness.
[0344] 上記熱現像装置において、前記昇温部は、前記シートフィルムを対向ローラーによ りプレートヒータに押圧して接触させながら加熱し、前記保温部は、少なくとも一方に ヒータを有するガイド間に形成されたスリット内において前記シートフィルムを加熱す る構成にできる。昇温部ではシートフィルムを対向ローラーによりプレートヒータに押 圧して接触させることで、プレートヒータとシートフィルムとを密に接触させることができ る一方、保温部では昇温部の対向ローラーによる搬送力でスリット間において加熱( 保温)しながら搬送すればよいので、搬送系の駆動部品が不要になり、又、スリット寸 法の精度もさほど要求されずに、装置の小型化及びコストダウンが可能になる。 実施例  [0344] In the heat development apparatus, the temperature raising unit heats the sheet film while pressing the sheet film against a plate heater by a counter roller, and the heat retaining unit is interposed between guides having at least one heater. The sheet film can be heated in the formed slit. In the temperature raising part, the sheet heater is pressed against the plate heater by the opposing roller and brought into contact with the plate heater, so that the plate heater and the sheet film can be brought into close contact with each other. Therefore, it is only necessary to transport while keeping the temperature between the slits (heat insulation), so there is no need for drive parts for the transport system, and the size of the device can be reduced and the cost can be reduced without requiring much accuracy of the slit dimensions. Become. Example
[0345] 以下、実施例を挙げて本発明を詳細に説明するが、本発明の態様はこれに限定さ れるものではない。なお、特に断りない限り、実施例中の「部」は「質量部」を、「%」は 「質量%」を示す。  [0345] Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to examples, but the embodiments of the present invention are not limited thereto. Unless otherwise specified, “parts” in the examples represents “parts by mass” and “%” represents “% by mass”.
[0346] (下引き済み支持体の作製) 青色染料濃度 0. 113の 2軸延伸済み PETフィルムの両面に 1 OWZm2 · minの条 件でコロナ放電処理を施し、一方の面に下記組成のバック面側下引き下層用塗布液 を乾燥膜厚 0. 06 /z mになるように塗設し 140°Cで乾燥し、続いて下記組成のノック 面側下引き上層用塗布液を乾燥膜厚 0. 2 mになるように塗設した後 140°Cで乾燥 した。又、反対側の面には、下記組成の画像形成面側下引き下層用塗布液を乾燥 膜厚 0. 25 mになるように塗設し、続いて下記組成の画像形成面側下引き上層用 塗布液を乾燥膜厚 0. 06 /z mになるように塗設した後 140°Cで乾燥した。これらを 14 0°Cで 2分間熱処理し、下引き済み支持体を得た。 [0346] (Preparation of underdrawn support) Corona discharge treatment was applied to both sides of a biaxially stretched PET film with a blue dye concentration of 0.113 under the condition of 1 OWZm 2 min, and the coating solution for the undercoat layer on the back side with the following composition was dried on one side. After coating to a thickness of 0.06 / zm and drying at 140 ° C, the coating solution for the knock surface side undercoat with the following composition was applied to a dry film thickness of 0.2 m. Dried at 140 ° C. On the other side, a coating solution for the undercoat layer on the image forming surface side having the following composition is applied so as to have a dry film thickness of 0.25 m, and then the undercoat layer on the image forming surface side having the following composition. The coating solution was applied to a dry film thickness of 0.06 / zm and then dried at 140 ° C. These were heat-treated at 140 ° C. for 2 minutes to obtain an undercoated support.
[0347] 下引層用界面活性剤: [0347] Surfactant for undercoat layer:
[2, 4—(C H ) ]— C H— (CH CH O) SO Na  [2, 4— (C H)] — C H— (CH CH O) SO Na
9 19 6 3 2 2 12 3  9 19 6 3 2 2 12 3
(バック面側下引き下層用塗布液)  (Back surface side undercoat lower layer coating solution)
スチレン Zグリシジルメタタリレート Zブチルアタリレート(20Z20Z40)の共重合ポ リマーラテックス(固形分 30%) 16. Og  Styrene Z Glycidyl metatalylate Copolymer polymer latex of Z-butyl atylate (20Z20Z40) (solid content 30%) 16. Og
スチレン Zブチルアタリレート Zヒドロキシメチルメタタリレート(25Z45Z30)の共 重合ポリマーラテックス(固形分 30%) 4. Og  Styrene Z-Butyl Atylate Copolymer latex of Z-hydroxymethyl metatalylate (25Z45Z30) (solid content 30%) 4. Og
酸化錫ゾル(固形分 10%,特開平 10— 059720号記載の方法で合成) 91g 下引層用界面活性剤 SA- 1 0. 5g  Tin oxide sol (solid content 10%, synthesized by the method described in JP-A-10-059720) 91g Surfactant SA-1 for subbing layer 0.5g
以上に蒸溜水を加えて 1, 000mlとし、塗布液とした。  Distilled water was added to make 1,000 ml to make the coating solution.
[0348] (バック面側下引き上層用塗布液) [0348] (Back surface side undercoat upper layer coating solution)
ノ ック層用変性水性ポリエステル * (固形分 18%) 215. 0g 下引層用界面活性剤 0. 4g  Modified water-based polyester for knock layer * (solid content 18%) 215.0 g Surfactant for undercoat layer 0.4 g
真球状シリカマット剤(シーホスター KE— P50 :日本触媒社製) 0. 3g 以上に蒸溜水を加えて 1, 000mlとし、塗布液とした。  True spherical silica matting agent (Seahoster KE-P50: manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.) Distilled water was added to 0.3 g or more to make 1,000 ml to obtain a coating solution.
[0349] 〈バック層用変性水性ポリエステルの合成 * > <Synthesis of modified aqueous polyester for back layer *>
重合用反応容器に、テレフタル酸ジメチル 35. 4部、イソフタル酸ジメチル 33. 63 部、 5—スルホ—イソフタル酸ジメチルナトリウム塩 17. 92部、エチレングリコール 62 部、酢酸カルシウム一水塩 0. 065部、酢酸マンガン四水塩 0. 022部を投入し、窒素 気流下において、 170〜220°Cでメタノールを溜去しながらエステル交換反応を行つ た後、燐酸トリメチル 0. 04部、重縮合触媒とし三酸化アンチモン 0. 04部及び 1, 4 ーシクロへキサンジカルボン酸 6. 8部を加え、 220〜235°Cの反応温度で、ほぼ理 論量の水を溜去し、エステルイ匕を行った。その後、更に反応系内を約 1時間かけて減 圧、昇温し最終的に 280°C、 133Pa以下で約 1時間重縮合を行い、変性水性ポリェ ステルの前駆体を得た。前駆体の固有粘度は 0. 33であった。 In a polymerization reactor, dimethyl terephthalate 35.4 parts, dimethyl isophthalate 33.63 parts, 5-sulfo-isophthalic acid dimethyl sodium salt 17.92 parts, ethylene glycol 62 parts, calcium acetate monohydrate 0.065 parts Then, 0.022 part of manganese acetate tetrahydrate was added and transesterification was carried out while distilling methanol at 170-220 ° C under a nitrogen stream. After that, 0.04 part of trimethyl phosphate, 0.04 part of antimony trioxide as a polycondensation catalyst and 6.8 parts of 1,4-cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid were added, and the reaction temperature of 220-235 ° C was almost theoretical. An amount of water was distilled off and esterification was conducted. Thereafter, the reaction system was further depressurized and heated for about 1 hour, and finally subjected to polycondensation at 280 ° C. and 133 Pa or less for about 1 hour to obtain a modified aqueous polyester precursor. The intrinsic viscosity of the precursor was 0.33.
[0350] 攪拌翼、環流冷却管、温度計を付した 2Lの三つ口フラスコに、純水 850mlを入れ 、攪拌翼を回転させながら、 150gの上記前駆体を徐々に添加した。室温でこのまま 30分間攪拌した後、 1. 5時間かけて内温が 98°Cになるように加熱し、この温度で 3 時間加熱 *溶解した。加熱終了後、 1時間かけて室温まで冷却し、一夜放置して、固 形分濃度 15%の前駆体の溶液を調製した。  [0350] 850 ml of pure water was placed in a 2 L three-necked flask equipped with a stirring blade, a reflux condenser, and a thermometer, and 150 g of the precursor was gradually added while rotating the stirring blade. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes, then heated to an internal temperature of 98 ° C over 1.5 hours, and heated at this temperature for 3 hours * dissolved. After completion of the heating, the mixture was cooled to room temperature over 1 hour and allowed to stand overnight to prepare a precursor solution having a solid concentration of 15%.
[0351] 攪拌翼、環流冷却管、温度計、滴下ロートを付した 3Lの四つ口フラスコに、上記前 駆体溶液 1900mlを入れ、攪拌翼を回転させながら、内温度を 80°Cまで加熱した。 この中に、過酸化アンモ-ゥムの 24%水溶液を 6. 52ml加え、単量体混合液 (メタク リル酸グリシジル 28. 5g、アクリル酸ェチル 21. 4g、メタクリル酸メチル 21. 4g)を 30 分間かけて滴下し、更に 3時間反応を続けた。その後、 30°C以下まで冷却し、濾過し て、固形分濃度 18%のバック層用変性水性ポリエステルの溶液を調製した。  [0351] Put 1900 ml of the above precursor solution in a 3 L four-necked flask equipped with a stirring blade, reflux condenser, thermometer, and dropping funnel, and heat the internal temperature to 80 ° C while rotating the stirring blade. did. To this, 6.52 ml of a 24% aqueous solution of ammonium peroxide was added, and a monomer mixture (28.5 g of glycidyl methacrylate, 21.4 g of ethyl acrylate, 21.4 g of methyl methacrylate) was added. The solution was added dropwise over a period of 3 minutes, and the reaction was continued for another 3 hours. Thereafter, the solution was cooled to 30 ° C. or lower and filtered to prepare a solution of a modified aqueous polyester for a back layer having a solid concentration of 18%.
[0352] (画像形成面側下引き下層用塗布液)  [0352] (Image forming surface side undercoat coating solution)
スチレン Zァセトァセトキシェチルメタタリレート Zグリシジルメタタリレート Zブチル アタリレート(40Z40Z20Z0. 5)の共重合ポリマーラテックス(固形分 30%)  Copolymer latex of styrene Z-acetoxetoxyl metatalylate Z glycidyl metatalylate Z butyl acrylate (40Z40Z20Z0.5) (solid content 30%)
70g  70g
下引層用界面活性剤 0. 3g  Surfactant for undercoat layer 0.3g
以上に蒸溜水を加えて 1, 000mlとし、塗布液とした。  Distilled water was added to make 1,000 ml to make the coating solution.
(画像形成面側下引き上層用塗布液)  (Image forming surface side undercoat upper layer coating solution)
画像形成面用変性水性ポリエステル * (固形分 18%) 80. Og 下引層用界面活性剤 0. 4g  Modified water-based polyester for image forming surface * (Solid content 18%) 80. Og Surfactant for subbing layer 0.4 g
真球状シリカマット剤(シーホスター KE— P50 :前出) 0. 3g 以上に蒸溜水を加えて 1, 000mlとし、固形分濃度 0. 5%の塗布液とした。  True spherical silica matting agent (Seahoster KE-P50: mentioned above) Distilled water was added to 0.3 g or more to make 1,000 ml, and a coating solution having a solid content concentration of 0.5% was obtained.
[0353] 〈画像形成面用変性水性ポリエステルの合成 * > 前記の変性水性ポリエステルの前駆体溶液を 1800ml、単量体混合液組成をスチ レン 31g、ァセトァセトキシェチノレメタタリレート 3 lg、グリシジノレメタタリレート 6 lg、ブ チルアタリレート 7. 6gとした以外、ノ ック層用変性水性ポリエステルと同様にして固 形分濃度 18%の画像形成面用変性水性ポリエステルの溶液を作製した。 <Synthesis of modified aqueous polyester for image forming surface *> 1800 ml of the modified aqueous polyester precursor solution, 31 g of the monomer mixture, 3 lg of acetocetoxy chinenoremethacrylate, 6 lg of glycidinomethacrylate, 7.6 g of butyrate Except that, a solution of the modified aqueous polyester for image forming surface having a solid content concentration of 18% was prepared in the same manner as the modified aqueous polyester for knock layer.
(ハロゲン化銀乳剤の調製)  (Preparation of silver halide emulsion)
(溶液 A)  (Solution A)
フタル化ゼラチン(フタル化修飾率 95%) 66. 2g 界面活性剤 AO— 1 (10%メタノール水溶液) 10ml 臭化カリウム 32g  Phthalated gelatin (phthalated modification rate 95%) 66. 2g Surfactant AO-1 (10% methanol aqueous solution) 10ml Potassium bromide 32g
水で 5429mlに仕上げる。  Finish to 5429 ml with water.
AO- : HO—(CH CH O) (CH (CH ) CH O) (CH CH O) H (m+n = 5〜7) AO-: HO— (CH CH O) (CH (CH) CH O) (CH CH O) H (m + n = 5 to 7)
(溶液 B)  (Solution B)
0. 67molZL硝酸銀水溶液 2635ml  0. 67molZL Silver nitrate aqueous solution 2635ml
(溶液。)  (Solution.)
臭化カリウム 51. 55g  Potassium bromide 51. 55g
沃化カリウム 1. 47g  Potassium iodide 1. 47g
水で 660mlに仕上げる  Finish to 660ml with water
(溶液。)  (Solution.)
臭化カリウム 154. 9g  Potassium bromide 154.9 g
沃化カリウム 4. 41g  Potassium iodide 4.41 g
ハシアン化鉄 (Π)カリウム (0. 5%溶液) 15ml  Potassium iron cyanide (0.5% solution) 15ml
ハ塩化イリジウム酸 (ΠΙ)カリウム(1%溶液) 0. 93ml  Ha chloride iridium acid (酸) potassium (1% solution) 0.93ml
水で 1982mlに仕上げる  Finish to 1982ml with water
(溶液 E)  (Solution E)
0. 4molZL臭化カリウム水溶液 下記銀電位制御コ  0. 4molZL potassium bromide aqueous solution
(溶液 F)  (Solution F)
水酸化カリウム 0. 71g 水で 20mlに仕上げる Potassium hydroxide 0.71g Finish to 20ml with water
(溶液 G)  (Solution G)
56%酢酸水溶液 10. Oml  56% aqueous acetic acid 10. Oml
(溶液 H)  (Solution H)
無水炭酸ナトリウム 1. 16g  Anhydrous sodium carbonate 1.16g
水で 107mlに仕上げる  Finish to 107ml with water
特公昭 58— 58288号に示される混合攪拌機を用いて、溶液 Aに溶液 Bの 1/4量 及び溶液 Cの全量を温度 35°C、 pAg8. 09〖こ制御しな力ら、同時混合法により 4分 4 5秒を要して添加し核形成を行った。 1分後、溶液 Fの全量を添加した。この間 pAgの 調整のために溶液 Eを用いて適宜行った。 6分経過後、溶液 Bの 3Z4量及び溶液 D の全量を、温度 35°C、 pAg8. 09〖こ制御しな力 、同時混合法により 14分 15秒かけ て添加した。 5分間攪拌した後、 30°Cに降温し、溶液 Gを全量添加し、ハロゲンィ匕銀 乳剤を沈降させた。沈降部分 2000mlを残して上澄み液を取り除き、水を 10リットル 加え、攪拌後、再度ハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤を沈降させた。沈降部分 1500mlを残し、上澄 み液を取り除き、更に水を 10リットル加え、攪拌後、ハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤を沈降させた。 沈降部分 1500mlを残し、上澄み液を取り除いた後、溶液 Hを加え、 60°Cに昇温し、 更に 100分攪拌した。最後に pHが 5. 8になるように調整し、最終仕上がりが 1150g になるように水を添加し、感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀乳剤を得た。この乳剤は、平均粒子サ ィズ 0. 043 ^ m, (100)面比率 92%の単分散立方体沃臭化銀粒子であった。 Using the mixing stirrer shown in Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-58288, a 1/4 volume of solution B and a total volume of solution C were added to solution A at a temperature of 35 ° C, pAg 8.09 at the same time. It was added over a period of 4 minutes 4 5 seconds by been nucleation. After 1 minute, the entire amount of Solution F was added. During this time, solution E was used appropriately for the adjustment of pAg. After 6 minutes, the amount of 3Z4 of solution B and the total amount of solution D were added over a period of 14 minutes and 15 seconds by a simultaneous mixing method at a temperature of 35 ° C. and a pAg of 8.09 μg. After stirring for 5 minutes, the temperature was lowered to 30 ° C., and the entire amount of Solution G was added to precipitate the silver halide emulsion. The supernatant was removed leaving 2000 ml of the sedimented portion, 10 liters of water was added, and after stirring, the halogenated silver emulsion was again settled. The remaining portion of 1500 ml was left, the supernatant was removed, 10 liters of water was further added, and after stirring, the silver halide emulsion was allowed to settle. After leaving 1500 ml of the sedimented portion and removing the supernatant, Solution H was added, the temperature was raised to 60 ° C, and the mixture was further stirred for 100 minutes. Finally, the pH was adjusted to 5.8, and water was added so that the final finish was 1150 g, to obtain a photosensitive halogen silver halide emulsion. This emulsion was monodisperse cubic silver iodobromide grains having an average grain size of 0.043 ^ m and a (100) plane ratio of 92%.
(両親媒性分散用ポリマーの調製)  (Preparation of polymer for amphiphilic dispersion)
0. 5リットルの四つロセパラブルフラスコに、滴下装置、温度計、窒素ガス導入管、 攪拌装置及び還流冷却管を付し、メチルェチルケトン (MEK) 50g、ダイアセトンァク リルアミド 20g、メトキシポリエチレングリコールモノメタタリレート(日本油脂社製:ブレ ンマー PME—400) 20g、ステアロキシポリエチレングリコールモノメタタリレート(日 本油脂社製:ブレンマー PSE— 400) 20g、更にラウリルパーオキサイド 0. 12gを仕 込み、 80°Cにカロ熱した。更に N— iso—プロピルアクリルアミド 40gを MEK43gに溶 解した液をセパラブルフラスコ中に 2時間かけて滴下した。その後 1時間かけて昇温 し、還流状態になった時点で、ラウリルパーオキサイド 0. 17gを MEK33gに溶解した 液をフラスコ中に 2時間かけて滴下し、同温度にて更に 3時間反応させた。その後、メ チルハイドロキノン 0. 33gを MEK107gに溶解した液を添カ卩し、冷却後、ポリマー 30 %の両親媒性分散用ポリマー溶液を得た。分子量は、 GPC (ゲル'パーミエーシヨン •クロマトグラフィ)によるポリエチレンォキシド換算の質量平均分子量で約 12万であ つた。続いて、このポリマー溶液を十分量の水に滴下し、上澄みを取り除いてポリマ 一固形分を取り出した。 0. A 5-liter four-separable flask equipped with a dropping device, thermometer, nitrogen gas inlet tube, stirring device and reflux condenser, methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) 50 g, diacetone acrylamide 20 g, methoxypolyethylene glycol Charge 20g of monometatalylate (Nippon Yushi Co., Ltd .: Bremer PME-400), 20g of stearoxy polyethylene glycol monometatalylate (Blenmer PSE-400, Nihon Yushi Co., Ltd.) and 0.12g of lauryl peroxide. Heated to 80 ° C. Further, a solution obtained by dissolving 40 g of N-iso-propylacrylamide in 43 g of MEK was dropped into a separable flask over 2 hours. Thereafter, the temperature was raised over 1 hour, and when it was refluxed, 0.17 g of lauryl peroxide was dissolved in 33 g of MEK. The liquid was dropped into the flask over 2 hours and reacted at the same temperature for another 3 hours. Thereafter, a solution obtained by dissolving 0.33 g of methylhydroquinone in 107 g of MEK was added, and after cooling, a 30% polymer solution for amphiphilic dispersion was obtained. The molecular weight was about 120,000 in terms of polyethylene oxide equivalent mass average molecular weight by GPC (gel permeation chromatography). Subsequently, this polymer solution was dropped into a sufficient amount of water, and the supernatant was removed to take out a polymer solid.
[0356] (ハロゲン化銀粒子両親媒性分散物の調製)  [0356] (Preparation of amphiphilic dispersion of silver halide grains)
両親媒性分散用ポリマー固形分 7. 5gにメタノール 38gを加えて 45°Cで 30分攪拌 しながら溶解させた。そこに、 45°Cに調温した前記ハロゲン化銀乳剤 42gを 2分かけ て滴下し、更に 30分攪拌した。この液を 30°Cに降温した後、 30分間静置した液は 2 層分離する。液の上澄みを除去し、残液に MEK500gを加え、よく攪拌した後、液中 の含水率が 5%未満になるまで減圧蒸留した。最後に 10%ポリビュルプチラール M EK溶液 50gと全量が 157gとなるように MEKを添加し、ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子両親媒性 分散物を得た。  38 g of methanol was added to 7.5 g of the polymer solid content for amphiphilic dispersion and dissolved at 45 ° C. with stirring for 30 minutes. Thereto, 42 g of the silver halide emulsion adjusted to 45 ° C. was added dropwise over 2 minutes, and the mixture was further stirred for 30 minutes. After cooling this solution to 30 ° C, the solution left for 30 minutes is separated into two layers. The supernatant of the liquid was removed, and 500 g of MEK was added to the remaining liquid. After stirring well, distillation was performed under reduced pressure until the water content in the liquid was less than 5%. Finally, MEK was added so that a total amount of 157 g and 50 g of a 10% polybutyl petital M EK solution were added to obtain an amphiphilic dispersion of silver halide grains.
[0357] (脂肪族カルボン酸銀粒子の作製)  [0357] (Preparation of aliphatic carboxylate silver particles)
脂肪族カルボン酸 (組成モル比は、ベヘン酸:ァラキジン酸:ステアリン酸 =85/1 1/4) 1, 850g及び、濃度 5%に調整する純水量の 90%量を 85°Cで撹拌しながら 5 molZLの水酸ィ匕カリウム水溶液 1, 036mlを、 5分かけて添カ卩した後に 60分間反応 させて、脂肪族カルボン酸カリウム水溶液を得た。次いで、脂肪族カルボン酸カリウム 水溶液の濃度が 5%になるように追加の純粋を加えた。一方、硝酸銀 5%水溶液 38 , 300gを用意し、 10°Cに保温した。脂肪族カルボン酸カリウム水溶液および硝酸銀 力 一定流量で送液できるポンプを用意し、 Y字型の混合装置内において双方の液 が反応できるような反応装置を用意した。先の脂肪族カルボン酸カリウム水溶液、硝 酸銀水溶液を同時に、それぞれ一定の添加速度で、 4分かけて全量を混合装置に 添加し、 Y字型管の下側部より出てきた液をストックした。なお、添加中、ストックタンク は 35°Cに保温した。その後、吸引濾過で固形分を濾別し、固形分を透過水の伝導 度が S/cmになるまで 25°Cで水洗した。得られた脱水済みケーキを流動層を 用 、て 50°Cで乾燥して脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子の乾燥済み粉体を得た。 [0358] (脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩分散乳剤液の作製) Aliphatic carboxylic acid (compositional molar ratio is behenic acid: arachidic acid: stearic acid = 85/1 1/4) 1,850 g and 90% of pure water adjusted to 5% concentration are stirred at 85 ° C. Then, 1036 ml of 5 molZL potassium hydroxide aqueous solution was added over 5 minutes and then reacted for 60 minutes to obtain an aliphatic potassium carboxylate aqueous solution. Then additional pure was added so that the concentration of the aqueous potassium aliphatic carboxylate solution was 5%. On the other hand, 38 and 300 g of a 5% silver nitrate aqueous solution were prepared and kept at 10 ° C. Aliphatic potassium carboxylate aqueous solution and silver nitrate power A pump capable of feeding at a constant flow rate was prepared, and a reaction device was prepared so that both solutions could react in a Y-shaped mixing device. Add the total amount of the previous aliphatic potassium carboxylate aqueous solution and silver nitrate aqueous solution to the mixing device over 4 minutes at a constant addition rate, and stock the liquid that came out from the lower part of the Y-shaped tube. did. During the addition, the stock tank was kept at 35 ° C. Thereafter, the solid content was separated by suction filtration, and the solid content was washed with water at 25 ° C. until the conductivity of the permeated water reached S / cm. The obtained dehydrated cake was dried at 50 ° C. using a fluidized bed to obtain a dried powder of aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles. [0358] (Preparation of aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt dispersion emulsion)
ポリビュルブチラール(積水化学工業社製:エスレック B · BL - SHP) 41gを MEK1 , 239gに溶解し、 VMA— GETZMANN社製デゾルバ一 DISPERMAT CA— 4 OM型にて攪拌しながら、粉末脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩 412gを徐々に添加して十分 に混合することにより予備分散液を調製した。粉末脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩を全量添 カロしてからは、 1, 500rpmで 15分攪拌を行った。この予備分散液をポンプを用いて ミル内滞留時間が 1. 2分間となるように、 0. 5mm径のジルコユアビーズ (東レネ土製: トレセラム)を内容積の 80%充填したメディア型分散機 DISPERMAT SL—C125 EX型(VMA— GETZMANN社製)に供給し、ミル周速 9mZsにて分散を行うこと により脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩分散乳剤液を調製した。得られた脂肪族カルボン酸銀 塩分散乳剤液の固形分濃度は約 27%であった。  Polybulbutyral (Sekisui Chemical Co., Ltd .: ESREC B · BL-SHP) 41 g dissolved in MEK1, 239 g, VMA—GETZMANN resolver DISPERMAT CA— A preliminary dispersion was prepared by gradually adding 412 g of silver salt and mixing well. After adding all of the powdered aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt, the mixture was stirred at 1,500 rpm for 15 minutes. This pre-dispersed liquid is a media-type disperser filled with 80% of the internal volume of 0.5 mm diameter Zirco Your Beads (made by Torayene Earth: Treceram) so that the residence time in the mill is 1.2 minutes. An aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt dispersion emulsion was prepared by supplying to DISPERMAT SL-C125 EX type (VMA-GETZMANN) and dispersing at a mill peripheral speed of 9 mZs. The solid content concentration of the obtained aliphatic carboxylate silver salt dispersion emulsion was about 27%.
[0359] (画像形成層、表面保護層、バック層の塗設)  [0359] (Coating of image forming layer, surface protective layer, back layer)
前記下引き済み支持体の画像形成層面側下引き上に、銀量がそれぞれ 1. 26g/ 0. 06gZm2になるように画像形成層及びスリップ層を、その上にウエット付量が 23gZm2になるように表面保護層を重層塗布した。続ヽて反対側の画像形成層面 側下引き上に、ウエット付量が 25gZm2になるようにバック層を塗布した。なお、乾燥 は各々 60°C · 2分間行った。両面塗布された試料を搬送しながら 79°Cで 10分熱処 理をして熱現像感光材料を得た。 An image forming layer and a slip layer are placed on the undercoat of the undercoated support on the image forming layer side so that the silver amount is 1.26 g / 0.06 gZm 2 , and the wet weight is 23 gZm 2 . A surface protective layer was applied in multiple layers. Subsequently, the back layer was applied on the opposite side of the image forming layer side undercoat so that the wet weight was 25 gZm 2 . Each drying was performed at 60 ° C for 2 minutes. A photothermographic material was obtained by carrying out heat treatment at 79 ° C for 10 minutes while conveying the sample coated on both sides.
[0360] (画像形成層塗布液の調製)  [0360] (Preparation of coating solution for image forming layer)
前記脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩分散乳剤液 1, 692gに前記ハロゲン化銀粒子両親媒 性分散物 157gを添加し、撹拌しながら 18°Cに保温し、ビス (ジメチルァセトアミド)ジ ブロモブロメート(1. 1%メタノール溶液) 9. 4gを添カ卩して 1時間撹拌した。続いて、 臭化カルシウム(11%メタノール溶液) 11. 3gを添加して 30分間撹拌した。更に、赤 外増感色素液を添加して 1時間撹拌し、その後、温度を 13°Cまで降温して更に 30分 間撹拌した。 13°Cに保温したまま、表 1に示すポリビニルブチラール榭脂粉末を画像 形成層中の総固形分に対し表 1に示す割合になる量添加して溶解させた。溶解を確 認した後、テトラクロロフタル酸 (4. 3%MEK溶液) 37gを添加し、更に撹拌を続けな 力 以下の添加物を 15分間隔で添加し、画像形成層塗布液とした。 [0361] フタラジン 12. 9g 157 g of the silver halide grain amphiphilic dispersion was added to 1,692 g of the aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt dispersion emulsion solution, and the mixture was kept at 18 ° C. with stirring, and bis (dimethylacetamido) dibromobromate. (1.1% methanol solution) 9.4 g was added and stirred for 1 hour. Subsequently, 11.3 g of calcium bromide (11% methanol solution) was added and stirred for 30 minutes. Further, an infrared sensitizing dye solution was added and stirred for 1 hour, and then the temperature was lowered to 13 ° C. and stirred for another 30 minutes. While keeping the temperature at 13 ° C., the polyvinyl butyral rosin powder shown in Table 1 was added and dissolved in the amount shown in Table 1 with respect to the total solid content in the image forming layer. After confirming dissolution, 37 g of tetrachlorophthalic acid (4.3% MEK solution) was added, and the following additives were added at intervals of 15 minutes, and stirring was continued to obtain an image forming layer coating solution. [0361] Phthalazine 12. 9g
DesmodurN3300 (モーべィ社製:多官能脂肪族イソシァネート)  DesmodurN3300 (Movey Corp .: polyfunctional aliphatic isocyanate)
表 1、 2に示す量  Amounts shown in Tables 1 and 2
ロイコ染料 1 1. 4g  Leuco dye 1 1. 4g
ロイコ染料 2 0. 6g  Leuco dye 2 0. 6g
4ーメチルフタル酸 l lg  4-methylphthalic acid l lg
カプリ防止剤液 下記  Anti-capri agent solution
現像剤液 下記  Developer solution
〈赤外増感色素液の調製〉  <Preparation of infrared sensitizing dye solution>
赤外増感色素 1を 200mg、赤外増感色素 2を 200mg、 5—メチルー 2 メルカ ブトべンズイミダゾール 100mg、 2 クロ口—安息香酸 16g、増感色素溶解剤 1. 5g を MEK135gに溶解し、赤外増感色素液を調製した。  Infrared sensitizing dye 1 200 mg, Infrared sensitizing dye 2 200 mg, 5-methyl-2-mercabutene imidazole 100 mg, 2 black mouth-benzoic acid 16 g, sensitizing dye solubilizer 1.5 g dissolved in MEK 135 g An infrared sensitizing dye solution was prepared.
[0362] 〈現像剤液の調製〉 <Preparation of developer solution>
還元剤 1— 1: 160gと染料— A: 500mgを MEKに溶解し、 800gに仕上げて現像 剤液とした。  Reducing agent 1-1: 160 g and dye- A: 500 mg was dissolved in MEK and finished to 800 g to obtain a developer solution.
[0363] 〈カプリ防止剤液の調製〉 <Preparation of anti-capri agent liquid>
トリブロモメチルスルホ-ルビリジン 16gを MEKに溶解し、 180gに仕上げてカブリ防 止剤液とした。  16 g of tribromomethylsulfururidine was dissolved in MEK and finished to 180 g to obtain an antifoggant solution.
[0364] (スリップ層塗布液) [0364] (Slip layer coating solution)
上記調製した画像形成層塗布液 16. 5g 16.5 g of the image forming layer coating solution prepared above
MEK 1. 5g MEK 1.5 g
ポリメチルメタタリレート(ロームアンドハース社製、パラロイド A21) 25g (表面保護層塗布液)  Polymethylmetatalylate (Rohm and Haas, Paraloid A21) 25g (surface protective layer coating solution)
MEK 1056g  MEK 1056g
セルロースアセテートブチレート(イーストマンケミカル社製: CAB171— 15)  Cellulose acetate butyrate (Eastman Chemical Co., CAB171-15)
148g  148g
ポリメチルメタタリレート(ロームアンドハース社製、パラロイド A21) 6g ステアリン酸カルシウム(日本油脂社製: MC- 2) 3g 架橋剤 (CH =CH SOCH ) CH(OH) 2.5g Polymethylmetatalylate (Rohm and Haas, Paraloid A21) 6g Calcium stearate (Nippon Yushi Co., Ltd .: MC-2) 3g Crosslinking agent (CH = CH SOCH) CH (OH) 2.5g
2 2 2 2  2 2 2 2
ベンゾトリァゾーノレ 2g  Benzotriazonore 2g
弗素系界面活性剤 CF O(CHCHO) CF 5. Fluorosurfactant CF O (CHCHO) CF 5.
(バック層塗布液)  (Back layer coating solution)
MEK 1350g  MEK 1350g
セノレロースアセテートプロピオネート  Senorelose acetate propionate
(イーストマンケミカル社製: CAP482— 20) 155g  (Eastman Chemical: CAP482-20) 155g
染料 A 0.71g  Dye A 0.71g
染料 B 1.7g  Dye B 1.7g
弗素系アクリル共重合体 (ダイキン工業社製:ォプトフロン FM450) 1.6g 非結晶性飽和共重合ポリエステル (東洋紡績社製:バイロン 240P) 12g 真球状架橋マット剤 (積水化成工業社製: MBX-8) 4. Og 界面活性剤 CF O(CHCHO) CF 7. lg  Fluorine-based acrylic copolymer (Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd .: Optoflon FM450) 1.6 g Amorphous saturated copolyester (Toyobo Co., Ltd .: Byron 240P) 12 g True spherical cross-linking matting agent (Sekisui Chemical Co., Ltd .: MBX-8) 4. Og surfactant CF O (CHCHO) CF 7. lg
9 17 2 2 23 9  9 17 2 2 23 9
界面活性剤 LiO S (CF ) SO Li  Surfactant LiO S (CF) SO Li
2 3 lg  2 3 lg
[化 45] [Chemical 45]
赤外増感色素一 1 Infrared sensitizing dye 1
Figure imgf000116_0001
6]
Figure imgf000116_0001
6]
染料 A Dye A
Figure imgf000117_0001
Figure imgf000117_0001
[0367] 〈試料の評価〉 <Evaluation of sample>
《保存による感度、カプリ濃度、最高濃度の変動評価》  《Evaluation of fluctuation of sensitivity, capri concentration, maximum concentration by storage》
上記のように作製した熱現像感光材料試料を半切サイズ (34. 5cm X 43. Ocm)に 加工した後、 25°C50%の環境下で以下の包装材料に包装した試料を 2袋づっ作製 した。 2週間常温下で保管した後、 1袋は 23°CZlO日、もう 1袋は 55°CZlO日保存 し、その後、以下の評価を行った。  The photothermographic material sample prepared as described above was processed into half-cut size (34.5 cm x 43. Ocm), and then two samples of samples wrapped in the following packaging material in a 25 ° C 50% environment were prepared. . After storing at room temperature for 2 weeks, one bag was stored at 23 ° C ZlO days, and the other bag was stored at 55 ° CZlO days, and then the following evaluation was performed.
[0368] (包装材料) [0368] (Packaging materials)
PET10 μ m/PE12 μ mZアルミ箔 9 μ m/Nyl5 μ mZカーボン 3%を含むポリ エチレン 50 m (酸素透過率: 0. 05mlZatm*m2 ' day(25°C)、水分透過率: 0. 0 01gZm2 ' day(40°C90%RH) )のバリア袋及び、紙トレーを使用。(latmは、 1. 01 3 X 105Paである。) PET10 μ m / PE12 μ mZ aluminum foil 9 μ m / Nyl5 μ mZ poly ethylene 50 comprising carbon 3% m (oxygen permeability: 0. 05mlZatm * m 2 'day (25 ° C), moisture permeability: 0. 0 01gZm 2 'day (40 ° C90% RH)) Barrier bag and paper tray are used. (Latm is 1. 01 3 X 10 5 Pa.)
最大 50mW出力の 786nm半導体レーザー搭載のレーザーイメージヤーにて露光 と同時に 129°Cにて 8秒間熱現像し、得られた画像の評価を濃度計により行った。(こ こで、「露光と同時に熱現像する」とは、熱現像感光材料からなる 1枚のシート感光材 料で、一部が露光されながら、同時に既に露光が為されたシートの一部分で現像が 開始されることを意味する。露光部と現像部との距離は 12cmで、この時の線速度は 30mmZ秒であった。また、感光材料供給装置部から画像露光装置部までの搬送 速度、画像露光部での搬送速度、熱現像部での搬送速度は、それぞれ 30mmZ秒 で行った。)露光は最高出力から 1段ごとに露光エネルギー量を logEO. 05ずつ減じ ながら階段状に行った。 A laser imager equipped with a 786nm semiconductor laser with a maximum output of 50mW was exposed to heat and developed at 129 ° C for 8 seconds. The resulting image was evaluated with a densitometer. (Here, “heat development at the same time as exposure” means a sheet of photosensitive material made of photothermographic material that is partially exposed and developed on a part of the sheet that has already been exposed. But Means to be started. The distance between the exposed area and the developed area was 12 cm, and the linear velocity at this time was 30 mmZ seconds. The transport speed from the photosensitive material supply unit to the image exposure unit, the transport rate at the image exposure unit, and the transport rate at the thermal development unit were each 30 mmZ seconds. ) The exposure was performed in a stepped manner while reducing the exposure energy amount by logEO.05 for each step from the maximum output.
[0369] 上記のようにして得られた形成画像に対し、濃度計を用いて濃度測定を行!ヽ、横軸 露 [0369] Measure the density of the formed image obtained as described above using a densitometer!ヽ, horizontal axis
光量、縦軸 濃度から成る特性曲線を作成した。特性曲線において、感度は未露光 部分よりも 1. 0高い濃度を与える露光量の逆数を感度と定義し、最小濃度カプリ濃 度 (最小濃度)及び最高濃度を測定した。なお、感度は、試料 1の 23°C10日保存品 を 100とする相対値で表した。  A characteristic curve consisting of light intensity and vertical axis density was created. In the characteristic curve, the sensitivity is defined as the reciprocal of the exposure that gives a density 1.0 higher than the unexposed area, and the minimum density capri density (minimum density) and the maximum density were measured. Sensitivity was expressed as a relative value with the value of Sample 1 stored at 23 ° C for 10 days as 100.
[0370] [表 1] [0370] [Table 1]
Desmodur 画像形成層用 画像形成層用 画像形成層用 Desmodur For image forming layer For image forming layer For image forming layer
N3300 バインダー(1) バインダー(2) パ、ィンダー  N3300 binder (1) binder (2)
(*3) (* 3)
Tg 添加量 Tg 添加量 total添加量 添加量 重合度 里! 3 Tg addition amount Tg addition amount total addition amount addition amount Degree of polymerization Risa! Three
('c) (*1) (。c) (*1) (*2) (*4) ('c) (* 1) (.c) (* 1) (* 2) (* 4)
500 62 40 ― ― ― 40 4.0%500 62 40 ― ― ― 40 4.0%
500 62 22.75 2600 67 17.25 40 4.0%500 62 22.75 2600 67 17.25 40 4.0%
500 62 22.75 2600 67 12.25 35 4.0%500 62 22.75 2600 67 12.25 35 4.0%
500 76 22.75 2600 75 12.25 35 4.0%500 76 22.75 2600 75 12.25 35 4.0%
500 76 22.75 2600 75 12.25 35 3.0%500 76 22.75 2600 75 12.25 35 3.0%
500 76 17.75 2600 75 12.25 30 3.0%500 76 17.75 2600 75 12.25 30 3.0%
500 76 12.75 2600 75 12.25 25 3.0%500 76 12.75 2600 75 12.25 25 3.0%
500 76 10.75 2600 75 12.25 23 3.0%500 76 10.75 2600 75 12.25 23 3.0%
500 76 17.75 800 73 12.25 30 3.0%500 76 17.75 800 73 12.25 30 3.0%
500 76 17.75 1000 73 12.25 30 3.0%500 76 17.75 1000 73 12.25 30 3.0%
500 76 17.75 3000 73 12.25 30 3.0%500 76 17.75 3000 73 12.25 30 3.0%
500 76 17.75 3500 72 12.25 30 3.0%500 76 17.75 3500 72 12.25 30 3.0%
1200 75 40 ― ― ― 40 3.0%1200 75 40 ― ― ― 40 3.0%
1200 75 35 一 ― ― 35 3.0%1200 75 35 One ― ― 35 3.0%
1200 75 30 ― ― ― 30 3.0%1200 75 30 ― ― ― 30 3.0%
1200 75 25 ― ― ― 25 3.0%1200 75 25 ― ― ― 25 3.0%
1200 75 23 ― 23 3.0%1200 75 23 ― 23 3.0%
800 76 30 ― ― ― 30 3.0%800 76 30 ― ― ― 30 3.0%
1000 76 30 ― ― ― 30 3.0%1000 76 30 ― ― ― 30 3.0%
3000 73 30 ― ― ― 30 3.0%3000 73 30 ― ― ― 30 3.0%
3500 72 30 ― 一 ― 30 3.0% 3500 72 30 ― One ― 30 3.0%
性能 1 ( * 5) 性能 2 ( * 6) Performance 1 (* 5) Performance 2 (* 6)
No . 備 考  No. Remarks
力ブリ濃度 取问濃 感度 力ブリ濃度 最高濃度 感度  Force yellow density Senritsu density Sensitivity power yellow density Maximum density Sensitivity
1 0.17 3.3 100 0. 198 3.2 70 比 較 1 0.17 3.3 100 0. 198 3.2 70 Comparison
2 0.168 3.21 96 0. 172 2.83 62 比 較2 0.168 3.21 96 0. 172 2.83 62 Comparison
3 0. 169 3.48 100 0.178 3.46 97 本発明3 0. 169 3.48 100 0.178 3.46 97 The present invention
4 0.167 3.45 99 0.171 3.4 91 本発明4 0.167 3.45 99 0.171 3.4 91 The present invention
5 0.169 3.51 103 0.175 3.48 99 本発明5 0.169 3.51 103 0.175 3.48 99 The present invention
6 0. 17 3.53 102 0.176 3.5 99 本発明6 0. 17 3.53 102 0.176 3.5 99 The present invention
7 0.172 3.53 103 0.178 3.51 100 本発明7 0.172 3.53 103 0.178 3.51 100 The present invention
8 0.181 3.53 104 0.195 3.33 91 比 較8 0.181 3.53 104 0.195 3.33 91 Comparison
9 0.182 3.47 107 0.203 3.25 85 比 較9 0.182 3.47 107 0.203 3.25 85 Comparison
10 0.173 3.5 105 0.178 3.46 101 本発明10 0.173 3.5 105 0.178 3.46 101 The present invention
11 0.168 3.54 100 0. 172 3.48 96 本発明11 0.168 3.54 100 0. 172 3.48 96 The present invention
12 0.165 3.33 89 0.168 2.98 63 比 較12 0.165 3.33 89 0.168 2.98 63 Comparison
13 0. 166 3.35 90 0. 188 3. 14 68 比 較13 0. 166 3.35 90 0. 188 3. 14 68 Comparison
14 0.169 3.52 102 0.175 3.46 97 本発明14 0.169 3.52 102 0.175 3.46 97 The present invention
15 0. 17 3.53 103 0.177 3.49 97 本発明15 0. 17 3.53 103 0.177 3.49 97 The present invention
16 0.172 3.5 103 0.179 3.5 99 本発明16 0.172 3.5 103 0.179 3.5 99 The present invention
17 0.181 3.51 103 0.199 3.25 87 比 較17 0.181 3.51 103 0.199 3.25 87 Comparison
18 0.179 3.45 105 0.201 3.13 66 比 較18 0.179 3.45 105 0.201 3.13 66 Comparison
19 0.171 3.52 104 0. 179 3.44 95 本発明19 0.171 3.52 104 0. 179 3.44 95 The present invention
20 0.164 3.54 96 0. 167 3.5 93 本発明20 0.164 3.54 96 0. 167 3.5 93 The present invention
21 0.162 3.13 82 0. 164 2.54 55 比 較 * 1:画像形成層中の総固形分量に対する割合 (質量%) 21 0.162 3.13 82 0. 164 2.54 55 Comparison * 1: Ratio to the total solid content in the image forming layer (mass%)
* 2:画像形成層中の総固形分量に対する画像形成層用バインダー総量の割合 (質 量0 /0) * 2: ratio of the binder total image forming layer to the total solid content in the image-forming layer (mass 0/0)
* 3:モ一^ ^ィ社製:多官能脂肪族イソシァネート  * 3: Made by MOI ^^: Polyfunctional aliphatic isocyanate
* 4:画像形成層中のバインダー総量に対する割合 (質量0 /0) * 4: ratio to the binder total amount of the image forming layer (mass 0/0)
* 5: 23°C/10日保存品(常温 2週間保存後)の性能  * 5: Performance of products stored at 23 ° C for 10 days (after storage for 2 weeks at room temperature)
* 6: 55°C/10曰保存品(常温 2週間保存後)の性能  * 6: Performance of 55 ° C / 10 曰 storage product (after storage for 2 weeks at room temperature)
表 1、 2より明らかなように、本発明の熱現像感光材料は、比較に比べ、カプリ(最小 濃度)、感度を損なうことなぐ高温保存におけるカプリ上昇及び、感度低下を大巾に 抑制できることがわかる。  As is clear from Tables 1 and 2, the photothermographic material of the present invention can greatly suppress capri (minimum density), capri rise during high-temperature storage without degrading sensitivity, and sensitivity reduction. Recognize.

Claims

請求の範囲 The scope of the claims
[1] 支持体上に非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子、感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子、銀ィ オン還元剤及び重合体からなるバインダーを含有する画像形成層を有する熱現像 感光材料において、該画像形成層のバインダー量が、該画像形成層に含有された 総固形分量に対して 25〜35質量%であり、かつ該バインダーが重合度 1000以上 3 [1] A photothermographic material having an image-forming layer containing a non-photosensitive aliphatic silver carboxylic acid salt particle, a photosensitive halogenated silver particle, a silver ion reducing agent, and a polymer binder on a support. The binder amount of the image forming layer is 25 to 35% by mass with respect to the total solid content contained in the image forming layer, and the binder has a polymerization degree of 1000 or more.
000以下の重合体を含有することを特徴とする熱現像感光材料。 A photothermographic material comprising 000 or less of a polymer.
[2] 画像形成層に、イソシァネートイ匕合物を該画像形成層のバインダー量に対して、 0 質量%よりも多く 3. 5質量%以下の範囲で添加されたことを特徴とする請求の範囲 第 1項に記載の熱現像感光材料。 [2] The isocyanate layer compound is added to the image forming layer in an amount of more than 0% by mass and not more than 3.5% by mass with respect to the binder amount of the image forming layer. 2. The photothermographic material according to item 1.
[3] 前記ノインダ一の Tgが 70〜105°Cであることを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1項又は 第 2項に記載の熱現像感光材料。 [3] The photothermographic material according to [1] or [2], wherein the Tg of the noinder is 70 to 105 ° C.
[4] 前記画像形成層がバインダーの少なくとも 1種として、ポリビニルァセタール榭脂を 含有することを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1項〜第 3項のいずれか 1項に記載の熱現 像感光材料。 [4] The photothermographic device according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein the image forming layer contains polyvinyl acetal resin as at least one binder. material.
[5] 前記非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子が、ベヘン酸含有率 70〜99. 99mol% の脂肪酸の銀塩力 なることを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1項〜第 4項のいずれか 1項 に記載の熱現像感光材料。  [5] Any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles have a silver salt strength of a fatty acid having a behenic acid content of 70 to 99.99 mol%. 2. The photothermographic material according to claim 1.
[6] 前記銀イオン還元剤が下記一般式(1)で表されることを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1 項〜第 5項のいずれか 1項に記載の熱現像感光材料。 [6] The photothermographic material according to any one of [1] to [5], wherein the silver ion reducing agent is represented by the following general formula (1).
[化 1]  [Chemical 1]
—般式 (1 ) —General formula (1)
OH , OH  OH, OH
(CH2)n (CH2)m (CH 2 ) n (CH 2 ) m
A! A2 A! A 2
(式中、 Rは水素原子、又は置換基を表す。 R及び Rは各々独立に、炭素原子数が (In the formula, R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. R and R each independently represents the number of carbon atoms.
1 2 3  one two Three
3〜8の分岐アルキル基を表す。 A及び Aは各々独立に、水酸基、又は還元、脱保 護されることにより水酸基を形成しうる基を表し、 n及び mは 3〜5の整数を表す。 ) 前記非感光性脂肪族カルボン酸銀塩粒子と前記感光性ハロゲンィ匕銀粒子の合計 銀量が 0. 8〜1. 5g/m2であることを特徴とする請求の範囲第 1項〜第 6項のいず れか 1項に記載の熱現像感光材料。 Represents 3 to 8 branched alkyl groups. A and A are each independently a hydroxyl group, or reduction or deprotection. Represents a group capable of forming a hydroxyl group by being protected, and n and m represent an integer of 3 to 5. The total silver content of the non-photosensitive aliphatic carboxylic acid silver salt particles and the photosensitive halogenated silver particles is from 0.8 to 1.5 g / m 2 . 6. The photothermographic material according to any one of items 6 above.
PCT/JP2007/061274 2006-06-16 2007-06-04 Thermally developable photosensitive material WO2007145094A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2008521154A JPWO2007145094A1 (en) 2006-06-16 2007-06-04 Photothermographic material

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2006-167191 2006-06-16
JP2006167191 2006-06-16

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007145094A1 true WO2007145094A1 (en) 2007-12-21

Family

ID=38831612

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2007/061274 WO2007145094A1 (en) 2006-06-16 2007-06-04 Thermally developable photosensitive material

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2007145094A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2007145094A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003075953A (en) * 2001-08-31 2003-03-12 Konica Corp Silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material, image recording method and imaging method for the same
JP2003295381A (en) * 2002-03-29 2003-10-15 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Heat-developable photosensitive material
JP2004004650A (en) * 2002-04-23 2004-01-08 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Heat-developable photosensitive material and its image recording method
JP2005024744A (en) * 2003-06-30 2005-01-27 Sekisui Chem Co Ltd Binder for heat developable photosensitive material and heat developable photosensitive material

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003075953A (en) * 2001-08-31 2003-03-12 Konica Corp Silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material, image recording method and imaging method for the same
JP2003295381A (en) * 2002-03-29 2003-10-15 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Heat-developable photosensitive material
JP2004004650A (en) * 2002-04-23 2004-01-08 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Heat-developable photosensitive material and its image recording method
JP2005024744A (en) * 2003-06-30 2005-01-27 Sekisui Chem Co Ltd Binder for heat developable photosensitive material and heat developable photosensitive material

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2007145094A1 (en) 2009-10-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4442553B2 (en) Method for precipitation separation of photosensitive silver halide grain dispersion, precipitate, photosensitive emulsion, and silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material
JP2008209911A (en) Heat-developable light-sensitive material
JP2008058891A (en) Image forming method
JP2007112718A (en) Method and apparatus for producing organic acid metal salt particle, and silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material
JP2008259939A (en) Continuous mixing/reaction apparatus, method for producing organic silver salt particle by using the same and silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material
WO2007145094A1 (en) Thermally developable photosensitive material
JP2007232854A (en) Silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material and image forming method
JP2007121491A (en) Processing method for heat developable silver salt photosensitive material
JP2008058781A (en) Silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material
JP2008203502A (en) Silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material, method for producing the same and image forming method
JP2007279476A (en) Heat developable photosensitive material and heat development processing system of the same
JP2007316275A (en) Silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material and image forming method
WO2007080877A1 (en) Heat-developable photosensitive material and method for heat-development treatment of heat-developable photosensitive material
JP2006349726A (en) Method for producing organic silver salt particles and silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material
JPWO2007010777A1 (en) Image forming method
JP2007086445A (en) Method and apparatus for producing organic silver salt particles, and silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material
JP2009048058A (en) Heat developable photosensitive material
JP2008009037A (en) Silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material, sheetlike photosensitive material and image forming method
JP2008209465A (en) Heat-developable light-sensitive material
JP2008209600A (en) Heat-developable light-sensitive material
JP2008090131A (en) Image forming method
JP2006309107A (en) Thermographic method of silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material
JP2008180863A (en) Heat developable photosensitive material
JP2007121818A (en) Silver salt photothermographic dry imaging material, method for manufacturing the same, and image forming method
JP2008185887A (en) Heat developable photosensitive material and method for manufacturing the same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 07767022

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008521154

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 07767022

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1